Home

Integra - J&S Repair, Inc.

1. lf swath adjustments are performing inaccurately adjust the sensitivity accordingly Sensitivity 3 is the default setting Other settings include e Sensitivity 5 Use with RTK or DGPS sub meter terrain compensated GPS e Sensitivity 4 Use with RTK or DGPS sub meter GPS Terrain compensation recommended e Sensitivity 3 Use with sub meter accurate GPS e Sensitivity 2 Use with 1 meter accurate GPS e Sensitivity 1 Swath sections are all on or all off Use with 1 meter accurate GPS ABOUT HARVEST CONFIGURATIONS To set up a Harvest Operation Configuration first press the Setup wrench button and go to the Setup screen as shown 229 ONIHOLINON a131A Underneath the Configuration Tab press the Add button Configuration Product to add a Harvest Configuration A wizard will guide you Vos through the process of selecting or creating a IEI configuration that includes Combine Header and Crops settings K Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field Operation Wizard For more information on Field Operation SC Configurations see Start Field Operation on page 23 Note You can also use the Manage Equipment button to create or edit specific vehicles and implements PRE HARVEST CHECKLIST DISPLAY PREPARATION e Create a backup of your spring information Go to the Setup Display menu to create a backup Select Copy Al
2. Note You can also use the Manage Equipment button to view a list of specific vehicles and implements The Configuration Setup screen appears An example is shown the appearance of this screen Configuration Setup Vehicle e will vary depending upon your particular operating india m fa New Holland T900 12 row planter SeedCommand contig u ration 3 Depend ng u pon you r particu lar GPS f i Implement 12 row planter Controller SeedCommand configuration this process may include the following Full Swath 30 000 ft Serial Number 2003810001 Rows 12 Device SeedCommand tas ks Speed Sections 3 i zii ap PC ou ca 1 Equipment Settings Adjust Equipment Settings for Rate Control Users of FE SeedCommand configurations should adjust settings at the Automatic peme Equipment Configuration Settings screen For more information see Equipment Configuration Settings for Rate Control on page 26 2 Speed Input Setup For more information see Speed Input Settings on page 47 3 Calibrate Distance For more information see Calibrate Distance on page 48 93 NOLLVHNDIHNOD 4 AutoSwath Settings if using AutoSwath For more information see AutoSwath on page 50 Also see Fixing Overplanting and Underplanting in AutoSwath below 5 GPS Offsets Adjust GPS offsets for the Antenna Tab and the Hitch Tab For more information see GPS Offsets on p
3. Field Operation Options During a field operation you can change or end the o field operation by pressing on the Grower Farm Field Operatian End current field operation and switch to a new one i Start Field Operation button This opens the Field Operation Unload current field operation Operation Options screen as shown e Change Operations Pressing this button ends the current field operation and allows you to start a new one Pressing this button ends the current field operation and opens the Field Operation _ Wizard where you may create a new field operation End Operation Pressing this button ends the current field operation The Home screen then appears as before the creation of a field operation as shown on Home Screen on page 11 HOME SCREEN AFTER CONFIGURATION After you have created an Equipment Operating SE EE eet Configuration and then selected a Grower Farm and Field for that configuration the Home screen John Jones Farm North Farm lt i gt Feld Eat 00 will appear as shown Operation Summary HH3 132 5 Ib ac 3245 2 Ib 24 5 ac Productrity 18 2 ac Area Complete 24 5 ac 32 5 Average Speed 5 0 mph Area Remaining 50 8 ac 67 5 1 36 07 PM Operating Time 1 20 45 12162009 7 Lem EE e Operator button Allows you to select a machine operator from the drop down list Machine operator information is logged with all field operations Operator information
4. ccccccccssccccescecceeeecsuseccececeseeseueecsueessaeessaueessaeees 109 Calibrating Seed Rate Meters rrrrrrnranrnnnrnnnrrnrnnnrnvnnnnrnrnnnrennannsnnnnnnrnnnanssnnnnssennnnn 109 VII SLNGLNOD 40 a1av Rate Control Map Screen eee nenea nana 111 Produ CONUOI LOGO E 111 Rate Control Settings cccccccscesecesceeceeccseeescceecescseteecceseescceeeesscedsesseeeenses 112 LOGGING POSEIDONS cea E 113 Showing Prescriptions on the Map Gcreen eee 113 TOWNS NOO UNO AE EE EEE 114 Hydraulic Seed Control Zero Flow Offset Vartaton eee 114 Hydraulic Seed Control Zero Flow Offset Vartaton eee 115 Stepper Seed Control Meter Alarms ccccccccecssseecceeeeeeeeeeeesseseeseeeeeesaeees 115 Monitoring Seed Tube Monitor Module 117 SeedCommand Map Screen Examples e eee 117 Seed Tube Monitor Module CGonfguraton eee eee 117 Seed Monitor Setup eee eee eanaa 118 ANC e ie PENE 119 Seed Tube Sensor Configuration cccceccccceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeeesaaees 120 STMM Split Row Configurations eee eee eenae 120 SEEL MORIlOI ODUOIIS E 120 Display Options eee eee nana 121 Ee We 121 Seed Monitor Alams cc eee eee aaa 122 Planting Map Screen Zoom to Evtent eee eee eee eee 122 Planting Map Screen Zoom Deia eee eee eee 123 FEET SU LE 123 FEE SAN 124 Advanced Seed Montomg eee eee en na 124 Planter Performance EE enee o aceea ba dati ad ia an
5. Dry fertilizer blends are set up by using the on screen Dry Fertilizer Blend wizard described in the following steps A dry blend can contain up to seven individual components To create a Dry Fertilizer Blend go to the Setup Product Tab and press the Add button 197 GEIWKET EK Product Mix Setup Wizard Step 1 of 4 At the Choose Product Type screen press Add Product Mix The Product Mix Setup Wizard appears as shown Bre 1 Select Dry Blend from the list box and press the blue right arrow button to continue Select Tank Mix or Dry Blend 2 Enter a Base Amount of product and the controlling Units for the dry product blend Press the blue right arrow button to continue Note The Base Amount is the total weight of product for the fertilizer blend The Base Amount does not need to match the actual volume of product that will be applied but is used only to establish the ratio of all products to the total volume 3 Press the Add button to start the process of adding components to the fertilizer blend Note Any liquid herbicides set up within the system can be added to create an impregnated blend product 4 Select the desired component from the list box New components can be set up at this time if required 5 Enter the amount of the first component 6 Press Add to start adding an additional component A dry mix can contain up to seven individual components 7 The remaining Base Amount that i
6. General Boom Control State Control Mode Left Automatic Target Height cm Center Automatic Remote Switch Right Automatic Roll Automatic Location Serial Height Roll Temperature Left Outer 91 cm 21 1 C Left Inner 89 cm 21 1 C Main Lift 102 cm 21 1 C Right Inner 84 cm 21 1 C Right Outer 81 cm 21 1 C Boom Frame 8 0 N A 194 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION SPREADER DirectCommand controls the conveyor and spinner speed and monitors the bin level The control modules support PWM motorized servo Mark IV 2 Mark IV A and Mark V hydraulic control valves DirectCommand also supports application control of multiple bin spinner spreaders CREATE CONFIGURATION Starting at the Home page press gt gt Troen gt e gt mens Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt Add button gt Application button Application A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle implement and controllers Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field Operation Wizard For more information on Field Operation Configurations see Start Field Operation on page 23 SETUP CONFIGURATION Starting at the Home page press gt da gt Configuration gt your configuration gt gt ZC Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor but
7. If you drive your vehicle onto the Projected Path the system guidance uses this as the Followed Path Select a Previous SmartPath Pass If you have specified SmartPath as your desired pattern but you are not following an active guidance pattern the Guidance System automatically begins searching for SmartPath patterns for your use If you wish to use a previously created SmartPath pattern you can do so by pressing on CH the Active Line Cycle button This button allows you to cycle between available SmartPath patterns 1 e Notes When the guidance system looks for other available SmartPath patterns it first displays the nearest available pass You can adjust the available area in which the Guidance System searches for previously created SmartPath passes To do this adjust the Heading Threshold settings on the Smart Tab of the Guidance Option screen For more information see SmartPath Guidance Options on page 81 Create AB Line Within a SmartPath Pass In addition to creating irregular curved passes within SmartPath you can also create straight AB lines to be used in conjunction with the curved passes By doing this you can switch back and forth between a SmartPath and Straight AB pattern As you are using a SmartPath pattern press the AB button Follow the instructions on creating an AB line as explained in New AB Pattern on page 77 80 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 Once the AB line is created you
8. New Pattern 1 Press New Pattern Press the New Pattern button on the Guidance Tab of the Pattern Options Mapping Toolbox n Use A Haading 2 Select Pattern The New Pattern screen appears as shown po AB Implement Width 30 000 It re Wee _ gt 3 Select from the following available guidance patterns e SmartPath For more information see SmartPath on page 79 e Straight AB e Pivot For more information see Pivot on page 87 e Adaptive Curve For more information see Adaptive Curve on page 88 e Identical Curve For more information see dentical Curve on page 89 the number pad to enter in the heading in degrees For more information see A Pattern on page 87 Note If you would like to use an A Heading pattern option check the Use A Heading check box and use 4 Change Guidance Width optional In addition to these Guidance Options a default Guidance Width is shown on the upper right hand side of the New Pattern screen This Guidance Width is based on the Implement Width that you specified in Implement Configuration If you wish to change this Guidance Width enter the new number using the numeric keypad Press the green check mark button when finished Note Guidance Width allows you to use guidance lines independent of implement width T JONVAINY a Li Guidance A a 5 Mark the A Point The Map screen changes its appearance to
9. Press the Area button to open the Area Calibration screen 3 Enter correct area Use the numeric keypad to enter the correct area The scale of this area change is then shown on this screen Press the green check mark button when finished GRAIN HARVEST DIAGNOSTICS When performing a Harvest operation you can also access the Harvest Diagnostic screen PS as shown Technical support may request that you look at this screen for help in diagnosing a problem To get to this screen press the Display Information button as shown at left When the Devices screen opens press and highlight the Moisture Module listing in the CAN Device list then press the Diagnostics button The Grain Harvest Diagnostics screen appears as shown Grain Harvest Diagnostics Region Distance 18257 ft Flow Rate 5 12 Moisture Raw Flow Max 716 Temperature 3 8 Flow Min 172 Temperature Raw 2 69 Flow Offset 350 Proximity Status ON Relay Status ON sensor Force 2 95 Motor Current 0 9 Header Raw 296 Speed Pulses 103 e Speed Pulses The Grain Harvest Diagnostics screen includes the following information e Flow Rate Grain flow rate shown in kilograms per second e Flow Max Flow Min and Flow Offset Raw flow values used for diagnostic purposes e Sensor Force Force of grain flow shown in Newtons e Header Raw Raw value of header sensor Shows the number of ground speed pulses from the combine e Moisture Raw Ra
10. Prior to logging harvest data you must calibrate the header sensor Crops must be set up within the system to proceed with the calibration routine Go to the Header Tab select the correct header from the list and press the Calibrate Header Sensor button The Header Sensor Calibration wizard appears 1 Read Instructions Read the header sensor calibration instructions fully before proceeding Press the blue right arrow button to start the calibration process Header Sensor Calibration Step 1 of 2 2 Set Max and Min Header Height Set Maximum and Minimum Header Height Set the maximum and minimum header height Step la Raise the header all the way up and press Set Max Set Max e Raise the header all of the way up and press Set Max Step lb Lower the header all the way down and press Set Min Set Min i i e Lower the header all of the way down and press Set Min HOTE The max and min only needs to be set once for a combine e Press the blue right arrow button to continue Header Sensor Calibration Step 2 of 2 3 Select Crop and set Stop Height sd uka det g Select the correct crop type from the list box Raise or pe seng com d FA lower the header to the height where you would like to E SE 7 have the area logging turn on and off Press Set Height Step 2b With header at desired stop height press Set Height Mest i N A The position relating to the Stop Height will be represented as a percentage 33 in the example to
11. Sensor Configuration Alarms 130 Configuration and Alarms To do this go to eres gitar Configuration Setup and press the Seed Monitor tee pre Setup button The KINZE Planter Monitor Setup screen appears as shown The Planter opens the Planter Configuration screen For more information see K NZE Planter Configuration INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING e The Sensor shows the Sensor Configuration screen shows the status of each row as well as other sensor information For more information see K NZE Sensor Configuration on page 132 e The Alarms button pulls up the Seed Monitor Alarms screen where the operator can set a threshold for the alarm For more information see Alarms on KINZE Planter Monitor on page 139 KINZE Planter Configuration Planter Configuration Settings Planter Configuration e Front Units and Rear Units Planter Configuration Ground Speed Edgevar Front Unks earum EEE 1 Sensors Use the up and down arrow keys to adjust the number of l ene alibrate z r Pickup Se front and rear planting units if necessary Speed Source Se e Shaft RPM Sensors SEN Use the up and down arrows to adjust the number of Sensors Row Spacing Other Sensors Shaft RPM Sensors if necessary gt q Sensitivity Down Press SDS E Row Spacing o zj T Ou Sensor Air Comp Ir Tank press Shows the minimum row spacing of the planter Use the SS
12. This is a combination of the SPN and the FMI for example 522102 12 59 IVNINYS LL TVALHY IA 60 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 GPS GPS BUTTON During your field operation the GPS satellite button in the upper left hand side of the S Status Bar should appear as green which means you are receiving a differential GPS signal If this icon appears yellow you are still receiving GPS but are not receiving a differential signal and if it appears gray then you have lost GPS In either case you should check your GPS settings SETUP CG D gt EE Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt GPS button GPS Guidance Setup e Guidance Steering Lightbar Guidance Steering GPS Settings and Required Differential AACHEN Port Correction for Guidance N k Setti i WAAS EGNOS X For more information see the Guidance Backup i ETE Dear e Differential Source orrection for Guidance Defaults i Ep Select choice of WAAS EGNOS Satellite bd OmniSTAR or Beacon Coast Guard differential sources 15 Minutes Age of Differential ds e Wrench button Pressing the Wrench button opens different settings screens depending on whether you are using OmniSTAR or Beacon Note If using OmniSTAR see OmniSTAR Settings on page 62 e GPS Rate Hz The GPS Position Rate drop down menu represents the cycles per second that the display receives guidance information from viewable satelli
13. se are shown in front of a blue background Examples are shown in the table below e A Section Indicators Home button Pressing the Home button takes you to the Home screen A Map button Pressing the Map button takes you to the Map screen Pressing it more than once cycles the Map screen to zoom in and out 2 N33H2S NOY ZOOM DETAILS B ZOOM TO EXTENT B PERSPECTIVE VIEW SS Note The Perspective View is only available when guidance is active EJ Video button Pressing this button takes you to the video screen Note For more information on the Video screen see Video on page 36 AutoSwath button Pressing this button turns the AutoSwath feature on and off When AutoSwath is on the icon is green when it is off the icon is white AutoSwath ON AutoSwath OFF iis Area Logging Status button This button appears for configurations that do not use rate control such as Tillage Harvest Planting operations that do not use SeedCommand and Application operations that do not use DirectCommand Pressing this button turns logging on and off 8 The NORAC Engage button enables boom height control This button can toggle back and forth between Automatic Mode and Manual Mode e When you enable Automatic Mode this button turns green with three lines appearing underneath the triangle At the same time the display beeps three times e When you disable Automatic Mode
14. 126 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING DI Press button to view Advance Seed Monitoring screen with seed trench Row Performance screen ei 1 63 ER AL Row 1 Performance PI 94 6 3 6 1 8 e M Zoom In e N Zoom Out e A Row Indicator e B Population e C Spacing Quality e D Seed Spacing e E Singulation e F Skips e G Doubles e H Singulation History Spacing Quality History toggle e Ui Errors e J Bar Graph e K Virtual Seed Trench e L Play Pause button The Row Performance screen displays information on specific rows The user can toggle through the rows using the arrow buttons F i Previous Row button D Next Row button The Singulation History Spacing Quality History bar graph gives a 10 second for each row 127 DNIHOLINON VIRTUAL SEED TRENCH The virtual seed trench shows the placement of each seed of a problematic row to help determine if the problem is in the seed meter or seed tube The yellow and red indicators show where there are seeding errors The display does not log this information q Double P K Skip e 4 Poor Spacing D Play Resume button ul Pause button Zoom In button Zoom Out button 128 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING KINZE KINZE PLANTER MONITOR MODULE The KINZE Planter Monitor Module is a feature that displays planting data from a KINZE Population Monitor on the Map screen Note
15. From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button Highlight the configuration on the list that you want to switch map for Press the WRENCH button in the middle of the screen Press the AUXILIARY INPUT button on the left hand side Press the ASSIGN button in the upper right hand corner The switch highlighted in green is the one selected and the Seed Clutch boxes highlighted below are what that switch controls 7 Press on the NUMBER 2 SWITCH 8 Press on NUMBER 2 SEED CLUTCH 9 Press on NUMBER 3 SWITCH 10 Press on NUMBER 3 SEED CLUTCH 11 Press on NUMBER 4 SWITCH 12 Press on NUMBER 4 SEED CLUTCH 13 Continue until all of your sections are on their own switch 14 Press the GREEN CHECK if NO Hydraulic Drive continue with step 15 if you have Hydraulic Drive 15 Press the MASTER SWITCH 16 Press the BLUE DOWN ARROW to the right of the screen 17 Press on SEED COMMAND NUMBER 1 18 Press the GREEN CHECK 19 Check that all the Seed Clutches and Seed Command are on the switches you want 20 Repeat steps if they are not or press RESET ALL to start over 21 Press the BACK ARROW in the upper left corner 22 Press the BACK ARROW again to return to Main Setup Screen Loading a Field Operation Configuration Load Run Screen IMPORTANT To Load a Field Operation Configuration you will need to have your Integra display in the tractor and connected to the planter 1 From the HOME SCREEN press START FIELD OPERATION button 2 Using the drop do
16. In the Frequency drop down list box select the geographic region where you are located If you wish to enter a Custom Frequency select Custom Then enter the frequency number in the text box below OmniSTAR Note The display does not come with custom frequency numbers Enter a number only if directed to by e Baud Rate The baud rate represents the speed at which your receiver obtains information from the satellite Note You should always keep the baud rate set at 1200 e Convergence Threshold SERIAL PORT SETTINGS CF gt gt iS gt Ce Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt GPS button gt Port Settings RAS The Serial Port Settings screen is the place where Output Baud NMEA Messages you can adjust GPS output The appearance of the EE v GN Serial Port Settings screen varies depending upon your model of GPS receiver Shown to the left is the Serial Port Settings screen as it would appear for an i H operator of a GPS 1500 antenna Gsv h WTG Speed GPS Position Rate Hz Shown to the left is the Serial Port Settings screen as it would appear for an operator of a GPS 2500 antenna GPS Port Setup Output Baud Rate NMEA Messages 38400 v CG SOA Position L VIG GPS Position Rate Hz Speed GLL 65 TI N GPS Port Setup PORT A The appearance of this TSIP receiver GPS Port mm NMEA Messages Setup screen is the same for both Ports A and B Gg ES Cutp
17. Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW Press KEYPAD button Enter the Implement Name Press the GREEN CHECK Press the GREEN CHECK to exit the Implement Setup Wizard Controller Tab Note Controller is only set up with a hydraulic drive equipped planter 1 From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button 2 Press the MANAGE EQUIPMENT button 3 Press the CONTROLLER tab 4 Press the GREEN PLUS 5 Press the PLANTING button under Choose Controller Type 6 Using the drop down arrow select SEED COMMAND as the Device 7 Using the drop down arrow select HYDRAULIC SEED CONTROL as the Device Type 8 Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW 9 Using the up down arrows select the number of drives 3600 3660 1 drive 3800 2 drives 10 Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW 11 Press the GREEN CHECK to select SEED COMMAND as the Controller Name 12 Press the GREEN CHECK 13 Press the BACK ARROW to exit Vehicle Implement Controller Setup GPS Offset 1 Press the VEHICLE tab in the upper right 2 Highlight the Vehicle in the Vehicle list 3 Press the GPS OFFSETS tab in the lower right corner 4 Press the KEYPAD button for Antenna Location from Rear Axle 5 Enter the value inches 6 Press the GREEN CHECK 7 Using the drop down arrow select INFRONT or BEHIND 8 Press the KEYPAD button for Antenna Location from Centerline 9 Enter the value inches 10 Press the GREEN CHECK 11 Using the drop down arrow select Left or Right 12 Press the KEYPAD button for Antenna Height from Ground
18. Solution 1 Verify that the InSight display and Liquid Control Module are both updated to the latest available firmware 2 The boom switch cable may be wired incorrectly For details refer to the installation instructions Note This issue should only occur on John Deere sprayers Make sure the black wires in the switch cable are connected Problem Booms will not turn on when the foot pedal is on Solution Make sure the Master Switch Input is set to External 2 under the Auxiliary Input Settings Problem AutoSwath turns on the boom too fast or too slow Solution 1 Check GPS offsets in the vehicle setup to verify all the measurements are correct 2 Verify the boom offsets are appropriate for the sprayer Note Boom offsets are measured from the center of the vehicle to the center of the boom section 157 IOYLNOD ALVY OICHT 3 Adjust the turn on look ahead and turn off look ahead to fine tune Automatic Swath Control performance 4 Verify the boom offsets are appropriate for the sprayer Problem No As Applied rate Solution 1 Check cabling from the channel connection of the Liquid Control Module to the flow meter 2 Check flow meter for product buildup and proper operation Problem Rate is erratic Solution 1 Verify that the rate display smoothing option is check marked in the setup of the configuration 2 Check the controller settings of the active configuration Verify that the valve setting f
19. e EPA Number Enter the EPA Registration Number which is listed on the product s container label e Restricted Use Pesticide If the product is a Restricted Use Pesticide press the check box This information will also be included for your records INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP Crop Settings EE The Crop Settings screen is where you can edit product information for an existing Harvest product in the Product List To go to the Crop Settings screen first go to the Setup screen s Product Tab Underneath the Crop Settings box press the Edit button and the Crop Settings screen appears as shown Ib bu Expand bushels far all grains below dry At the Crop Settings screen you can enter information regarding the following items e Dry The percentage of grain moisture used to calculate Dry Bushels e Weight to Volume The Weight to Volume conversion number used to calculate bushels e Expand bushels for all grains below dry lf the moisture of the harvested crop is below the dry percentage the display increases weight to show the weight which would be shown if the crop equalled or exceeded the dry percentage MANAGEMENT BUTTON CG gt Sem Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Management Barn button The Management tabs which are accessible from the Management button on the Setup screen include Grower Season Field and Operator GROWER The Grower is a global setting that ref
20. either left or right which you wish to shift the pattern relative to the AB Line When finished press the green check mark button e If you have chosen the Shift by Rows option use the first numeric keypad to select _ the number of rows you wish to shift Next use the second numeric keypad to select the row spacing in inches that you wish to shift the pattern Use the bottom drop down menu to enter the direction either left or right which you wish to shift the pattern relative to the AB Line When finished press the green check mark button Note For an illustration of the Shift by Rows option see Pivot on page 87 83 AONVGINS MANAGE PATTERNS The Manage Pattern button located on the Guidance Tab of the Mapping Toolbox opens the Manage Patterns screen You can use the Manage Patterns screen to import pattern files export pattern files remove pattern files or edit pattern names Note You can also import and export patterns at the External Storage Operations button on the Home screen For more information see External Storage Operations on page 43 If you import or export patterns from the External Storage Operations screen you will be asked to specify a Grower Farm and Field The Manage Pattern button can be accessed when you are not actively Name Swath Created Pattern Press the Manage Patterns button and ME 60 000 12 23 2009 Straight shown at left 60 000 12 23 2009 Curve Ma
21. 13 Enter the value inches 14 Press the GREEN CHECK 15 Press the HITCH tab 16 Press the KEYPAD button for Front Draw Bar 17 Enter the value inches A MZE Rev 9 11 Integra Basic Configuration Setup Integra Service Manual 18 Press the GREEN CHECK 19 Press the KEYPAD button for Rear Draw Bar 20 Enter the value inches 21 Press the GREEN CHECK 22 Press the KEYPAD button for Front 3 point Hitch 23 Enter the value inches 24 Press the GREEN CHECK 25 Press the KEYPAD button for Rear 3 point Hitch 26 Enter the value inches 27 Press the GREEN CHECK 28 Press the GREEN CHECK when complete to exit GPS Offsets Product Tab From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button Press the PRODUCT tab Press the GREEN PLUS Press the SEED VARIETY button under Add Product Using the drop down arrow under Crop select the CROP that you are setting up information for Using the drop down arrow under Units as Planted select the UNIT you are using Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW Press the WRENCH button next to the Variety or Hybrid Manufacturer drop down box Press the GREEN PLUS 10 Enter the HYBRID MANUFACTURER 11 Press the GREEN CHECK 12 Press the GREEN CHECK to exit the Edit List 13 Using the drop down arrow under Variety or Hybrid Manufacturer select the MANUFACTURER NAME 14 Press the KEYBOARD under Variety or Hybrid Name 15 Type the PRODUCT NAME 16 Press the GREEN CHECK 17 Press the GREEN CHECK to confirm the
22. AB manager 81 A B smartpath toggle 76 AB smartpath toggle 81 active line cycle 76 80 adaptive curve 83 86 88 area count 86 heading change 86 heading threshold 86 new pass 86 adaptive pattern options 86 add configuration 12 add new calibration 239 retire calibration 240 add product 13 add product mix 13 advanced combine settings 232 all area covered 82 area 224 area button 241 area calibration 240 area count 86 automatic region changing 225 226 227 automatic swath control 228 automatic variety tracking 225 226 227 autoswath 228 RTK 229 sensitivity 229 B base path 80 boundary 225 bushels per hour 224 C c value 239 calibrate header sensor 232 calibration load 237 calibration sequence 230 calibration value 239 CAN device list moisture module 241 cancel 75 center pivot 87 clean grain elevator 225 230 clear map 225 clear nudge 86 combine settings button 232 configuration settings 231 configuration tab add button 12 configuration type 12 console button 12 copy all files 230 copy log files 84 copy to card 84 crop settings dry percentage 15 expand bushels 15 weight to volume 15 crop settings screen 15 D data 225 delete product 14 diagnostic 224 diagnostics 241 flow max 241 flow min 241 flow offset 241 flow rate 241 header raw 241 moisture raw 241 motor current 242 proximity sensor 242 relay status 242 sensor force 241 speed pulses 241 temperature 242 temperature raw 242 diagnostics button
23. FEATURES TAB Unlocking Features General Features Advanced Feature Status Feature Description Automatic Swath Control nabled Multiple Product nabled Norac UCS Interface n bled Fan Frame feed Gate Control SETUP The Features Tab is where you can enter unlock codes Unlock codes are unique to the serial number of each display and the feature registration number You must supply these numbers to your dealer when purchasing any unlock codes Use the on screen keyboard button to enter the unlock code and press the green check mark button to enable the feature S Note Once a feature is unlocked that feature remains with that display and cannot be transferred to another ADVANCED TAB The Advanced Tab allows you to specify settings for copying log files specify Key Switch Standby settings view and manually upgrade module firmware and create and restore backup files General Owner Features Advanced Key Switch Log Files Memory Standby TC Export data files Create m Copy h on shutdown Backup A Debug Files 5 min Export store J Clear Data Files Backup Pl Debug Files Export Clear Internal Remove Diagnostic Files Memory Patterns View Module Advanced Service Firmware Parameters M and Service Mode functionality on the Advanced Tab is reserved for use by the manufacturer DO NOT change any of these settings without specific instruction from the manufacturer A CAUTION T
24. Field Operation and Product Additionally you can create and view Smart Reports and view a Summary Map For more information see Summary Report on page 37 as well as Smart Reports on page 39 zi e External Storage Operations button i e Copy your field data upgrade display firmware as well as import export and manage files For more information see External Storage Operations on page 43 e Report Details button Edit any of the report items that are listed in Smart Reports For more information see Report Details on page 37 me CONFIGURATION SETUP SCREEN The Configuration Setup screen is where you can make seitings adjustments for your NG equipment ground speed GPS and controllers To view the Configuration Setup screen go to the Setup screen s Configuration Tab and press the Setup button as shown at left The appearance of this Configuration Setup screen varies based on your particular configuration Some DirectCommand and SeedCommand configurations include settings that are mentioned in those individual chapters Most Configuration Settings screens will include the following buttons e Equipment Configuration Settings For more information see below Speed Input For more information see Report Details on page 37 e AutoSwath For more information see AutoSwath on page 50 e GPS Offsets For more information see GPS Offsets on page 51 e Swath Section Off
25. Maximum N Rate instead e Rate Increment This setting defines the rate changes steps the system uses to change the N rate This setting will be in Ibs of N ac kg of N ha e Economic Optimal Rate Input the total amount of nitrogen used by the plant over the growing season e N Credits Input the amount of N that is available to the plant in the soil e Pre Topdress Rate Input the amount of N that has already been applied European Settings Settings e Minimum Rate This setting is a threshold that defines the lowest lbs of N ac kg of N ha the user wishes to apply If the algorithm prescribes an N rate lower than the Minimum N Rate the system shall apply the Minimum N Rate instead e Maximum Rate This setting is a threshold that defines the highest lbs of N ac kg of N ha the user wishes to apply If the algorithm prescribes an N rate higher than the Maximum N Rate the system shall apply the Maximum N Rate instead e Rate Increment This setting defines the rate changes steps the system uses to change the N rate This setting will be in Ibs of N ac kg of N ha e Managed Rate The total amount of N crop will consume This value will be region specific and will be defined by the user e Number of Applications The total number of times per season the user will top dress N in the field In Europe this will typically be 3 times per season This value will be input by the user e Planned Rate The rate the f
26. Perspective View as shown Additionally the buttons available on the Mapping Toolbox change Among these new buttons is the Set A button which appears at the bottom of the Mapping Toolbox Press the Set A button when you wish to mark your A point 6 Drive distance of AB Line The place where you marked your A point now appears with a green ball as shown Additionally the Set A button now appears as Set B However the Set B button appears as greyed out and remains so until you drive a minimum of 100 feet 30 meters Note If you are creating a Pivot pattern you must drive a minimum of 160 feet 49 meters before marking the B point 7 Mark B Point Once you have driven a minimum of 100 feet 30 meters the Set B button appears as a solid text after which time you can mark a B point Mark the B point by pressing the Set B button 8 AB Line appears When you have marked the B point the AB line appears on the Map screen as shown The end of the AB line is marked with a red point At the center of the lightbar the distance is shown from the current guidance line 9 Create next pass Turn left or right for the next swath The next pass is automatically generated Steer the vehicle so that you center the green lights on the lightbar as you drive forward along the swath 78 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 automatically extends the guidance path for the following swaths Note On straight AB lines if you co
27. Spacing Display Averages Soybeans Osds rew E Calibrate High Row nS Ce 1 27900 Low Row A 1 27300 Ignore seed alarms when rate ae AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A wem INTET TIRA Quick Reference Guide DirectCommand Liquid Legend Select d Rate Control Settings Rate 2 Increment Prescription Guidance Boundary T Marker section Indicators E Swath 0 ft 0 in Pressure PSI Mair 52 Agitation 27 Auxiliary 35 Boom Height Control Options Sensitivity Target Height Injection Controls Directinjection Agitate AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A INE Quick Reference Guide DirectCommand Dry Legend Select Rate Control Settings Increment Prescription pom E Guidance Boundary Marker d P Minimum Flaw Spreader Control Spread Width channel 1 Ghannel2 Channel 3 60 ft oe Spinner speed Product Feed Gate 1 Conveyor 1 Densi Openin Rate 600 rpm Psang 58 lb ft 2 in 0 256 ft rev Chain Oiler Static Calibration Calibration In Field AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A l l SITAR AX Quick Reference Guide Configuration Setup Settings 1 La men GPS Offsets T EEN Hitch Speed Input Primary Backup Calibrate Distance Equipment S
28. Table View monitored by the Seed Tube Monitor Module Seed Sensors Ss including the following wm E e Row unit seeds per second ver e Row unit seeds per acre 59957 59957 59957 y a a a a a a om j KO Vir EI hap Pa _ Note This can also be accessed on the CAN device list under Diagnostics 121 DNIHOLINON SEED MONITOR ALARMS RTT ey The Seed Monitor Alarms screen is where you can i adjust Seed Tube Monitor Module alarm thresholds This screen can be accessed in one of two ways Pressing the Alarms button at the Seed Monitor Option screen Pressing the Alarms button at the Seed Monitor Setup screen High and Low buttons assign a percentage of error that will trigger the rate alarm e The Disable High and Disable Low buttons deactivate the respective high or low rate alarms e The Select All button selects all rows so that you may change the alarm threshold for the entire group PLANTING MAP SCREEN ZOOM TO EXTENT D EES e A GPS Status ELEN AT Fo Cy HH NGI EN B Total Field Acres Re C On screen Lightbar D Ground Speed e E Diagnostics button e F Productivity tab Variety e G Logging Status button e H AutoSwath e I Map View button e J Home button H e K Map Legend Varieties POE Notes e Pressing the Map View button will cycle between the available map screen views and the appearance o
29. The switch box is connected to the Auxiliary Module but is in the Off position e Grey The switch box is not connected to the Auxiliary Module CIR Technical support may request that you look at this screen for help in diagnosing a problem To get to this screen press the Display Information button as shown When the Devices screen opens press the Aux Device listing in the CAN Device list Auxiliary Input Diagnostic mmm is R i i i Ground Speed Pulses 0 Note The E2 position is the indicator for the foot box AUTOSWATH CZ oe DEE Configuration gt gt gt Swath Control Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt Automatic Swath Control button 50 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP The Automatic Swath Control feature turns sections off and on automatically based upon the following conditions Automatic Swath Control Outside Boundary Option Coverage Option Turnn On Look Ahead Keep Unchanged a Minimize Skip sE Entering and exiting internal and outer field sea boundaries Turn Section On Minimize Overlap User Defined 2 e Entering and exiting previously applied areas within a field At the Configuration Setup screen press the AutoSwath button Assuming you are performing a Tillage Application or Planting operation the
30. always take the time to check for proper seed placement in the field and make system setting adjustments as needed Do not rely solely upon the appearance of the On Screen map The on screen map will not show gaps and overlaps caused by incorrect GPS Offsets or AutoSwath Look Ahead settings Verify settings with the following procedure 1 Stop the planter within 20 feet of the planted headland 2 Select one row unit from each planter swath section to observe 3 Remove the down pressure from the closing wheel of each selected row unit 4 Hold the closing wheels off the ground by attaching a chain or strap from the hopper support panel to the closing wheel arm This prevents the closing wheels from closing the seed trench Securing these closing wheels up allows you to observe the planted seed in the trench so that you can observe when the AutoSwath is turned off and on during the seed application 5 Resume planting in your normal fashion then stop when you are 20 feet out of the headland of the next pass 6 Stop the planter and observe the AutoSwath shutting off and turning on to see if the results are acceptable e f the results are correct then return the closing wheels to their previous operational state Close the seed trench on the observed rows and return to planting e If you suspect the results are incorrect then adjust the appropriate look ahead setting one tenth 1 second per trial When making changes to the look ahead settings
31. d 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 10 summons the Assign Auxiliary Input Settings screen as shown The top of EL E2 ES E4 XIEX Auxiliary Input this screen shows a visual display of all switches and external inputs The switches and external inputs that are DirectLiquid unassigned are shown with a yellow X Controller On Off 1 Left Fence Row mark ea SD Right Fence Row If you would like to change the default eo switch mapping configuration select the switch from the top row of inputs Next select which switch function that switch controls from the options at the bottom of the menu AUXILIARY INPUT HELP If you need help adjusting the Auxiliary Input settings then press the question mark key as shown at left The Auxiliary Assignment Help screen appears which provides definitions for each of the icons shown below sa sek Wl Note DirectCommand users can control fence row nozzles through a Directtommand switch box by mapping the switches in Auxiliary Input Settings The fence row nozzles can be mapped to any switch 49 SONILLAS AUXILIARY INPUT DIAGNOSTICS The Auxiliary Input Diagnostics screen lists the number of Ground Speed Pulses coming in from the radar to the Auxiliary Module Additionally the bottom row of boxes lists the active switches These color coded boxes display the following diagnostics e Green The switch box is connected to the Auxiliary Module in the On position e Black
32. make sure to adjust these settings only one tenth 1 second per trial Larger adjustments can cause unintentional large changes in the AutoSwath s performance When adjusting the look ahead numbers from the suggested settings it is recommended that you observe multiple trials to confirm the operations accuracy e If you encounter overplanting or underplanting problems see Fixing Overplanting and Underplanting in AutoSwath on page 98 97 HLYVMSOLNY FIXING OVERPLANTING AND UNDERPLANTING IN AUTOSWATH AutoSwath Function Turn Off Look Ahead Problem Overplanting Recommended Action Increase look ahead number Result The AutoSwath anticipates headlands sooner and turns the planter off sooner Problem Underplanting Recommended Action Decrease look ahead number Result The AutoSwath anticipates headlands later and turns the planter off later AutoSwath Function Turn On Look Ahead Problem Overplanting Recommended Action Decrease look ahead number Result The AutoSwath anticipates headlands later and turns the planter on later Problem Underplanting Recommended Action Increase look ahead number Result The AutoSwath anticipates headlands sooner and turns the planter on sooner 98 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING RATE CONTROL HYDRAULIC SEED RATE CONTROL The Hydraulic Seed Control Module allows operators to control up to three hydraulic motor drives with the di
33. the left Move the header above and below the Stop Height When below the Stop Height the display reads Down when above the Stop Height the display reads Up To clear Min Max and Stop Height values for all Step 2c Select another Crop to set Stop Height ar press FINISH headers press Reset All A CAUTION If Reset All is pressed the sensor will have to be calibrated for all headers 232 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST Header Offset If the header of your vehicle is mounted offset to the vehicle s center this can affect the accuracy of the GPS data you are receiving By performing a Header Offset you can compensate for the distance between the center of the vehicle and the center of the header s swath 1 Measure distance First measure the distance between the GPS antenna 2 and the center of the header s swath 1 e A Center of Vehicle e B Center of Swath e C GPS Antenna 2 Pull up the Header Offset screen KR implement goai Select the Implement tab and select Header from the Rows 12 R 3 Press Header Offset button Select an implement from the Implement list Press the Header Offset button on the Implement tab Calibrate Header Sensor Header Offset Header Offset 4 Enter the distance amount The Header Offset screen appears as shown at left Enter the distance amount by using the numeric keypad Enter Left or Right Distance from Centerline button Press the green
34. this setting closes or opens an auxiliary valve You can choose settings for up to two auxiliary valves e Allowable Error Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate changes 145 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT e Threshhold e Timeout Control Valve Settings PWM Control Valve Settings PWM Frequency ee The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at Settings can be found from the manufacturer of the valve Typical settings range from 100 125 Hz FM Gain PYM Frequency Zera Flow Offset PWM Standby Note See PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings e PWM Gain Determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate change adjustments The higher the value the more aggressive the system response is e Zero Flow Offset Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero Flow Offset value can cause the product control system to not properly control low rates See the PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings e PWM Standby This is a user defined setting that determines the percent duty cycle the system uses when the booms are all off The setting must be greater than the Zero Flow Offset Note The current PWM Duty Cycle can be viewed at the Liquid Diagnostics screen For more information see Liqu
35. 108 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING 5 Repeat this process If you have multiple hydraulic drives Enter the gear ratio for each motor under the appropriate tab on the InSight display enter that number into the other channels Note If you have additional motor drives on the planter and these motor drives have the same total gear ratio PRIMING SEED RATE METERS awo The Seed Meter Prime is used to charge the seed meter when filling with seed To begin S go to the Map screen and press the Meter RPM button as shown at left The Seed Rate Planter Control screen appears as shown EE 1 Press Seed Meter Prime as Press the Seed Meter Prime button ih cae 2 Seed Meter Prime in Progress A message displays stating Seed Meter Prime in Progress While this message displays the seed meter will turn one and only one revolution automatically When complete you will return to the Seed Rate Planter Control screen 22812 Seed Meter Prime CALIBRATING SEED RATE METERS The Meter Calibration number allows the seed meter to communicate the correct seed population to the display Assuming the Controller Settings are correct for the seed rate this Meter Calibration number which is based on the number of cells on the seed meter should not need to be adjusted However you may wish to recalibrate before changing seed types and treatments You should also recalibrate if the as applied seed rate do
36. 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error e Shaft Speed Calibration Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system e Max Metering Speed Setting determines the maximum RPM of the metering shaft that controls product distribution to the application point This setting is used when controlling a granular strip till toolbar Linear Actuator Clutch Settings Note When using Linear Actuator Control the system requires the Control Valve Configuration on all three channels to be set the same Strip Till Control Channel 1 Channel 3 Channel 3 Auxillary Control Valve Configuration Single Bin Actuator T Actuator Actuator Response Allowable haft Response 1 Response 2 Threshold Error SEI E Calibration pee 212 e Actuator Response 1 Determines the speed of the actuator when product control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting Represents the fast speed of the actuator Decreasing the value will cause the actuator to run slower The Default Setting is 90 e Actuator Response 2 Determines the speed of the actuator when product control error is less than the Response Threshold setting Represents the slow speed of the actuator Decreasing the value
37. 3660 Seed Command Hydraulic Drive will not Prime e Make sure Planter is down e Make sure Master Switch is on e Ensure Hydraulics are engaged Try remote in both directions e Make sure Corresponding switch on the switch box is turned on e Can be checked under the Wrench tab and highlighting the configuration and pressing the Wrench icon and then the Auxiliary Input tab e Check Implement switch adjustment e When in planting position the implement switch arm should not touch anything and be in the neutral position e When planter is in the raised field position the arm should engage the lower parallel arm and move half an inch e Make sure Meter Calibration number is correct e Found on the Run Screen in the lower right hand corner Press the Drive tab and enter in your seeds per revolution 12 for mechanical corn 39 Standard EV corn 24 low rate EV corn 60 for mechanical and EV Soybeans e Check for mechanical interference of drive line by turning hydraulics on and going back to the motor on planter and slowly turning in manual screw on top of PWM valve Slowly turn screw in and the drive should start to turn If not there is no hydraulic flow from tractor or a mechanical binding issue Completely screw valve all the way out This will stop the motor from turning and the drive should be ready for planting e Check for voltage at the Seed Rate Module black and red wires Should have Battery Voltage e The green light should be fl
38. Export data from all fields check box to select all fields 3 Log Files Exported The Copy Log Files screen informs you that the log files have been successfully exported 43 SJAIEQG 1VN a3aLXZ MANAGE FILES To view all files and file folders on the USB drive press the Manage Files button The File Manager screen opens where you can use the scroll bar to view a list of all files and folders A bar at the bottom of the window shows how much memory is available on the USB drive DELETE FILES If you wish to delete files press the Delete Files button The Memory Management screen appears which informs you that the selected files will be permanently deleted If you still wish to delete the files press the green check mark button 44 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP DEVICES DEVICE INFORMATION m Pressing on the Device Information button located in the upper right corner of the display fs opens the Devices screens Technical support may request that you look at these screens for help in diagnosing a problem DEVICES nede Device Information includes Firmware Version Firmware ID Hardware ID Firmware 1 0 34 1 0 28 e ep e e STIE A Serial Number Revision Run Time 232 DC LIQUID eee EN shown in hours minutes seconds and Serial Number 2009120003 E 233 AUX DEVICE Revision 2 0 0 0 Display Boot Counter Run Time 227223 i Boot Counter 476 The CAN Device List displays the modules that are conne
39. Grounding required e Use 150V insulation rating for external circuits A CAUTION Exceeding these specifications may result in degraded operation and or damage to the display SYSTEM AND UPGRADES Ag Leader Technology will periodically provide operating program updates that will improve the performance of your display Required software updates will be available free of charge for download from www agleader com On occasion major releases will be made available that have significant TONI SIHL LNOSV product feature additions or enhancements These optional software updates may have an additional fee associated with them AUTOMATED MODULE FIRMWARE UPGRADE In the display all display and module firmware upgrades are packaged in a single fw2 file The module firmware files are stored internally in the display A warning alerts you when a module upgrade is required You can upgrade all files in a single batch by using an upgrade screen For more information see Advanced tab on page 21 PRODUCT REGISTRATION When registering your Ag Leader Technology products by one of the following methods you can elect to receive notice of any new product updates or features Register by mail Ag Leader Technology 2202 South Riverside Dr Ames IA 50010 Register by Fax 515 232 3595 Register at the Ag Leader Web site at http www agleader com CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS The user manual uses the following text
40. If your planting configuration uses a PWM valve see Control Valve Settings PWM shown below if your planting configuration uses a Servo valve see Control Valve Settings PWM on page 101 100 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 Control Valve Settings PWM Controller Valve Settin gs PWM Frequency FAM Gain Zero Flow Offset PLANTING e PWM Frequency The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at Settings can be found from the manufacturer of the valve e PWM Gain Determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate change adjustments The higher the value the more aggressive the system response Is e Zero Flow Offset Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero Flow Offset value can cause the product control system to not properly control flow rates See the PWM valve manufacturer s information for recommended settings Control Valve Settings Servo Controller Valve Settings Valve Valve Response 1 Response 2 Response Threshold 40 IEI Auxiliary Tab settings Controller Settings Channel 1 Auailiary Rate Not Responding Time Minimum Ground Speed ER T Hate Not Responding Threshold e Rate Not Responding Threshold e Valve Response 1 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error exceeds the Response Threshold
41. Leader Technology product PROPRIETARY TECHNOLOGY NOTICE Ag Leader Technology s display has patents on its design and operational features Copying features of this system relating to measurement and calculation of grain flow and weight organization of field and load data may result in patent infringement COPYRIGHT NOTICE Ag Leader Technology has copyrighted 2010 the contents of this manual and the operating program for the display No reproductions may be made without first obtaining the consent of Ag Leader Technology SERVICE AND SUPPORT Your display was designed with simplicity and ease of use in mind This manual has been provided to help familiarize yourself with the display and its basic functionality Setup wizards are implemented where appropriate within the system to further simplify configuration and use If you have additional questions or feel that you may be having a problem with your system call your local Ag Leader Technology dealer or call us directly at the phone number below If we determine you have a hardware failure we will ship replacement hardware immediately Our Technical Support Department can be reached by phone at 515 232 5363 extension 1 or through email at support agleader com 251 XION dddYy 252 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 Index Symbols pat file 82 84 ref file 227 A A point 78 A pattern 87 A B button 80 A B line 76 within smartpath 76 AB line 77 78 in smartpath 80
42. Mode on any part of the boom and the display switches to Manual Mode this button turns white and the display beeps twice If less than the full boom remains in Manual Mode the display will continue beeping twice every three seconds Boom Height Control Options Button At the center of the Map screen s Equipment Tab the Boom Height t d Control Options button displays data on eS NORAC UC5 Run Time performance 15 9 8 4 8 4 Mode Crop Target Height 12 in Sensitivity 5 e The Boom Icon appears as blue when in Automatic Mode and black when in Manual Mode The right left and center sections appear independently on this icon Press the Boom Height Control Options button to open the Boom Height Control Options screen For more information see Boom Height Control Options Screen on page 194 e The white arrows indicate the direction that the boom section is being commanded to move The arrows shown around the boom appear either 1 In Automatic Mode or 2 When the boom is in Manual Mode and the user is manually moving the boom section e Mode Indicates whether the Boom is in Crop Mode or Soil Mode For further explanation see Boom Height Control Options Screen on page 194 e Target Height The desired boom height above the ground for Soil Mode or the crop canopy for Crop Mode e Sensitivity Adjusts the boom response Higher values make the height control more responsive e Distance Between Boom and Target The
43. Operation Type Choose Rate Logging Control Press the blue right arrow button to continue 10 Select Controller Select a controller from the drop down list or press the Add button to add a new controller Note You must add a new controller if configuring a Hydraulic Seed Control or Stepper Seed Control operating configuration 11 Complete the Operating Configuration The wizard walks you through the final steps of the configuration in which you can add additional equipment select a ground speed source and edit the suggested name for the configuration ROW CLUTCH SETUP Once you have completed the Operating Configuration the new configuration appears on the Setup Configuration Tab The row clutches should be configured correctly However if you cannot get a Row Shutoff Operating Configuration to load on the Field Operation Wizard or if your vehicle does not appear on the Map screen you may wish to check if the row clutches have been correctly set up in Implement Setup Use the following procedure to enable Seed Row Shutoff and or configure the Clutch Module 1 At the Setup Configuration Tab highlight the Operating Configuration name and press the Setup wrench button 2 Press the Row Clutch Setup button and the Row Clutch Setup screen appears Row Shutoff 3 If you created an operating configuration with Row Shutoff the Seed Row Shutoff check box should be maar selected If it is not selected press the Seed Row Shut
44. Problem AutoSwath turns on the booms too fast or too slow Solution Check GPS offsets in the vehicle setup to verify all of the measurements are correct Problem AutoSwath feature is not shown Solution The display must have the AutoSwath feature password unlocked before the feature is available to the operator Problem AutoSwath is checked on but the spreader will not turn on 1 Make sure the ground speed is registering a value greater than zero on the display 2 Make sure the applicator is inside of the field boundary Problem Conveyor turns off in the middle of the pass Solution Check the display firmware and module firmware to see if they are running the latest version 220 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Problem Total Applied does not match Actual Weight Applied Solution 1 Make sure the shaft speed pls rev are set correctly in the controller settings 2 Make sure the controlling product is set to the correct units Problem Rate not responding Solution 1 Make sure there is a ground speed registering on the display 2 Make sure the shaft speed pls rev are set correctly in the controller settings You must make sure to account for sprocket ratios if chain driven Driven Teeth X Rate Sensor Pulses True Pulses Drive Teeth 3 Check the user defined value found under the controller settings for Strip Till 4 The CFR number may need to be adjusted TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONTROL APPLICATIONS P
45. Servo Raven Flow Control Valve In line or Bypass 3 Standard Servo Mid Tech 3 4 In line or Bypass Servo Mid Tech 1 In line or Bypass Servo Mid Tech 1 1 2 In line or Bypass Servo Mid Tech 2 In line or Bypass Servo SE DA PD O O O O O O gt O O O O O O amp O O O O O O o o o o o E 5 5 3 7 D D o o D D 3 TS lt lt O O 16 1O0ULNOID ALVY GINO Control Valve Valve Response Valve Response Response Configuration 1 2 Threshold Flow Control Valve Flow Control Valve or Sprayer Model and year if applicable Control System PWM Frequency Zero Offset Allowable Error Valve Response 1 Valve Response 2 i AIM Command In 100 line servo Case IH Surveyor with A post Case IH 3320 Apache 510 710 1010 1210 2006 See note below Command Mode 2 40 10 5 Command Mode 2 100 24 3 By Pass Servo 162 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Flow Control Valve or Sprayer Model and year if applicable Control System PWM Frequency Zero Offset Allowable Error Valve Response Valve Response Response Threshold Typical Gain Range INon AIM Case IH 3150 with comand Mode 100 24 Raven valve In Line Servo Non AIM Case 3185 WIN command Mode 100 24 Raven valve In Line Servo Non AIM Case IH 3310 Command Mode PWM 12 Volt Non AIM Case IH 4410 Command PWM 12 Volt
46. Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt Add button gt Application button Application A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle implement and controllers 181 XH LdO Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field Operation Wizard For more information on Field Operation Configurations see Start Field Operation on page 23 1 Select Equipment Configuration Type Select either Single Product Application or Multiple Product Application Press the blue right arrow button to continue 2 Select Vehicle or Create New Vehicle Select the vehicle to be used in the configuration from the drop down list Otherwise press the Add button and the Vehicle Setup Wizard walks you through the steps in a vehicle configuration These steps include entering a Full Swath Width entering the Number of Boom Sections and entering Boom Section Widths from Left to Right Enter a Vehicle Name when complete Note If you selected Self Propelled Sprayer from the drop down list proceed through the wizard s Vehicle Setup process At the Vehicle Options screen press the OptRx Crop Sensor check box and use the up and down arrows to enter the number of Crop Sensors Enter a vehicle name and proceed to Step 5 3 Select Implement Press the Add button and proceed to step 4a Note This step doe
47. Sprocket Max Meter Speed fiso rem Gear 29 28 812 X EH eg 2 4 18 19 342 Driven Drive 1 X Driven Drive 2 Gear Ratio eng Ale Seed Meter Shaft procke X Gear Ratio Seed Rate Motor Planter Drive Shaft Driven Drive 1 X Driven Drive 2 Carry the Decimal place to the nearest 0 001 for accurate results Seed Ratio Calculation Example Procedure The example outlined below assumes that you have a single planter drive motor Step 5 notes that this process has multiple steps if you have more than one Stepper Seed Motor Drives 1 Beginning with the Seed Rate Motor count the number of teeth on the drive sprocket Then count the number of teeth on the driven sprocket 2 Divide the number of teeth on the driven sprocket by the number of teeth on the drive sprocket This is the ratio of the Seed Rate motor 3 Repeat the process for each sprocket combination in the drive system back to the meter 4 Take the ratio of the Seed Rate Motor and multiply it by the ratio of the other sprocket combinations 5 Repeat this process if you have multiple hydraulic drives Enter the gear ratio for each motor under the appropriate tab on the InSight display O Note Ifyou have additional motor drives on the planter and these motor drives have the same total gear ratio enter that number into the other channels 107 TOH HLNOQO 2 Gear Ratio Drawing For John Deere Pro Shatt Drives Seed Rate Drive Setting Calculating a Gear R
48. Steps 1 4 must be performed by everyone who has purchased a KINZE Planter Monitor steps 5 6 are performed by customers who have purchased those specific features 1 KINZE Planter Monitor Module Configuration This creates a configuration that is used for KINZE Planter Monitor operations For more information see KINZE Planter Monitor Module Configuration below and on the following page 2 Monitor Module setup Included front and rear unit settings Shaft RPM sensor settings and row spacing settings This step allows the display to detect the physical KINZE Planter devices For more information see KINZE Planter Monitor Setup on page 130 3 Sensor detection process This allows the display to detect the proper number of muxbus sensors on the row units For more information see Muxbus Sensor Detection for KINZE Planter Monitor on page 133 4 Set alarm thresholds This allows you to determine the level at which the seed monitor alarms will sound For more information see Alarms on KINZE Planter Monitor on page 139 5 Calibrate the Magnetic Pickup Coil This step which is performed by customers who have purchased the Magnetic Pickup Coil Speed Sensor allows the Monitor Module to receive data from this sensor which measures the ground speed of the planter For more information see KINZE Magnetic Coil Soeed Sensor Calibration on page 135 6 EdgeVac calibration This step which is performed by custo
49. This drop down menu shows all of the varieties that you PC entered in Product Setup For more information see Product tab on page 13 Rate Rate 7 Increment D H i e The Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings represent preset os a application rates that allow operators to quickly change Wegen Flow of Disabled L between desired target rates for each individual product Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired amount e The Increment button allows operators to specify the increase or decrease amounts for a specified rate by using the Rate Increase and Rate Decrease arrows on the Product Control Toolbox Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired increment e To load a map based prescription file press the Prescription button For more information see Loading Prescriptions on page 113 112 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING LOADING PRESCRIPTIONS To load a map based prescription file press the Rate Setup button on the Product Control Toolbox Rata Control Settings The Rate Control Settings screen appears as shown File Selection 2 The File Selection screen appears E 3 Highlight the correct irx prescription or shp shape file and press the green check mark button Ire single product Demo dry DAP 17 Saefaiult ire No Preview Demo dry K Ogelaus int Deme dry N 100defaultkx Demo dry NHA Deleanu ora vi D I D Rate Control Settings 4 When you return
50. Type Operating Voltage Blade Style ATO ATC 9 16 VDC Rating Max Current Rating DS 5A 250 VAC 2 5 amp F m 15A 250 VAC a 0 HIM N Drs d i y Mounting the System Speakers N Power Reset switch USB slot il i RAM mount 8 pin auxiliary 28 pin main connection connection AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A Status Bar Icons am Wat Button e e i Vehicle Icons d Flex Mode ParaDyme users only a yaw ane Device Information Button ES a Zoom Tool Icons Task Bar Buttons steering Status aaa 1 EC NORAC Engage Buttons Setup wrench Button BE Add Button Video Screen Button de Remove Button Function Buttons Master Switch iti yy AutoSwath RR AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A INTEGRA Quick Reference Guide Guidance New Pattern enen d 30 000 8 fi Pattern Options Tse Heng of Implement Wath 36 000 It Harvest Grain Harvest Diagnostics Savath GAO in DS Oru Section Indicators AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A INTEGRA Quick Reference Guide Planting SeedCommand Legend Select E Rate Control Settings me me Increment Prescription i e E d Gr E E Sg EZ Section Indicators oe Seed Monitor Options Planter Controls Display Options Table View Meter Calibration Rate
51. Use manual valve control to see if the control valve will open or close 4 Check the tip manufacturer s charts to make sure they are in the operating range of the application 5 Check for any product buildup in the flow meter 6 Check product filter for debris Problem Booms turn on when outside of the boundary Solution INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION 1 Make sure the Rate Outside of Field option is set to zero under the active configuration settings 2 Make sure the Outside Boundary Option is set to Turn Section Off under the Automatic Swath Control options 3 Make sure there is not a gap between the boundary and the first pass of the headlands Note For best results run a new boundary when spraying the first pass of the headlands Problem Booms turn on for a split second in the headlands Solution 1 Make sure that the turn on look ahead is greater than the turn off look ahead 2 Make sure GPS offsets are correct 3 Make sure look aheads are less than three seconds each JOHN DEERE SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS Here are some tips to remember when operating the display in conjunction with a Spray Star control system Refer to the quick reference sheet PN 2002831 38 and other sections of the user guide for specific setup and operation instructions MASTER SWITCH INPUT After setting up a configuration in the display make sure to change the master switch input setting from standard to optional This will tel
52. Variety Hybrid Manufacturer and Name Repeat procedures for all products Configuration Tab e VEHICLE IMPLEMENT and CONTROLLER must be set up prior to this step e If you are using an interplant planter you will set up one configuration for interplant and one configuration for non interplant Press the WRENCH button Press the CONFIGURATION tab Press on the GREEN PLUS Press the PLANTING button under Choose Operating Configuration Type Using the drop down arrow select your Vehicle Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW Using the drop down arrow select your Implement Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW Using the drop down arrow select your Controller If you have Hydraulic Drive select SEED COMMAND If you have Contact Drive select NONE 10 Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW 11 Using the drop down arrow select your Primary Ground Speed Source OOND AYN Se ee ae hr Rev 9 11 A se Pe 5 Integra Basic Configuration Setup Service Manual Integra 12 Using the drop down arrow select your Backup Ground Speed Source 13 Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW 14 Press the GREEN CHECK to confirm the Suggested Name for Configuration Repeat steps 3 thru 14 for interplant configuration Switch Mapping The switches automatically default to the Hydraulic Drive Seed Command and Sections 1 and 2 on Switch 1 and Sections 3 and 4 on Switch 2 The following procedure moves the Hydraulic Drive to the Master Switch and Section 1 on Switch 1 Section 2 on Switch 2 etc
53. Vibration Calibration screen opens as shown 5 Press Start With the combine separator running at full operating speed with the header engaged press the Start button The display counts down 60 seconds 6 Calibration Number Displayed When the vibration calibration is complete a message appears underneath the Start button stating Calibration Complete Next to this the vibration calibration number is displayed Press the green check mark box to return to the Calibration Tab You may now turn off the separator TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION A Temperature Calibration only needs to be performed once per season Changing this calibration will affect previously harvested data 234 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST A CAUTION Only calibrate the temperature before harvesting begins 1 Place Combine in Shady Spot Leave the combine parked in a shaded area or a shed for a few hours The temperature calibration should not be performed if the sensor has been in direct sunlight or is sitting next to grain 2 Take Air Temperature Reading Take an accurate air temperature reading using a thermometer in the same shaded area 3 Go to Grain Calibration screen Go to the Home screen and press the Setup wrench button When the Setup screen opens highlight your operating configuration and press the Setup wrench button which opens the Configuration Setup screen 4 Atthe Configuration Setup screen press the Grain Grain Cal
54. Wizard Step 1 of 5 5 Enter Dispense Amou nt EE Enter the desired target amount of product to dispense um d the recommended amount is 500 pounds or 250 6 Start Dispensing Product Press the green colored Start button to begin dispensing the product 7 Product Dispensing The conveyor will stop when the system perceives the target amount of product has been dispensed The Stop button can be pressed at any time to manually shut off the conveyor Conveyor Rate Calibration Wizard Step 3 of 5 8 Product Dispensing Stops At left is shown an example of the screen after dispensing the display s target amount This value can be reset and the process started again for a larger sample size if desired Press the green check mark button to continue 9 Enter Actual Dispense Amount Enter the actual weight of the product dispensed Press the blue right arrow button to continue 10 Finish Calibration A screen displays stating Calibration Complete Underneath is shown the newly calibrated conveyor rate Press Cancel red X to exit the calibration without saving the value Press Repeat Calibration to begin the process again Press the green check mark button to save the value and exit the calibration routine 11 Restart spinner hydraulic circuit Restart the spinner hydraulic circuit A WARNING Make sure the spinner is free of material before restarting the spinner hydraulic circuit 12 Awarning will appear when exit
55. a different variety and that you should manually change the region Variety 57 66 detected Go to the Region Selection screen to change Region and Variety Moreh ECTS ST Ts e If you have selected Automatic Region Changing the message at left tells you that the display has detected a different variety and that the display is automatically changing to a different region Variety 35F44 detected Changing to Region lt 1 gt IMPORTING VARIETY MAPS Variety maps can be imported from SMS software The SMS software uses planting data to create a variety reference map which is saved as a ref file This ref file can then be exported to the display for use with the Automatic Variety Tracking and Automatic Region Changing features Importing Variety Map Procedure 1 Open Options screen You can import a Variety Map at the Options screen which you can access by one of two methods Ss a Press the Region button located on the Home screen b Press the Start Field Operation button to begin the Field Configuration process 22 DNIHOLINON ATAIA Options The Field Operation Wizard opens the Options screen 2 Press Import Variety Map ama At the Options screen shown above press the Import cul Asta Variety Map button Automatic Variety Tracking m Automatic Region Changing File Selection 3 Select Reference File The File Selection screen appears as shown Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to scrol
56. able to see the entire reference map on the display s map screen AUTOSWATH SENSITIVITY SETTINGS AutoSwath automatically increases or decreases the active logged swath width of the combine head according to field boundaries and already harvested areas By doing so the display records as change 228 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST in logging data even though no mechanical change has already taken place AutoSwath is particularly useful when harvesting point rows or other areas where harvesting a full head width is not possible When performing a Harvest operation the AutoSwath feature includes sensitivity levels which compensate for varying levels of GPS accuracy To change sensitivity levels highlight your particular Operating Configuration in the configuration list shown on the Setup screen and press the Setup wrench button When the Configuration Setup screen appears press the Automatic Swath EE a Control button The Automatic Swath AutoSwath itivity level ided f We EE ang Control screen appears as shown are performing inaccurately adjust sensitivity accordingly Sensitivity 3 is the default setting Sensitivity Automatic Swath Control Sensitivity 5 Use with RTK or DGPS sub meter terrain compensated GPS Sensitivity 4 Use with RTK or DGPS sub meter GPS Terrain compensation is recommended Sensitivity 3 Use with sub meter accurate GPS Sensitivity 2 as
57. an alarm sounds e Error Delay The number of seconds that an actual rate falls out of the error threshold before an alarm sounds Flow Monitor Warning e Error Threshold The percentage of perceived application error based on the discharge flow sensor e Enable Warning The Enable Warning check box allows you the option of displaying the Flow Monitor Warning Field Notes SS Note For more information see Report Details on page 37 setting Name and Description e Auto Generate Report When checked this option will automatically generate the Smart Report each time product application is completed and the Field button is selected e Prompt for Report Details When checked this option will automatically launch the region summary data collection dialog each time a new region is created at the Run screen during application rate control e Report Map Appearance Multi Color Rate Select this option to have the Smart Report display the application maps using the rate legend as displayed on the run screen Single Color Coverage Select this option to have the Smart Report display single color product coverage maps Run Screen e AutoSwath Use to enable disable automatic control of boom section on off state based upon field boundaries prescription files and previously applied areas 180 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION OPTRX OptRx uses sensors usually mounted on the sprayer s booms to ass
58. asked to select an Operating Mode Use the drop down menu to select Rate Logging Control and press the blue right arrow button to continue 182 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION 5 Select Controller A default name of DirectLiquid appears Use the drop down menu to select this controller or press the Add button to add a controller then press the blue right arrow button 6 Finish Configuration From here select a container from the drop down list or press the Add button to create a new container When the Operating Configuration Wizard reappears select a primary and backup Ground Speed Source At the next screen accept the Configuration name or edit it using the keyboard button Last press the check mark button to complete the wizard and to save the configuration into the display CROP SENSOR SETUP The Crop Sensor Setup screen is where you can adjust the rate displayed on the Map screen Equipment Tab s VI Bar Graph You can access the Sensor Setup screen in one of two ways We oe DES gt gt mm gt E gt gt mg Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt Crop Sensor button information see Scan a Reference Strip on page 186 S Note You must have a Reference Strip loaded for the Algorithm Settings button to be active For more Corn Settings Corn Settings e Minimu
59. check mark button when on tren i finished VIBRATION CALIBRATION The vibration calibration must be performed with the correct head on the combine and repeated for each crop harvested 1 Run Separator Start the separator and feeder house with the proper header attached Run at full speed A CAUTION Do not harvest a crop during the Vibration Calibration process 2 Go to Grain Calibration screen Go to the Home screen and press the Setup wrench button When the Setup screen opens highlight your operating configuration and press the Setup wrench button which opens the Configuration Setup screen 233 ONIHOLINON a131A Grain Calibration Grain Weight Calibration Field Name Region Name Estimated Actual T Enter Weight Show Cal Numbers Perform Calibration Vibration Calibration With separator running press Start to begin 60 second timer Elevator Speed O rpm Vibration Calibration With separator running press Start to begin 60 second timer 4b Sensor performing calibration Start Elevator Speed Vibration Calibration With separator running press Start to begin 60 second timer Calibration complete Cal value is 0 049458 Elevator Speed 4 3 At the Configuration Setup screen press the Grain Calibration button The Grain Calibration screen appears as shown 4 Open Vibration Calibration screen On the Grain Calibration screen press the Vibration button The
60. configurations ara za However the Harvest Diagnostic button sw 2205 Shown at the bottom right hand side of Malsture ft M hw 28 the Equipment Tab A differs in 3am appearance from that shown on other AA Harvest configuration map screens This A 8 Harvest Diagnostic button does not display a picture of a combine The top of the Harvest Diagnostic button displays the following information e For configurations using a Platform Head or Pickup Head Swath Width shown both in units of measurement and as a percentage total e For configurations using a Row Head Number of active rows The Harvest Diagnostic button also displays this information for all CLAAS configurations e Grain Flow e Header Height shown as a percentage e Engine Speed shown in revolutions per minute e Fuel fuel consumption of the combine Note Elevator Speed information is not shown for CLAAS Quantimeter configurations DIAGNOSTICS FOR CLAAS QUANTIMETER Diagnostics Screen for CLAAS Quantimeter reg When performing a Harvest operation you can access the Grain Harvest Diagnostics WI screen as shown Technical support may request that you look at this screen for help in diagnosing a problem To get to this screen press the Display Information button as shown at left When the Devices screen opens press and highlight the AL Bridge listing in the CAN Device list then press the Diagnostics button The Grain Harvest Diagnostic
61. control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting Represents the fast speed of the servo valve rea me OSS Alemable Shaft Speed Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run Calibration aa 15 al save slower The Default Setting is 40 See e Valve Response 2 100rpm B Determines the speed of the servo valve when product l control error is less than the Response Threshold setting Represents the slow speed of the servo valve Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower The Default Setting is 8 e Response Threshold Determines where the control channel switches between using Valve Response 1 and Valve Response 2 speed setting Leaving all other valve control settings at the default value and making a small adjustment to this setting is usually all that is required to fine tune system performance The Default Setting is 15 Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of speeding up servo valve response Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing servo valve response e Allowable Error Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate changes 2 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error e Shaft Speed Calibration Calibration n
62. e Shift By Distance This sets the field edge as the distance and direction in relation to the AB Line created In the Pivot Field Edge Distance portion of the window enter the distance in feet and inches e Shift By Rows This sets the field edge as the number of crop rows multiplied by the number of spacing In the Pivot Field Edge Distance portion of the window enter the Number of Rows and Row Spacing e Cancel The vehicle uses the driven pass as the AB Line 6 If you chose Shift by Rows in the previous step use the numeric keypads to enter the Number of Rows and Row Spacing Choose the direction relative to the AB Line either Outward or Inward and press the green check mark button to continue 7 Turn left or right for the next swath The next swath is automatically selected 8 Steer the vehicle so that you center the green lights in the lightbar as you drive forward along the path Note To work from the center of the field outwards the initial pivot must have e A radius of at least two swath widths e An arc length of at least two swath widths 9 Press Engage Adaptive Curve Use the Adaptive Curve pattern to follow gentle contours in the field or when you need to avoid obstacles B This pattern provides guidance based on the last curve driven 1 At the Guidance screen press the New Pattern button Choose Adaptive Curve and enter a swath width Press the green check mark button when finished You will automatica
63. for the liquid DirectCommand control channel Once configured the Injection pump uses the same switch inputs and ground speed input that has been configured for the liquid system Direct Injection Pump Doesn t Run 176 See Boom sections not turning blue in InSight manual Boom indicators turn blue on run screen Refer to calibrating Verify a value is entered fer to injection pump for the active calibration Verify a target rate is entered for the injection control channel Check power connections from the battery to the injection pump Power can be checked at multiple locations First is the connection at the Injection module where the battery power cable plugs in The second location is the output connection found on the injection module The third is found at the 2 pin weather pak tower found on the injection cable PN 4000851 3 See table below INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION BATTERY POWER PIN OUTS 2 Pin Deutsch Plug 2 Pin Deutsch 2 Pin WP Tower Receptacle om 2 RR RI RI AI Direct Injection Pump Runs Full Speed Refer to manufacturer documentation to test metering sensor Check injection diagnostics to see if digital pump speed is registering a value Display receiving actual rate Check injection diagnostics to see if analog pump speed is registering a value Refer to injection pump manual to test tach generat
64. glass are shown at the right hand side of the Map screen Pressing the zoom tool with the plus sign increases the scale of the Map screen Pressing the zoom tool with the minus sign decreases the scale of the Map screen A Pressing the zoom tool with the four arrows underneath re centers the Map screen and _ brings its scale back to the default MAPPING TOOLBOX At the upper left hand side of the Map screen is the Mapping Toolbox Press any of the four buttons on the toolbox and it expands The toolbox consists of the following buttons e A Map Legend e B Map Markers e C Boundary e D Guidance The Map Legend Map Markers and Boundary buttons are explained in the rest of this chapter The Guidance button is described in Guidance on page 73 Map Legend tab Press the Map Legend button at the top of the Mapping Toolbox and the Legend appears either for Rate or Coverage Two examples are shown below Map Legend Rate Map Legend Coverage Legend Select Press the Legend Setup wrench tool and the Legend Select screen appears Here you can adjust Legend Settings clear the map 31 NAIYDSG NNY e Clear Map Permanently removes all logged data from the active field operation A CAUTION Once you clear the map this information cannot be retrieved e Load Reference Loads a list of maps of previous operations performed in that field For each operation you can view
65. higher accuracy mode is lost such as loss of the RTK radio link 29 N33H2S NNY Note For more information see the ParaDyme Insert The Device Information button opens screens that display Device Information Memory Display and display diagnostics For more information See Device Information on page 45 Vehicle Icon Zoom to Extent The Vehicle Icon is shown by an arrow inside a circle if the Map screen is viewed in Zoom to Extent The vehicle appears as a gold colored triangle if the Map screen is viewed in Zoom Detail The appearance of the zoomed in icon changes depending upon the data being logged in the field Vehicle Icon logging A If the vehicle is logging the implement icon appears as a green bar behind it Vehicle Icon with sections If the vehicle is logging data from an implement split into sections for instance during a planting or application operation then these sections appear in the implement icon Vehicle Icon not logging If the vehicle is not logging data then the implement icon appears as a grey bar Press the grid area of the Map screen and four arrow icons appear at the bottom right of the Map screen An example showing these arrow buttons is at left Pressing these arrow icons will move the center of the Map screen in the direction of the arrow button 30 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP The Zoom Tool icons which resemble a magnifying
66. must travel to return to the pause point e Press Resume button To resume your pattern press the Resume button to resume logging on your AB Line the closest AB Line to your vehicle Note If you press the Resume button before you have returned to the original AB Line your display will select RESET PATTERN If you have been using an already saved pattern and wish to switch over to a different pattern in the same field you can use the Reset Pattern feature by following the steps below 1 Press Reset Press the Reset button on the Guidance screen 2 Confirm Reset The Guidance screen appears asking you to reset the current guidance pattern Press the green check mark button to continue 3 Create new pattern optional The pattern is now reset You may now create a new pattern if desired REMARK A If you chose Straight AB or A Heading as your pattern option at the New Pattern screen the Remark A button appears on the Guidance Options screen The Remark A button re marks the A point by moving it to the current position while maintaining the same heading A brief message appears in the on screen lightbar stating Point A Remarked 85 AONVGINSS SHIFT For an explanation of the Shift Pattern feature see Load Pattern on page 82 NUDGE Nudge settings allow you to adjust the swaths by a specified distance while leaving the AB gt line in its original location You can view the Nudge left and right arrow
67. new crop type If necessary create a new Harvest Product in Product Setup with the Harvest Crop Wizard For more information see Crop Settings on page 15 Error Message Grain Calibration A new grain calibration has been detected Select an operating configuration to continue Possible Cause When a new calibration is started in the CEBIS monitor the warning at left appears on the display At the same time the display unloads the Field Operating Configuration that was collecting data with the old calibration Solution Acknowledge the warning by pressing the check mark box At the Home screen press the Start Field Operation button Use the Field Operation Wizard to create a new field operation configuration After receiving the new calibration from the CEBIS monitor the display will calculate that field operation configuration s harvest data by using this new calibration that was sent from CEBIS Also discussed in Calibration Information for CLAAS Quantimeter on page 244 Error Message CLAAS Communication Error Cannot communicate with CLAAS bridge module Possible Cause No communication between Bridge Module and CLAAS CAN Bus Shown as Indicator Light C on Bridge Module in Bridge Module on page 247 Solution Check cabling between Module and CLAAS Can Bus Error Message CAN Node Lost AL Bridge Node has stopped communicating Possible Cause No communication between Bridge Module and displa
68. numbers button 239 smart tab 82 smartpath 76 79 A B button 80 A B line 76 AB line within 80 AB manager 81 active line cycle 80 all area covered 82 base path 80 followed path 80 guidance width 79 heading threshold 82 logged area 82 new pattern 79 notes 80 projected path 80 reset button 80 save button 80 select previous pass 80 smart tab 82 toggle 76 speed pulses 241 status items 224 area 224 dry bushels 224 metric 224 moisture 224 wet bushels 224 wet weight 224 yield 224 stepper seed control gear ratio 106 stop height 232 swath width 224 T temperature 242 temperature button 235 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 temperature calibration 234 temperature raw 242 V V1 239 variety map 227 variety tracking 226 messages 227 vibration button 234 vibration calibration 233 number 234 W weight calibration 236 error 238 full 238 linear 238 weight calibration numbers 239 M1 239 S1 239 V1 239 weight to volume 15 wet bushels 224 wet weight 224 Y yield 14 224 225 257 X3AN This page left blank intentionally
69. numbers that appear below If they are not then your seed meter may be working incorrectly or you may have set the Gear Ratio incorrectly In these cases contact Technical Support for further assistance Note Check your operator s manual for more specific information on other seed disk options 102 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING para Cotton Sor Planter brand and type Corn y Standard beans Rate ghum John Deere f XTM L lt lt lt a ol o O O O O O O 5 5 C C C Q a Cc C Cc C S 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 DEE Ge T 3 Si W m zl a 2 z I O IIS J 219 2 Q gt o O D L c 5 Z Q Oo o O A 8 CH Case IH Vacuum Cyclo ao P NO a KINZE lt D O 5 D O D a 5 Q O TS i i O i Co CA ZI Di OI ol a 9 2 8 ol a Z gt gt OU 0 D DI 5 ee sel Q WM gt 2 J o O g Q mk wech wech O wech NO O wech O STEPPER SEED RATE CONTROL The Stepper Seed Control module allows Rawson ACCU RATE Variable Rate Controller users to control up to three hydraulic motor drives via the display If you have purchased the Stepper Seed Rate Control module you should configure it in the following order 1 Configure Stepper Seed Rate Control module See Stepper Seed Rate Control Configuration on page 104 Enter Controller Settings Included the Max Meter Speed Gea
70. of time Use the drop down menu to specify the period of time before guidance is automatically disengaged Pressing the Setup wrench button on the Guidance Tab opens the guidance system settings for the selected guidance system of 5 Hz or more Note In order to use guidance with the display you must have a GPS receiver capable of a GPS output rate LIGHTBAR SETTINGS SETUP 3 DE E Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt GPS button gt Lightbar Settings button 73 AONVGINS Lightbar Settings To adjust lightbar settings press the Lightbar Settings button on the GPS Setup screen The Lightbar Settings screen appears spacing A E amp Kl LEO Brightness a 5 ei e LED Spacing Enter in an amount specifying the distance represented by each square of the lightbar You can enter ina number ranging between 6 and 72 inches e Mode This determines which method to use the GPS information provided on the display s Map screen to center the vehicle on the AB Line Select either Chase or Pull If you select Chase then in order to center the vehicle on the AB Line you must follow the indicator lights on the lightbar If you select Pull then in order to center the vehicle on the AB Line you must turn the vehicle in the opposite direction of the indicator lights on the lightbar e External Lightbar LED Brightness If applicable use the up and down arrows to enter in a number spec
71. on any part of the boom and the display switches to Manual Mode this button turns grey and the display beeps twice If less than the full boom remains in Manual Mode the display will continue beeping twice every three seconds Ga NORAC Engage Enabled 28 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP La NORAC Engage Disabled The Engage icon shows that the autosteer system is on off or off but ready to engage The appearance of this icon displays the following Engage ON Green if the autosteer system is on Engage Ready Grey if the autosteer system off but ready to engage gen Engage Not Ready Gei Grey with a red circle and slash if the autosteer system is off and unable to engage S Note For more information see Guidance on page 73 Master Switch Status This bar shows that the Master Switch is active Master Switch ON GREEN Master Switch OFF RED GPS SIGNAL INDICATOR The GPS button in the upper left hand corner of the Map screen displays the following colors Differential GPS Green if you are receiving a differential GPS signal GPS No differential Yellow if you are receiving GPS but no differential signal No GPS Grey if you are receiving no GPS signal The Flex Mode icon appears for ParaDyme users who are using Flex Mode Flex mode provides continuity of position solution to maintain automated steering by seamless flexing transitioning to a lower accuracy mode when a
72. or Backward L R Left or Right 93 SONILLAS 54 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP VIRTUAL TERMINAL VIRTUAL TERMINAL The display is compatible with the ISO 11783 ISOBUS Virtual Terminal Standard This enables aes support of many ISOBUS compliant implements on the display Virtual Terminal functionality enables the Tn Dabs Spann Oras compliant implement s user interface to be viewed mer d and controlled on the display Time Zong Americas Central Time 7 A si Fane od General Owner Features Advanced da a o w COMMON TERMINOLOGY e ISOBUS Working Set One or more ISOBUS modules that control an implement s functionality e Working Set Master WSM Main module handles loading of object pool to VT display e Object Pool Defines graphical components that ISOBUS modules present on a compatible display A WARNING Before operating an ISOBUS implement with the display read the operator s manual provided by the implement s manufacturer and follow all safety information provided in the manual When this display is used with an ISOBUS implement the information and functions on the display are provided by the implement ECU and are the responsibility of the implement manufacturer A CAUTION OnTrac2 can not be used at the same time as Virtual Terminal To enable the Virtual Terminal starting from the Home Page press Setup button Wrench os Enable Virtual wi Enable Virtual Ter
73. return to the Home Screen To begin planting make sure your Master Switch and all corresponding switches are turned on Programming the PMM From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button Press MANAGE EQUIPMENT button Press the IMPLEMENT tab Highlight an IMPLEMENT you created Press the SEED MONITOR button in the lower right of the screen Press the PLANTER CONFIGURATION button Enter in values for the Smallest Row Spacing Used Number of Row Units Shaft Sensors any Auxiliary Sensors such as Pneumatic Down Pressure ASD Tank Pressure Tank Weight for Scales EdgeVac Sensors etc Press the GREEN CHECK Press the GREEN CHECK when the dialog box appears This will require a Mux Bus detection 0 Follow the on screen directions and start to plug in your sensors ONE AT A TIME from LEFT to RIGHT and REAR to FRONT 11 After all sensors have been plugged in a dialog box will appear All sensors have been found 12 Press the GREEN CHECK 13 Press the BACK ARROW to return to the Home Screen SE Se teg or Og E add BE JE Rev 9 11 f JAIE 3 7 Integra Basic Configuration Setup Service Manual Integra seed Tube Replacement From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button Select a CONFIGURATION on the list Press the WRENCH button in the middle of the screen Press the SEED MONITOR button in the bottom center of the screen Press the SENSOR CONFIGURATION button Press REMOVE next to the sensor you wish to remove Physica
74. row will still be calculated in the planter average Note If desired the alarm threshold for the row unit may be set to 0 which will silence the seed rate alarm population For instructions on changing the alarm threshold see KINZE Seed Monitor Alarms on page 135 Error Message Low Down Force Air Pressure Possible Cause Low pressure in the pneumatic down pressure system Solution Press OK to dismiss the error Check for air leaks and compressor failure Error Message Left or Right Tank Seed Level Low Possible Cause The Seed Scale weight has dropped below the user entered threshold Solution Press OK to dismiss the error Refill the tank to clear the error completely Error Message Seed Tank Pressure Too Low Possible Cause The minimum air flow for seed delivery is not present Solution Press OK to dismiss the error Check fan on the ASD system Error Message Air Compressor Sensor Too Low Possible Cause The minimum air compressor tank pressure is not present Solution Press OK to dismiss the error Check the air compressor 141 IZNI 142 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION LIQUID RATE CONTROL DirectCommand allows the variable rate application of single or multiple liquid products Follow the procedure below to create an operating configuration CREATE CONFIGURATION CG De gt e gt Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt C
75. see e Perform an infield check to verify rate and difference in PMM e Ensure hydraulic drive settings are correct See first page e Press the Wrench icon Highlight Configuration Press the Wrench icon Press Controller Settings Mux Bus short to ground Alarm Error e The green wire is shorted to the black wire or to the frame Mux Bus short to Power Alarm Error e The green wire is shorted to the white wire pE 18 R Aa J Rev 9 11 KINZE Planter Monitor Module PMM Troubleshooting Problem Symptoms Solution The text in the Seed Monitor button is Gray Bad Configuration Illegal number of front rows Error Sensors Already Detected Muxbus Detection Aborted Error Mismatched Sensors Error Dirty Sensor During Startup Error Dirty Sensor When planting Cannot access Seed monitor setup button Occurs when Planter configuration in the PMM setup Appears shortly after accepting the PMM Setup Occurs when accepting the PMM setup Displays only during system startup Message appears in a dialogue box displaying which row sensor s are dirty Audible alarm steady beeping Continues to alarm after selecting OK to dirty sensor error Message appears in a dialogue box displaying which row sensor s are dirty Audible alarm steady beeping Continues to alarm after selecting OK to dirty sensor error 1 Reference to Problem PMM is not found on the CAN 2 N
76. setting e Valve Response 2 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error is less than the Response Threshold setting Response Threshold Determines the system responsiveness to rate change e Minimum Ground Speed The Minimum Ground Speed performs two functions It determines the speed at which the motion detection sensor disengages and also determines the target soeed meter RPM when the motion detection sensor is active The percentage of seed rate error that triggers the alarms e Rate Not Responding Time The amount of time that the error occurs before the alarm sounds 101 10HLINOI9 ALVY HYDRAULIC SEED CONTROLLER SETTINGS FOR SPECIFIC PLANTERS John Deere Planters e Control Valve Configuration PWM e PWM Frequency 175 e PWM Gain 110 e Zero Flow Offset 40 e Gear Ratio chain drive 2 374 ProShaft 2 417 e Pulses Rev 360 White Planters e Control Valve Configuration PWM e PWM Frequency 200 e PWM Gain 90 e Zero Flow Offset 30 e Gear Ratio 5 5 e Pulses Rev 360 Case IH Planters e Control Valve Configuration PWM e PWM Frequency 100 e PWM Gain 95 e Zero Flow Offset 40 e Gear Ratio 6 803 e Pulses Rev 360 HYDRAULIC SEED METER CALIBRATION NUMBERS Prior to calibrating the Hydraulic Seed Meter the numbers that appear in the Meter Calibration box in the Planter Control window should be similar to the
77. shown Sek S 3 Choose an icon and press the green check mark button to close the screen The changed icon now appears on the Map Icon list of the Markers screen and the Map Markers tab on the Mapping Tool Box w E Boundary Tab SEE Pressing the Boundary button on the Mapping Toolbox opens the Boundary Tab as shown at left Here you can Create Import Export and Clear Boundaries Before the creation of a boundary the Start button appears at the top of the Boundary Tab During the creation of a boundary the Stop button appears and underneath it is the Pause Resume button 34 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP Boundary Settings Pressing the Start button opens the Boundary Settings screen as shown Boundary Settings Boundary Type Region Type Underneath the Boundary Type area you inner EEN have the choice of creating either an Outer Boundary or an Inner Boundary Boundary Offset Dianea Bitecton e Outer boundaries delineate the borders of on an entire field Inner boundaries mark specific features within that field such as waterways or buildings Create Boundary 1 Choose whether to create either an Outer boundary or Inner boundary by pressing one of the two Boundary Type buttons 2 If you chose to create an Inner Boundary use the Region Type drop down menu to choose the type of boundary Choices include Roadway Body of Water Waterway Buildings or Und
78. the absence of primary and backup speed signals Automatic Swath Control Settings e Turn On Look Ahead Determines how far ahead the system looks to turn the swath sections back on This setting compensates for any delay in the product control system when the sections are turned on e Turn Off Look Ahead Determines how far ahead the system looks to turn the swath sections off This setting compensates for delay in the product control system when the boom sections are turned off e Outside Boundary Option Determines the behavior of the sections when exiting the field boundary or prescription mapped area 167 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT e Coverage Option Based on the coverage option selected this setting determines the behavior of the swath section when entering exiting an already applied area or field boundary Options available include Minimize Skip Minimize Overlap and User Defined Percentage Auxiliary Input Settings e Master Switch Switch that performs global master control of all rate control channels F1 F11 Settings determine the switch es that will operate the controlling channel specified from the configuration setup Single switches can be used to control multiple channels and swath sections Controller Settings e Flow Meter Cal Calibration value representing the number of pulses that equal one gallon of product flow through the controlling system e Control Valve Configuration Setting specifies the type o
79. the actual amount of the product that was dispensed Press the blue right arrow button to continue Pump Calibration Wizard Step 6 of 6 8 Calibration Complete aa in The Pump Calibration number appears The New abia ans Injection Pump Calibration Number now appears in the K Pump Calibration screen From this point you may either e Repeat the calibration by pressing the Repeat Calibration button e Press the green check mark button to complete the calibration and exit the Pump Calibration Wizard Controller Settings 9 Calibration Displayed on Controller Settings screen Se EC The new Injection Pump Calibration Number A now GES Perform 3 Calibration 134 7 PISM 02 Calibration 35 17 PIs SCH Rate Response Warning Flow Monitor Warning appears in the Pump Calibration screen as shown at left Error Threshold Error 25 Threshold Error Delay 55 ya h Enable Warning Priming an Injection Pump If you are using a Direct Injection configuration you must prime the Injection Pump each time you flush or refill a tank or change products This ensures that air is not in the product lines result in skips at the start of field operations A CAUTION Failure to perform this priming procedure before beginning a Direct Injection application could left The Injection button is located at the left hand side of the Equipment Tab The Injection Controls screen appears as shown E
80. type Dispose of used batteries according to the battery manufacturer s instructions SYSTEM USES e Manual Guidance e ParaDyme automated steering e Video Camera Inputs Mapping tillage operations e Mapping and logging product application e Mapping of all field boundaries sub boundaries waterways and terraces e Grain yield monitoring e Variety logging e Granular and liquid fertilizer application Liquid spray system control e NH3 application control e Application control of multiple bin spinner spreaders SYSTEM FEATURES e Sunlight readable screen e Rugged sealed enclosure e Compatible with most NMEA GPS receivers e DirectCommand and SeedCommand product control using industry standard CAN bus interface e Adjustable volume control e Perspective 3D View Map e Report preview e Automatic field selection e Automated module firmware upgrade e Advanced GPS Diagnostics e USB media slot e 28 pin plug compatible with InSight and EDGE displays e 28 pin auxiliary connection e RAM mount 2 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 GENERAL USB FLASH DRIVE Display kits include a USB Flash Drive which you can use to save and transfer your data in and out of the display The USB function has not been approved for use in a moving vehicle COLOR TOUCH SCREEN The display features a color touch screen display The touch screen allows easy and intuitive navigation through the screens on the display without the need for
81. up a Field Operation with the Field Operation Wizard This process is similar regardless of the type of field operation currently taking place Before you can create a Field Operation you first must have created the following A Season Grower Farm and Field in Setup Management For more information see Management button on page 12 e An Operating Configuration at the Setup screen s Configuration Tab This Operating Configuration consists of Equipment Vehicle Implement Controller optional Container in Application and Ground Speed Source A Product if you are creating an Application or Planting Field Operation at the Setup Product Tab For more information see Product tab on page 13 All of these are referenced by the Field Operation Wizard during the Field Operation setup process To begin press the Start Field Operation button The Field Operation Wizard appears Follow the steps in the Wizard to select an operating configuration 1 Grower Farm and Field Selection Enter a Growing Season and Grower either by using the drop down arrows to select existing ones or by pressing on the Add plus sign arrow to create new ones Then add a Farm and Field either by using the drop down arrows to select existing ones or by pressing on the Add plus sign arrow to create new ones Press the blue right arrow key at the bottom of the screen to proceed to the next step 2 Operating Configuration Selection Use the drop do
82. valve to run slower The eB Default Setting is 40 Valve Response 2 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error is less than the Response Threshold setting Represents the slow speed of the servo valve Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower The Default Setting is 8 e Response Threshold Determines where the control channel switches between using Valve Response 1 and Valve Response 2 speed setting Leaving all other valve control settings at the default value and making a small adjustment to this setting is usually all that is required to fine tune system performance The Default Setting is 15 Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of soeeding up servo valve response Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing servo valve response 196 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION e Allowable Error Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate changes 2 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error e Shaft Speed Calibration Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system e Max Speed The Maximum Conveyor Speed setting determines the maximum
83. will not turn on when the foot pedal is on Solution Make sure the Master Switch Input is set to External 2 under the Auxiliary Input Settings Problem AutoSwath turns on the booms too fast or too slow Solution Check GPS offsets in the vehicle setup to verify all of the measurements are correct Problem AutoSwath feature is not shown Solution The display must have the AutoSwath feature password unlocked before the feature is available to the operator Problem AutoSwath is checked on but the spreader will not turn on 1 Make sure the ground speed is registering a value greater than zero on the display 2 Make sure the applicator is inside of the field boundary Problem Conveyor turns off in the middle of the pass Solution Check the display firmware and module firmware to see if they are running the latest version Problem Total Applied does not match Actual Weight Applied Solution 1 Make sure the shaft speed pls rev are set correctly in the controller settings 2 Make sure the controlling product is set to the correct units Problem Rate not responding Solution 1 Make sure there is a ground speed registering on the display 2 Make sure the shaft speed pls rev are set correctly in the controller settings 206 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION You must make sure to account for sprocket ratios if chain driven Driven Teeth X Rate Sensor Pulses True Pulses Drive Teeth 3 Check the us
84. with an accurate scale Record each individual load weight to be entered into the display No grain from any other combine should be unloaded into this hauling vehicle 6 Change Loads In the display immediately change to another load that does not have any data 7 Weigh and Record Load Weight Weigh the grain on the hauling vehicle and record the actual load weight e If you are using a weigh wagon to weigh the grain make sure the wagon has been calibrated properly e Only use one scale during this calibration process e Use the same vehicle for all calibration loads e Do not use a semi truck as this vehicle s capacity is too large for a calibration load 8 Repeat for Four Calibration Loads Repeat steps 1 7 for a minimum of four calibration loads These calibration loads should be uniform in size e Harvest each of these loads at a different grain flow rate Grain flow can be altered by changing the ground speed for each load the recommended method or using different swath widths for each load e As you enter these calibration loads name them by using the appropriate region names for example name Region 1 5 0 mph Region 2 4 5 mph etc This will eliminate confusion when identifying calibration loads 9 Open Grain Calibration screen S Go to the Home screen and press the Setup wrench button When the Setup screen opens highlight your operating configuration and press the Setup wrench button which opens the Configurati
85. you are logging field data e By selecting All Area Covered you can create SmartPath passes even when not logging field data e The Heading Threshold setting is the available area that the Guidance System uses to search for previously created SmartPath passes The default setting is 20 degrees SAVE PATTERN You can save a pattern pat file to the display s internal memory to the current field by using the following procedure Saua batiam 1 Press Save Pattern inet Naw DN The Save Pattern screen appears as hown 208 Existing Patterns Swath Created Pattern 60 000 12 23 2009 Curve 60 000 12 23 2009 Straight 60 000 12 23 2009 Curve l Note The Save Pattern button will appear Q when there is an active pattern 2 Name the pattern Press the keyboard button and enter a unique pattern name When finished press the green check mark button e Notes To verify that the pattern is saved you can open the Save Pattern screen again by pressing the Save Pattern button Your newly saved or named pattern should now appear in the Save Pattern screen You may remove all of the patterns by pressing the Remove All button A warning appears stating All guidance patterns will be permanently erased from memory If you wish to do this press the green check mark button to continue LOAD PATTERN You can load a pattern from the display s internal memory to the current field by using the follo
86. 0 e If you wish to turn the threshold of the alarm to zero press the Disable button KINZE Magnetic Coil Speed Sensor Calibration KINZE Planter Monitor customers who have a magnetic coil soeed sensor must check the Magnetic Pickup check box on the Planter Configuration screen when they first enter a configuration This setting should then be left unchanged For reference see KINZE Planter Configuration on page 131 These customers will need to calibrate the Magnetic Coil Speed Sensor at least once per season To do this press the Planter on the KINZE Planter Monitor Setup screen When the Planter Configuration screen appears press the Calibrate button located next to the Magnetic Pickup check box The Magnetic Coil Soeed Sensor Calibration wizard appears as shown Magnetic Coil Speed Sensor Calibration Step 1 of 3 1 Enter distance of calibration iaz ea tati E The default distance for calibrating the magnetic coil 7 speed sensor is 100 feet 50 meters If you wish to Hater a rein EEREN feber press ea site al ia TEA calibrate at another distance enter the new distance Press the blue right arrow button to continue 135 AZNIy Magnetic Coil Speed Sensor Calibration Step 2 of 3 2 Drive from Start to end points Position the Vehicle at the start marker Drive an Sana Distance of 100 feet Position the vehicle at the start marker Press the green Press START and begin driving ITT eet f EE colored Start button an
87. 0 degrees of the AB heading Otherwise the A heading is in the opposite direction 3 Follow the AB line for guidance down the first swath 4 Turn left or right for the next swath The next swath is automatically selected 5 Steer the vehicle so that you center the green lights in the lightbar as you drive forward along the swath Pivot Use the Center pivot pattern for a field that is irrigated using a center ar pivot With this pattern you can drive concentric circles around the center pivot The display will calculate the center point based on where EN you have driven Otherwise you can enter in the latitude and longitude EN A of the center point if known Z be Pivot Pattern Pivot Field Edge 1 Position one wheel of the vehicle in a pivot wheel rut with the rear of the vehicle to the pivot arm 2 To start the pivot set Point A 3 Drive around the field Keep the vehicle wheel in the rut The lightbar does not yet provide guidance 4 When you are almost back to the pivot arm or the edge of the field set Point B 87 AONVGINS Pivot Field Edge 5 Next you must set the Field Edge You may do this when sut units the Pivot Field Edge window appears on your display as Shift By Distance Shift Ely Buet shown left Humber of Drees Bow Spacing 0 a 30 in a Direction relatie te A B lire Outward 3 From here you may choose one of three options
88. 120 and Seed Monitor Alarms on page 122 3 Adjust Seed Monitor Options on the Equipment Tab of the Map screen See Seed Monitor Options on page 120 SEED TUBE MONITOR MODULE CONFIGURATION To set up a Planting Operating Configuration using a Seed Tube Monitor Module first press the Setup wrench button and go to the Setup screen 117 DNIHOLINON 1 Create Planting Configuration Underneath the Configuration Tab press the Add button to add a Planting Configuration Select an existing Vehicle from the drop down menu or press the Add button and create a new vehicle with the Vehicle Setup Wizard Press the blue right arrow button to continue 2 Select Implement Press the Add button to create a new implement 3 Select Planter Seeder Type and Attachment Method From the top drop down menu select the Planter Seeder Type setting Then use the bottom drop down menu to select an appropriate Attachment Method Press the blue right arrow button to continue 4 Select Implement Options Under the Planter Monitor drop down menu select Seed Monitor Module Split Rows Enabled Check this box to enable the display to log data from the planter s Split Row units For split row enabled planters you will need to create separate implement configurations for Split Row and non Split Row operations Planter Section Row Shutoff Check the Planter Section Row Shutoff check box if you are using Row Shutoff 5 Enter Number of R
89. 241 246 dry bushels 224 dry percentage 15 253 X3AN E EdgeVac 132 sensors 132 edit info button 14 edit legend button 14 edit pattern 84 edit product 14 elevator mount unit sensor 242 elevator speed 224 EMU sensor 242 engage 88 enter calibration weight 238 enter weight 238 EPA number 14 expand bushels 15 export pattern 84 copy to card 84 F field 16 flag region as a calibration load 225 226 237 flow delay 225 flow max 241 flow min 241 flow offset 241 flow rate 241 flow sensor 225 followed path 80 full calibration 238 G gear ratio example 107 108 multiple drives 107 108 single motor drive 106 gear ratio calculation 106 GPS button 12 grain calibration button 234 236 245 grain calibration screen 233 235 239 grain harvest diagnostics 241 grain settings screen 15 grain weight calibration 236 grid 225 grower 15 guidance 225 guidance options 86 adaptive curve 86 guidance tab 74 75 A B line 75 76 204 active line cycle 76 cancel 75 guidance tab 75 load pattern 74 manage pattern 74 menu toggle 75 new AB pattern 75 new pattern 74 nudge menu 75 pause 75 remark A 75 reset 75 76 resume 75 save 75 save pattern 76 set A 75 shift 75 smartpath 76 guidance width 77 83 H harvest configuration 229 harvest diagnostic button 224 harvest diagnostic screen 224 header heigh 232 header height 224 header offset 233 header raw 241 header sensor reset all 232 header senso
90. 44 Devices Device Information rrrrvnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnennnnennennnnavnennnnnnnannenavnnnnennenannennnnannnnnennnnannenunnunne 45 BW EE 45 Ree IAGO e 45 Settings Sie elle D nde Te EE EE 47 Calibrate BLE e 48 Auxiliary Input 48 ITS 49 Auxiliary Input Help 49 ORK alle A Vue BET ge 50 OST EE 50 PSU 51 EEE 52 gle ab eNOS Ce EE NE 52 Mount Tab Settings for some Application vehcesl 52 Head Tab for Harvest vehicles eee eee 52 Swath Section Oftfeets cc ececcecseeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeueeueeueeaeeeuauueueeaueaeueass 52 Section ONS CUS acct oe maaadaaa ln a iale a BEI AG 53 Advanced Section OffSets eee eee eee eee en eee ea eee eee 53 Virtual Terminal TET 55 Common Termmmology eee eee eee nana nana 55 PUD MAY ner 57 VT Alarms and Trouble CGodes AANEREN 58 GPS GPS FP EN 61 Eeer 61 JMW TAR SANS 62 OmniSTAR Settings GPS 2500 63 PT MM 65 GPS IMPOR Ee TE 67 GPS Information General Tab 67 SINALNOD AO AT14v LL Satellite md 0 68 GPS Information Receiver Tab 69 GPS Information OmniSTAR Tab 70 RTK NTRIP NOEN 70 GPS Information NTIRHIR cece eccecc cence eee eee ee eee eee eee aaa aa 70 Guidance Guidance Guidance Steering Control 73 TN 73 re la ste tee EE ER 73 SE LUI E 73 Guidance Tab on Mapping Toolbox eee nana 74 Guidance Tab before any patterns created or Joaded 74 Guidance Tab New A B pattern ccccccccsececcesseecceeeeeeseeeeceseeessageesseaeeess 75 Guidance Tab
91. 5 Row Shutoff Configuration Getup eee eee na 95 ROW Clutch Setup c eee eee eee ana 96 Row Shutoff Look Ahead Number 97 Checking AutoSwath Performance for Row Shutoff cccccsseceeeeseeeeeeeees 97 Fixing Overplanting and Underplanting in Autozwaih eee 98 Rate Control Hydraulic Seed Rate Control srecen aeeie er aTa EENEN 99 Hydraulic Seed Rate Control Configuration rrarrrnnnnrnrnnnrvnnnnrrnnnrnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnne 99 Controller Settings for Hydraulic Seed Rate Motor Drives 100 Channel Tab settmgs eee eee nenea 100 Control Valve Settings DWM eee enaae 101 Control Valve Settings Geng 101 ANN DM 101 Hydraulic Seed Controller Settings for Specific Planters ccccceeeeeee 102 John Deere Planters EE 102 te e re 102 Oa Se PN rv 102 Hydraulic Seed Meter Calibration Numbere eee 102 stepper Seed Rate Cont Ol rsss a E aE EEEE 103 Stepper Seed Rate Control Contguraton eee 104 Controller Settings for Stepper Seed Rate Motor Drives rrnrrrrrnarnrnrnnnnennnnn 104 See Ee 105 AUM LAD EE E RE 105 Gear Ratio Calculations for Seed Rate Motors eee 106 Gear Ratio Drawing For Single Motor De 106 Gear Ratio Drawing For Multiple Drive Combinations 00 00nn00annaaann 107 Seed Ratio Calculation Example Drocecdure eee eee 107 Gear Ratio Drawing For John Deere Pro Shaft Drives rrrrrnnrrennnnn 108 Priming Seed Rate Meters
92. 50 PROPRIETARY TECHNOLOGY NOTIGE ci taci ao at ao aud a ta 251 COPYRIGHT NOTIGE rrunnnnnnonnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnssnnnnsnennnnnsnnnnnssennnnnennnnnsnnnnnssennnnn 251 SERICE AND SUI POR H E 251 XIII XIV GENERAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL INTRODUCTION AND COMPANY PROFILE ABOUT US Welcome to the Ag Leader Technology family Ag Leader Technology Inc is the global leader in yield monitor and precision farming systems and is committed to meeting the present and future needs of the agriculture industry by providing high quality products and first class customer support INNOVATION Ag Leader Technology manufactures and sells products which support a wide array of precision farming practices These include grain yield monitoring application rate control and monitoring variable rate fertilizer application site verification GPS guidance and interface to Autosteer technologies COMPATIBILITY Ag Leader Technology offers compatibility and supports integration of many different types and brands of equipment used for precision farming The latest equipment available is supported as well as older series of combines planters sprayers tillage equipment etc QUALITY AND SUPPORT Ag Leader Technology and continues to provide the best customer support in the industry Precision farming doesn t come without questions Ag Leader is committed to providing the most responsive knowledgeable and friendly technical support available Our technic
93. Adjust Implement Switch Settings for area logging If using an implement switch in a area logging planting operation you will need to adjust the Implement Switch Settings For more information see Implement Switch Settings for Area Logging on page 26 e Adjust Equipment Settings for Rate Control Users of DirectCommand configurations should adjust settings at the Equipment Configuration Settings screen For more information see Equipment Configuration Settings for Rate Control on page 26 e Speed Input Setup For more information see Speed Input Settings on page 47 e Calibrate Distance For more information see Calibrate Distance on page 48 e AutoSwath settings if using AutoSwath For more information see AutoSwath on page 50 e GPS Offsets Adjust GPS offsets for the Antenna Tab and the Hitch Tab For more information see GPS Offsets on page 51 e Swath Section Offsets For more information see Swath Section Offsets on page 52 QUID APPLICATION CONTROLLER SETTINGS CZ oe DEES et Configuration gt E gt gt Settings 144 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt Controller Settings button The Controller Settings screen appears as shown Controller Settings Rate OF Rate Error Alarm Flow Me
94. As Applied or Coverage attributes and Varieties if you are performing a Planting operation Legend Settings PT On the Legend Select screen press the Attribute Rate Setup wrench button next to the Rate NG Ben 20 0 EE E button and the Legend Seitings screen i EE 10 E GreenvellowRed e Alee up appears as shown The Legend 4 0 8 0 GLUT AG EAE Moo 40 kg ger des Settings screen allows you to change the default legend ae Notes e The Legend Settings screen can also be accessed by pressing the Edit Legend button on the Setup screen s Product Tab E Save as Product Legend e Legend settings changes that are made at the Legend Settings screen will affect all regions The Legend Settings screen includes the following items Attribute Yield Attribute 205 225 Appears atthe top left of the Legend Settings screen as shown at left Attributes shown Che for Harvest include Yield and Moisture The Rate attribute is shown for Planting and ms ti Application operations You can adjust the color scheme spacing and ranges as they appear on the map screen by using the buttons described below e Average The Average button changes the average rate for the legend Use the numeric keypad to specify the average of the ranges shown on the map legend e Range Spacing The Range Spacing button changes the difference between the rates in one color range Use the numeric keypad to edit the leg
95. Automatic Swath Control screen appears as shown KA Note If you are performing a Harvest operation see AutoSwath Sensitivity Settings on page 228 e Outside Boundary Option Select one of the two options to determine system behavior when a section exits a field boundary e Coverage Option In the Coverage Option area you must choose between three options The Minimize Skip option turns off the implement section after the entire section is fully inside your coverage area This prevents the possibility of skips The Minimize Overlap option turns off the implement section when that section first enters your coverage area This prevents the possibility of overlaps The User Defined option allows you to choose what percentage of the implement section is within the coverage area before that section turns off For example if you choose 50 then the section will switch off when half of it is within your coverage area e Turn On Look Ahead This setting determines how far ahead the system looks to turn the sections back on This setting compensates for delay in the planting control system when the implement sections are turned on To see what these numbers should look like for Row Shutoff Modules see Row Shutoff Look Ahead Numbers on page 84 e Turn Off Look Ahead This setting determines how far ahead the system looks to turn the sections off This setting compensates for delay in the product control sy
96. C SEED CONTROL ZERO FLOW OFFSET VARIATION Zero flow offset is an operator entered setting Zero Flow Offset represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero Flow Offset value can cause the product control system to not properly control low rates Zero flow offset may vary somewhat by system and by operating conditions On the tables on the following pages problems and causes relating to Zero Flow Offset are listed Use the Confirmation Techniques to determine if you have this problem and then follow the appropriate solution 114 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING Error Message Drive is slow to begin turning Possible Cause Zero Flow Offset is set too low Conformation Technique a Turn the Master Switch off Enter a manual ground speed and enter a new region b From the Run screen open the product application rate window and highlight the appropriate product Select Manual control mode c Switch the Master Switch on d Press the up button one time Now press the down button one time If the drive is not turning the Zero Flow Offset is likely to be too low Solution a Turn the Master Switch off Enter a manual ground speed and create a new region b Increase Zero Flow Offset by 2 c From the Run screen open the product application rate window and highlight the appropriate product Select Manual control mode d Sw
97. D CONTROL METER ALARMS Error Message Drive Out of Synch Error Drive Possible Cause Not enough hydraulic fluid is flowing to the seed meter Solution Examine the stepper seed drive s hydraulic components for restrictions Make sure the tractor s hydraulic outlet is turned on Make sure the hydraulic flow settings are correct Error Message Drive Stalled Drive 115 IOHLNOD ALVY Possible Cause The hydraulic drive motor has stopped rotating Solution Check the stepper seed motor to see if it is restricted from turning and that the hydraulic drive is working Error Message Meter Not Moving Drive Possible Cause Either the Seed Meter Calibration failed or the Seed Meter Prime failed Solution Make sure that the tractor s hydraulic outlet is turned on Error Message Seed Drive at Maximum RPM Drive Possible Cause If you start the priming routine and the hydraulic motor is not on Solution Slow the planter unit s ground speed Reduce the Planting Target Rate 116 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING MONITORING SEED TUBE MONITOR MODULE SEEDCOMMAND MAP SCREEN EXAMPLES On this and the following page are shown two examples of SeedCommand operating configurations during Run Time Operations The screen to the left is a Seed Tube Monitor Module STMM with Row Shutoff and three Stepper Motor Drives e A Mapping Toolbox e B Seed Tube Monitor bar graph Bars represent row u
98. DRIVES After creating an Operating Configuration for the Hydraulic Seed Meter Controller you may make settings changes in the Controller Settings screen which shows valve settings for hydraulic flow and pulses per revolution To access the Controller Settings screen highlight your configuration in the Configuration Tab and press the Setup wrench button At the Configuration Setup screen press the Controller Settings button The Controller Settings screen consists of at least two tabs the Channel Tabs shown for each channel that you are controlling and the Auxiliary Tab which is described at Auxiliary Tab settings on page 101 Channel Tab settings Controller Settings S Shaft Speed Cal Channel 1 Auiary Calibration number representing the pulses that Se SE ae equal one revolution of the hydraulic motor 360 pls rev E 1 533 H za ll e Max Meter Speed Setting determines the maximum RPM of the Max Meter Speed seed meter 150 rpm E Pi ae Di i EE Gear Ratio Ratio of the revolutions of the hydraulic drive as compared to one revolution of the seed meter e Allowable Error Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate changes e Control Valve Settings This button summons the Control Valve Settings screen The appearance of the Control Valve Settings screen varies depending upon whether your planter s control valves are PWM Valves or Servo Valves
99. Dyme system e Before using the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or ParaDyme system the operator must have sufficient knowledge of how to operate the systems in a safe manner e When installing the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system all safety precautions must be clearly understood If there are any loose missing or damaged parts they should not be used e Before using the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system verify all functions are checked and controlled to ensure they are working correctly When there is any doubt do not take any risks always contact your authorized dealer or technical support e Before operating the OnTrac2 system and or the ParaDyme system verify all functions of the Operator Presence Switch to ensure it functions correctly e Powering the OnTrac2 system and or the ParaDyme system ON or OFF must be done by following the correct prescribed procedures e H any vehicle or system function is abnormal for example if excessive vibrations or noise occur immediately stop the vehicle power OFF the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and ParaDyme system and contact your authorized dealer or technical support e When maintaining or cleaning the OnTrac2 system and or the ParaDyme system it must be completely powered OFF and are free of any electrical currents e The operator of the OnTrac2 OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System in conjunction with ParaDyme system must r
100. ENNA 214 Load eis AO EE RR SN RR 214 Run CGonfguraton eee eee eee neoane 215 MELE DUDE n ea casa elis a te ata toata e aaa a c va all 215 Run Time Operations eee eee nana 216 Strip Till Three Bin Configuration eee eee 217 Strip Till CONTO SCI CCM ME 217 Static CFR Calibration Drocecdure eee eee eee 218 In Field Calibration Procedure Strip Til 219 Strip Till Control Auxiliary Tab 220 Troubleshooting DirectCommand Granular Applications reronrrrnnnnennnnnennnn 220 Troubleshooting Serial Control Applcatons eee 221 Fertilizer Default Product Settings eee eee 222 Harvest Yield Monitoring Run Time Environment Map Screen eee eee eee 223 HE ES EE LEG eee elite et ei rata 224 Harvest Diagnostic Button on Map Gcreen eee 224 LEES EE 225 Map Screen Flow Delai 225 Region Selection Options Gcreen eee nana 225 Tracking Varieties and Changing Regions c eee eee 226 Variety Tracking menu and Automatic Variety Tracking oaannennnenenannn 226 Automatic Variety Trackimg eee eee eee 227 Automatic Region Changing eee eee 227 FINEST 227 Importing Variety Maps 227 Importing Variety Map Procedure eee eee eeaa 227 Error Messages at Variety Map Import 228 AutoSwath Sensitivity Settings eee eee nenea 228 About Harvest Configurations eee eee nana eee 229 Pre Harvest Checker 230 DE FE Ne 230 Vehicle Inspection wrcnsarsmsnnuasenceansecuehsrnonniaxeusacesmmncrindunanauex
101. Fi Signal Strength 100 e NTRIP Status Displays NTRIP connection either Connected or Disconnected 70 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 e Cellular Status Displays status of ParaDyme cellular modem either Connected or Disconnected e Cellular Signal Strength Displays a number between 0 and 100 e WiFi Status Displays status of WiFi router either Connected or Disconnected e WiFi Signal Strength Displays a number between 0 and 100 71 Sdd 12 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 GUIDANCE GUIDANCE STEERING CONTROL SETUP CG De gt 22 Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt GPS button GPS Guidance Setup e Manual Guidance Guidance Steering GPS Select this to perform guidance by lightbar Ale Kn sort while manually steering the vehicle WAAS EGNOS Sa price Lightbar Settings f mi GE For more information see the ParaDyme Backup Require Differential Reset to Insert e eae GPS Rate Hz Defaults Operator Presence Alarm 1 F ignore NMEA e Lightbar Settings 15 Minutes Age of Differential eech For more information see Lightbar 0 Settings on page 73 e Required Differential Correction for Guidance When un checked allows guidance to operate without differential correction Operator Presence Alarm Available for ParaDyme users The Operator Presence Alarm disengages guidance control if the operator does not have any interaction with the display for a specified period
102. G Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A STC IRA Quick Reference Guide GPS Setup Settings R 7 OT Guidance Guidance Steering ParaDyme Steering ightbar Settings Spacing External Lightbar LED Brightness Operator Presence Alarm Paradyme only PS Differential Source WAAS EGNOS OmniSTAR Beacon Setup gt Varies upon GPS differential source WAAS Backup GPS Rate Hz Age Of Differential Port Settings rn A Port B orce TSIP Connection Reset to Defaults lgnore NMEA Checksum 14 AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A EE Uer Quick Reference Guide Home Screen Setup Menus Season Field Grower Operation Farm Region Area Date Created Create Report View Report View Map Copy Data Upgrade Firmware Import Files Export Files Manage Files Edit Revert Memo Options EP Export Files e Selection gt le Selection gt Select File Type gt Manager Auto Generate Report Copy from Previous Region Prompt for Report Details Multi Color Rate Single Color Coverage AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A STC RAS Quick Reference Guide Safety Notice Read these safety instructions and the User Manuals thoroughly and follow the instructions e Only an operator who is fully authorized to drive the vehicle can use the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system e The operator must not exceed the safe speed limit for the terrain on which the vehicle is operating e
103. GRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION LIQUID SERVO SETTINGS DESCRIPTION e Valve Response 1 Default Value 100 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower e Valve Response 2 Default Value 24 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error is less than the Response Threshold setting Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower e Allowable Error Default Value 2 Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate corrections 2 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error e Response Threshold Default Value 3 Determines where the control system switches between using Valve Response 1 or Valve Response 2 speed setting Leaving all other valve control settings at the default value and making a small adjustment to this setting Is usually all that is required to fine tune system performance Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of soeeding up servo valve response Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing servo valve response LIQUID PWM CONTROL VALVE SETTINGS DESCRIPTION e PW
104. GVM Prowler Sung Gene 2007 p Non AIM Command Mode By Pass Servo Case IH 4260 with KZKCO valve Hagie 284 284XP pe Hagie 2100 2101 S o o a 00 24 Hagie STS 10 12 Puma Sero 2000 to 2005 H Hagie STS 10 12 360 14 16 2006 and PWM 12 volt 600 20 2 Hagie 39 pin 2 100 40 2006 and 2007 John Deere 4700 No rate control 47X0 49X0 provided 163 IOYLNOD ALVY OICHT Flow Control Valve or Sprayer Model and year if Control System applicable PWM Frequency Zero Offset Allowable Error Valve Response Valve Response Typical Gain Range eres Threshold mee PumpSene f pe po pa E 2 Imperia Montana Paruda Calibrated Reflow 2 100 40 or 11 4 Metric RoGator 864 874 500 RoGator 1254 Pump Seng Servo pe 1 100 24 aia ae 1264 5 o RoGator 1274 1286 and SS 500 S eg 2007 and FE Ground 700 2 e Kg 3X40 500 o 500 S TerraGator XX03 A R o 2 100 124 150XL and WT Servo Control Adjust this number to fit your particular configuration Refer to the Application section in the InSight User Manual for more information on adjusting this response threshold If you are using a PWM control valve some adjustment may need to be made to achieve optimal pump response to the PWM gain value Increase the Gain value to make the system more responsive decrease the Gain value to smooth the system response 164 INTE
105. I CGISA Ag Leader Technology INTEGRA User Manual Firmware Version 2 5 Ag Leader PN 4002086 Rev F Table of Contents General About this Manual Introduction and Company Profile eee eanaae 1 Dr 1 Service eee nana na 1 TY SU E 2 SJ ELEN LE R E EEE 2 VE Ste RI sosi ate acneea oc iu md ate 0 sence paint an oes a and a la fat 3 COLO TOUCH gt CTO I EE 3 AINE US TE MN Le 3 Fem 3 System and Upgrades eee eee eee nana aa 3 Automated Module Firmware Upgrade eee neon 4 Product Registration eee eee nana 4 Conventions Used In This Manual eee eee eee nea na aee 4 Ee IS and VV AWA S RR RR RN RR RR RR RR E RR RR N AI RR RN RIN RR NR 4 Cross references and Web Links eee eee eee nea na 4 VIEWING NS Manual ONE sans 5 How to Find Information You re LOOKING For 5 Installation BIE OVA Tet CRAI TEE 7 IAS TAN ATOM INSU CONS Lam veske 7 Fuse Installation and Replacement c eee eee 9 SOLO ICON FO e E te 9 Setup Configuration Welte 11 Setup buttons eee 11 So FATA LO DURO LII tet atace Si eine ale etalate alin Di a italia ete detina 12 COLE Ura LO Fir T O mite src pee cen relua a enter e net 12 Manage Eg ipment DUO aaret 13 FOUC LE IO 433 13 ad 010 0 E E LUI ne ma e a mita iata al ad tie alle d ia n tuf 13 OCC 4 14 ON SNS eet ce pe pee angina te a ct iai ba in a al 15 NEE 15 NT 15 NN 16 SINSALNON AO a1av Importing and Exporting Field Boundaries rrrrnr
106. IONS SCREEN Seed Man tori Op ons The Seed Monitor Options screen adjust Seed Tube Monitor Module alarm thresholds Display Options Table View e Gain shows the population adjust value used to adjust the population if the seed tube is not sensing the actual E seed population Thresholds For the correct Gain setting for your operation please Singulation Alarm refer to your planter s operator manual 98 5 i For Corn Gain values should be set to 1 e Advanced Thresholds Double Seed threshold EE Poor Spacing threshold i e la ez re e S e Singulation Alarm Spacing Alarm ss e Spacing Alarm e Alarms button Press to access the Seed Monitor Alarms screen explained below e Ignore seed alarms when row clutches turned off check box SEED MONITOR ALARMS SCREEN Press the Alarm button on the Seed Monitor Option screen above to access the Seed Monitor Alarms screen High and Low buttons assign a percentage of error that will trigger the rate alarm e The Disable High and Disable Low buttons deactivate the respective high or low rate alarms The Select All button selects all rows so that you may change the alarm threshold for the entire group Table View tab shows seeds per acre and seeds per Seed Monitor Options second for each row Display Options Table View Seed Sensors sds set sds ac 31986 31986 31986 31986 31986 31986 31986 31986 31986 31986 31986
107. Integra Grower Field Management Setup Integra Service Manual Note A GROWER FARM and FIELD must be set up in order to go to the Run Screen and load a field and configuration Startup 1 Turn display on by pressing the BLACK BUTTON on the back of the Integra display Note At any time pressing the BACK ARROW in the upper left of a pop up window will go back a screen Continue to press the BACK ARROW to get to the HOME SCREEN Grower Farm Field Tab From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button Press the FARMSTEAD icon at the bottom center of the setup window Press the GROWER FARM FIELD tab Press the GREEN PLUS Press the GREEN PLUS next to Grower Enter the GROWER BUSINESS NAME Press the GREEN CHECK Press the GREEN PLUS next to Farm Enter the FARM NAME 10 Press the GREEN CHECK 11 Press the GREEN PLUS next to Fields 12 Enter the FIELD NAME 13 Press the GREEN CHECK 14 Repeat steps 8 thru 13 for all Farms and Fields 15 Press the BACK ARROW when all Farms and Fields are entered POPNE A SS If you are setting up all tabs in one session begin with step 3 for Season and Operator Season Tab From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button Press the FARMSTEAD icon at the bottom center of the setup window Press the SEASON tab Press the GREEN PLUS Enter the SEASON NAME Press the GREEN CHECK Operator Tab From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button Press the FARMSTEAD icon at the bottom center of the setu
108. M Frequency Default Value 100 The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at Typical settings range from 100 125 See PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings e Gain Default Value 800 This setting determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate change adjustments The higher the value the more aggressive the system response Is e Zero Offset Default Value 30 This setting represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero Offset value can cause the product control system to not properly shut off See PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings 165 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT e Allowable Error Default Value 2 2 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error DICKEY JOHN NH3 CONVERSIONS Conversion Formulas The following formulas can be used to convert the Dickey John flow sensor constant to a value that represents pulses gallon of anhydrous ammonia for use by the display Conversion Formula Formula for flow meter calibration for Dickey John reading pounds of anhydrous Flow sensor constant pulses in X 1728 in ft5 X 5 11 Ibs of anhydrous gal Solution Density Ib
109. NIHOLINON ATAIA Grain Calibration 3 At the Configuration Setup screen press the Grain Calibration button The Grain Calibration screen appears as shown Grain Weight Calibration Field Name Region Name Estimated Actual Error Enter Weight Show Cal Numbers Perform Calibration ET 4 Open Moisture Calibration screen Field On the Grain Calibration screen press the Moisture button to open the Moisture Calibration screen as shown Moisture Region sataman 5 Choose Field Region and Adjust Moisture eo ll Choose the correct field and region the moisture sample was taken from Use the up and down arrow keys to adjust the moisture so that it matches the known moisture of the sample When finished press the check mark box lz 3 EEE If you wish to adjust moisture settings for a specific EEE region you can use the Use Manual Moisture Fra setting Unlike the Moisture Calibration which affects Moisture all previously harvested data a Manual Moisture Adjustment setting only affects data within a specified Region 14 0 1 Atthe Moisture Calibration screen select the desired Field and Region where you wish to adjust Manual Moisture settings 2 Check the Use Manual Moisture check box as shown above 3 Use the up and down arrow keys to adjust the moisture to the desired value When finished press the check mark box GRAIN WEIGHT CALIBRATION Before the display can accurat
110. NZE PLANTER MONITOR KINZE Planter Monitor users who see the Active Alarms window as shown can use the scroll bar on the right hand side to locate the row units where the alarm is occurring Acknowledge the alarm by pressing the green check mark button After you have dismissed the alarm you may continue planting however the alarm will continue showing in the title bar You may also review the alarm information underneath the CAN device list shown underneath CAN Diagnostics The table below describes various alarms that may occur at system startup The following pages describe errors that could occur during field operations Error Message Sensors calibrating wait for calibration Possible Cause PMM startup Solution Wait for Planter Monitor Module PMM to finish before beginning operation Error Message Row sensor not detected Possible Cause Population sensor did not begin communicating with the PMM Solution Acknowledge the error by pressing OK Check the LED on the sensor to see if it is working properly If it has failed then replace the sensor Refer to the KINZE Planter Operator s manual for further instructions Error Message Clean or replace sensor Row as necessary Possible Cause Population sensor dirty Solution Press OK to dismiss the error Then clean the sensor and restart the system Error Message Row mux bus data line short to mux bus ground Possible Cause Population sensor s
111. ORMATION OMNISTAR TAB GPS Information e HP XP Expiration Date HP XP Expiration Date 03 19 2010 HP XP Time Remaining HP XP Time Remaining 0 Days VBS Expiration Date 03 19 2010 e VBS Expiration Date VBS Time Remaining 0 Days di AutoSeed Fast Restart OFF e VBS Time Remaining AutoSeed Status N A Estimated Position Error N A in z AutoSeed Fast Restart e AutoSeed Status e Estimated Position Error General Receiver OmniSTAR Reset AutoSeed RTK NTRIP Information The following information appears on the second GPS Information screen for users of RTK or NTRIP e Convergence Successful communication between Base Station and ParaDyme Roof Module e Radio Throughput Displays percentage of data received from Base Station e Distance to Base Shows distance to Base Station in miles kilometers e Base Channel Displays Channel ID of Base Station e NTRIP Applicable only to NTRIP users Shows either Connected or Disconnected GPS INFORMATION NTRIP Users of the NTRIP guidance system can also view the NTRIP Information screen below in addition to the GPS Information screens discussed previously GPS Information S NTRIP Connect nS Connects the display to the NTRIP correction source NTRIP Stream CMRF NEAR NTRIP NTRIP Status Stream Connected pr NTRI P St ream Cellular Status Connected Cellular Signal Strength el 100 N etwo rk m O u nt po nt WiFi Status Connected Wi
112. Once an AB line has been created the Guidance Tab changes its appearance to that shown at left e Reset Press to discontinue the current pattern and begin creating another pattern For more information see Reset Pattern on page 85 Save Press to save the pattern For more information see Save Pattern on page 82 Guidance Options Press to adjust Nudge and SmartPath settings For more information see Nudge on page 86 and also SmartPath Guidance Options on page 81 e Menu Toggle Press to toggle between pattern settings and Nudge settings Guidance GUIDANCE TAB NUDGE MENU If you have specified a Nudge increment at the Guidance Options screen then you can access Nudge settings by pressing the Menu Toggle button e Remark A The Remark A button re marks the A point by moving it to the current position while maintaining the same heading For more information see Remark A on page 85 e Shift The Shift button moves all of the swaths by a specified distance to the left or right For more information see Load Pattern on page 82 75 including the AB line The swaths can be shifted by a distance or number of rows AONVGINS K D Nudge Settings The left and right arrow buttons adjusts the swaths by a specified distance while leaving the AB line in its original spot This distance then appears in the black bar above the arrows For information on how to adj
113. Pressing the Map Marker Setup wrench button opens the Markers screen as Field Options Map Icon Mark Name EN shown at left Rock Cl All Mark Sin winners e Press the Add button to add a marker Tree Weeds Georeferenced Note e Press the on screen keyboard button to Hole Change edit the name of a marker Icon Tile Inlet e Press Change Icon to change marker Washout icons For more information see Changing Marker Icons on page 40 D x Oo 7 gt e If you have numerous map icons you can v cycle through them by pressing the up and down arrow buttons Field Options e Press the Clear All Marks button if you wish to erase all field markers from the Map screen A CAUTION Once you clear this information it cannot be retrieved 33 N33H2S NNYH e Press the Georeferenced Note button if you wish to add a Field Note that is referenced to your current GPS position Note This georeferenced position will not show up on the display s on screen map but it will be added to desktop software when you export your field data Changing Marker Icons sg The X at left is the default icon assigned by the system for all new Markers A different icon can be assigned to a Marker by following the steps outlined below wae 1 Press the Map Marker setup button The Markers screen opens RO x 2 On the Markers screen highlight a marker and press the Change Icon button The Icon Selection screen appears as
114. Pressing the hydraulic drive channel will show the average of that section of the planter for the four display items at the bottom of the screen e C Bar Graph Displays population singulation spacing quality skips and doubles as selected by the operator e D Population Displays the average population for t he planter or sections of the planter along with the highest and lowest population row e E Spacing Quality Displays the average spacing quality for the planter or selected sections of the planter along with the highest and lowest spacing quality is a measure of the percent of seeds being properly placed so that the spacing is as expected in the seed trench e F Singulation Displays the average Singulation for the planter or selected sections of the planter along with the highest and lowest rows singulation is a measure of the percent of seeds being properly metered so that one and only one seed drops from each seed cell of the seed meter e G Skips Doubles Displays the average skips and doubles for the planter skips are a measure of the percentage of seed expected to be planted that do not due to a seed not being dropped by the seed meter doubles are a measure of the percentage of seed expected to be planted individually but instead two or more are dropped by the seed meter e H Seed Monitor Setup Pressing this button brings up Seed Monitor Options screen 125 DNIHOLINON SEED MONITOR OPT
115. R 1 Press Injection Control button To prime the Injection Pump first go to the Map screen Press the Injection button as shown at 173 NOLLOAFPNJ injection Controls 2 Press the Prime button At the Injection Controls screen press the Prime button Injection Prime Agitate e You may agitate the Direct Injection tank by pressing the Agitate button Once pressed this Agitate setting will continue even after the Priming process Is finished until you press the green check mark button a second time To determine if a product should be agitated check the product specifications e In order for a Direct Injection tank to agitate the product v you must set the agitator motor switch on Run which agitates the product continuously or Pulse which agitates the product intermittently 3 Acknowledge the Warning A warning appears stating that you must circulate the product back to the Direct Injection tank Acknowledge the warning by pressing the green check mark button i AT 4 Start Pump and Set Desired Speed Use increase decrease arrows to start pump and set to desired speed The Injection Pump Prime screen appears The countdown time remaining is shown in the black box The bar underneath turns green when the pump is operating Time Remaining Use the up and down arrows to manually increase or J decrease the pump speed Note The recommended priming time is three minutes 3 00 but the routine can be ended at any t
116. RAC UC5 manual 191 GON DV HON e Sensors and Valve Drivers Opens the Sensor and Valve Driver Settings screen Norac UCS Setup The following settings appear on the General Tab General Sensor Valve Switch Minimum Height Mode includes three selections Minimum Height Minimum Height Mode Soil Mode e Absolute Disabled 24 in E no sensors are allowed to move closer to the target than the minimum height setting Crap Mode e Relative no sensors are allowed to move closer to the target than the distance of the target height minus the minimum height setting e Disabled Disables the minimum height mode Note Target refers to the ground in Soil Mode and the crop canopy in Crop Mode e Minimum Height If desired use the numeric keypads to adjust the following settings Soil Mode The minimum height setting when operating in Soil Mode Crop Mode The minimum height setting when operating in Crop Mode Also consult the NORAC UC5 manual for more information e Advanced Settings NORAC non user menu e Retune From time to time it may be necessary to recalibrate Retune the UC5 electronics to your sprayer s hydraulics Examples of such times are e When a hydraulic solenoid valve is changed e When the hydraulic pump is changed or adjusted When the normal working temperature of the hydraulic oil has shifted significantly from when the system was previously calib
117. RPM of the conveyor that controls product distribution to the application point Spreader Control Spinner Tab To view Fan Speed Calibration settings press the Spinner Tab located behind the Channel Tabs Operators with Spinner Spreaders that use PWM valves will see additional active settings Spreader Control Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Spinner Fan Speed Calibration rann The number of pulses that are generated by the sensor Fan Speed z during one revolution of the spinner dish The Default Setting is 4 e PWM Gain Determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making spinner speed adjustments The higher the _ value the more aggressive the system response is The Default Setting is 20 v x i PWM Frequency The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at Settings can be found from the manufacturer of the valve Typical settings range from 100 125 Hz The Default Setting is 100 e Zero RPM Offset Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero RPM Offset value can cause the spinner system to not properly shut off The Default Setting is 30 Note See the PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings e Automatic Control Checking the Automatic Control check box allows you to control the spinner speed The Default Setting is unchecked Fertilizer Blend Setup
118. S receiver has obtained its last update Note The age of the DGPS corrections as delivered to the GPS receiver will vary from one second to several seconds depending on the characteristics of the individual satellite signals Satellite Plot Press the Satellite Plot button on the General tab of the GPS Information screen and the Satellite Plot screen appears The Satellite Plot feature can display either as a plot as shown to left or a graph as shown The information shown on these screens is used as an advanced diagnostic tool for GPS 15 satellite availability In the event of GPS 16 availability issues technical support may request you to view these screens Satellite Plot 18 Satellites In View 10 Corrections Age sec 7 40 Satellites Tracked 7 VDOP 2 40 68 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 Satellite Plot Graph Satellite Plot Satellites In View 10 Corrections Age sec 4 80 HDOP 1 50 Satellites Tracked 7 VDOP 2 40 PDOP 2 80 Note In order to use Differential GPS you must have at least four available satellites In order to use RTK differential sources you must have at least five available satellites GPS INFORMATION RECEIVER TAB Le GPS Information e Receiver ID Receiver le Firmware Version il GPS 2500 e Serial Number Firmware Version 1 5Qx_V9a Serial Number 1802697 e e Dif Subscription e Dif Subscription ON GLONASS OFF e GLONASS 69 Sdd GPS INF
119. Settings screen appears as shown Rate Control Settings EG ti e Available Products The top drop down menu allows you to select one of the available products to be applied for your rate control field operation This menu shows all of the application products that you entered in Product Setup For more information see Product Setup on page 13 H E e Rate 1 and Rate 2 The Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings represent preset application rates that allow operators to quickly change between desired target rates for each individual product Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired amount e Increment The Increment button allows operators to specify the increase or decrease amounts for a specified rate by using the Rate Increase and Rate Decrease arrows on the Product Control Toolbox Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired increment e Prescription To load a map based prescription file press the Prescription button For more information see Loading Prescriptions on page 153 e Minimum Flow Used for DirectCommand Liquid Applications only This setting is used to maintain a consistent spray pattern The display will not allow flow to drop below the entered setting Set to flow at the lowest operating pressure for the selected spray tips with all sections on When spraying with one or more boom sections off the system automatically reduces the minimum flow setting according to the reduced sp
120. Spacing on a row by row scan Eech on all the planter s row units displayed in sequence from Low Row left to right Se e Freeze Mode specifies that the Rate Spacing Display continuously shows only one specified row chosen by the operator Use the up and down arrow buttons to specify which row to freeze ignore seed alarms when Alarms W row clutches turn off e Planter Mode is the default setting for the Rate Spacing Display This mode specifies the instantaneous average population and seed spacing for the entire planter e Alarms button summons the Seed Monitor Alarms window which shows each individual row and the alarms threshold for that row For more information see Seed Monitor Alarms on page 122 e Ignore Seed Alarms when row clutches turn off check box disables the seed alarms when the planter clutches turn off during row turns as an example This box is checked by default uncheck if desired e Averages shows the individual row number and planting rate of the row with the highest and lowest planting rate e Gain shows the population adjust value used to adjust the population if the seed tube is not sensing the actual seed population For the correct Gain setting for your operation please refer to your planter s operator manual Note For corn do not change the default Gain setting of 1 Table View Seed Monitor Options The Table View Tab shows row data from rows Display Options
121. Stage VE Variety AB450Bt 3 Drive Reference Strip screen appears stating that you should drive the applicator to the start of the reference strip When ready press the Start button and drive the reference strip Reference Strip Drive applicator to start of reference strip Press START button and drive reference strip 186 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 N Application Target Rate N ac Au Average VI 0 469 200 00 200 00 APPLICATION Tar 4 Recording Reference Strip SE When you are driving the Reference Sirip a green bar A appears on the right hand side of the Equipment Tab This bar which states Recording counts the number of seconds that you record the reference strip D Fi 133 3 Pirmin Applied Area Container Swath 50 ft 0 In 100 America and 150 seconds 2 5 minutes in Europe S Note In order to create an accurate Reference Strip record for at least 300 seconds 5 minutes in North N Application Target Rate N fach HI Average VI Reference Strip Information File Name 2010 04 20 1516 EF 5 File Name Press the Stop button when you wish to finish creating the Reference Strip The Reference Strip Information screen appears showing the new Reference Strip file name Press the green check mark box to accept or use the on screen keyboard to edit if necessary 6 OptRx Sensors Apply Variable Rate The OptRx sensors apply variable r
122. TS M Smart Report creates documentation of all in field product application events This documentation is saved in a Portable Display Format PDF on your USB drive This PDF either can be viewed on the display screen or printed later Smart Reports provide information relating to location product information applied totals field areas as applied maps and field boundaries Note Itis recommended that you enter any necessary information in Report Details before creating a Smart Report For more information see Report Details on page 37 CREATE REPORTS To begin creating a Smart Report first highlight an item in the list on the Summary Report screen then press the Create Report button 1 The Create Report screen appears which lists the Grower Field and Product at top Two drop down menus list your Operating Configuration and Product Group Use the drop down menus to change these if desired Press the green check mark button when finished 2 A scroll bar informs you of the progress made when the display compiles the Smart Report 3 At the conclusion of the Smart Report creation process a screen states Report Creation Complete Press the green check mark button or if you wish to view the report press the View Report button A built in PDF viewer displays your Smart Report An example is shown at Control Channel Report Content on page 40 Note You can view subsequent pages in the Smart Report by pr
123. The operator must always be aware of his actions when operating the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system e When installing the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system do not force the components as this can result in damage to the components e Always follow the instructions in the installation operation and maintenance manuals e Only trained personnel should install the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system e Always inventory the components delivered to ensure all the correct components are present Never use replacement components Only use original components e H there are any questions regarding the safe operation of the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system or the instructions in the manuals immediately contact your authorized dealer or technical support e Always use the correct tools to install the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system e To prevent injury use caution when installing the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system e Do not use or operate the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system in unsafe weather conditions e Do not use or operate the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system on unsafe terrain e Only an operator who is trained experienced or authorized can use or operate the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the Para
124. Underneath the Configuration Tab press the Add button to add a Tillage Configuration A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a Vehicle and Implement 2 Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field Operation Wizard For more information on Field Operation Configurations see Start Field Operation on page 23 91 ONiddVYWA ALDVAAAOD Note You can also use the Manage Equipment bution to specific vehicles and implements CONFIGURATION SETUP After creating an operating configuration that includes a vehicle and implement you must go to Configuration Setup and enter information for your specific operating configuration Highlight your particular Operating Configuration in the configuration list shown on the Setup screen and press the Setup wrench button Configuration Setup The Configuration Setup screen appears An example Vehicle is shown the appearance of this screen will vary e en ri Massey Ferguson Tillage depending Upon your particular operating implement Tillage Controller None configuration Full Swath 30 000 Sections 1 Attachment Rear Crawbar Speed Input Auxiliary Input Automatic Swath Control Implement i Offsets Depending upon your particular configuration this process may include the following tasks 1 Adjust Implement Switch Settings if using an implement switch For more inf
125. WM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings e PWM Gain Default Value 100 This setting determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making spinner speed adjustments The higher the value the more aggressive the system response Is e Zero Flow Offset Default Value 30 This setting represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero RPM Offset value can cause the conveyor to not properly shut off See PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings e Allowable Error Default Value 2 2 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error SPINNER SPEED PWM VALVE SETTINGS DESCRIPTION e Fan Speed Cal Default Value 4 The Fan Speed Cal number is the number of pulses that are generated by the sensor during one revolution of the spinner dish e PWM Frequency Default Value 100 The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at Typical settings range from 100 125 See PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings e PWM Gain Default Value 20 This setting determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate change adjustments The higher the value the more aggressive the syst
126. a szaa2 Ar Swath 40 ft 0 in 100 Planter Drives r mi A E Note The Rate buttons in the Product Control Toolbox at top right are explained in Product Control Toolbox on page 111 PRODUCT CONTROL TOOLBOX During SeedCommand Run Time operations the Product Tabs are shown in the upper right hand side of the Map screen Press the Product Tabs and an extended view shows the Rate buttons Manual Valve Control button Prescription button Rate increase and decrease LO O O wee lt 1 arrows and the Rate Setup button all of which are described below e A Variety nO The Product Control Toolbox can show rates for multiple varieties eres depending upon your particular planting configuration Press the area of SE the box that shows a particular variety and a green bar highlights that variety The Rate 1 and Rate 2 are then shown on the Rate buttons e B Target Rate Area e C Actual Rate Two items Target Rate and Actual Rate appear on each Product Tab shown in the Product Control Toolbox The Target Rate is the amount of seeds that you wish to plant The Actual Rate is communicated by the shaft rotation sensor Note In some conditions the Actual Rate may increment slower than the Target Rate or its numeric values O may vary before matching the Target Rate 111 TOH HLNOQO ALVY e D Manual Valve Control The Manual Valve Control button allows operators to spec
127. actual moisture is below the set dry moisture percentage and Expand Bushels for All Grains Below Dry is not checked it will show actual bushels If Expand Bushels for All Grains Below Dry is checked it will add water weight back in until it is at the specified dry percentage Note The Wet Bushels and Dry Bushels Status Items do not appear if you are using metric system measurements HARVEST DIAGNOSTIC BUTTON ON MAP SCREEN The Harvest Diagnostic button appears at the bottom right hand portion of the Harvest Map screen Pressing this button summons the Harvest Diagnostic screen for more information see Grain Harvest Diagnostics on page 241 Other data that appears by the Harvest Diagnostic button is described below CA sro 30 ft 0 in 100 e A Swath Width Displays current swath width that is being harvested 2160 bun ER j e B Bushels Per Hour MAIS Displays the bushels harvested per hour bu hr C gt 20 374 md D e C Header Height Displays percentage of header height e D Elevator Speed Shown in Revolutions Per Minute RPM 224 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST LEGEND SELECT During Harvest operations the Map screen displays two types of items in the Legend Yield and Moisture Legend Select The Legend Setup button on the Map Legend Tab of the Mapping Toolbox opens the Legend Select e Yield _ Displays the instantaneous yield while there is grain flow mater and
128. acturer of the valve Typical settings range from 100 125 Hz e PWM Gain Determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate change adjustments The higher the value the more aggressive the system response is 168 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION e Zero Flow Offset Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero Flow Offset value can cause the product control system to not properly control low rates See the PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings e Shaft Speed Cal Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system e Max Conveyor Speed Setting determines the maximum RPM of the conveyor that controls product distribution to the application point This setting is used when controlling a spinner spreader applicator e Fan Speed Cal Number of pulses that are generated by the sensor during one revolution of the blower fan shaft e Max Metering Speed Setting determines the maximum RPM of the metering shaft that controls product distribution to the application point This setting is used when controlling a granular strip till toolbar e Min Speed Setting represents the desired minimum speed of the blower fan An alarm will sound if the blower fan speed falls below this value e Max Speed Setting represents the desired maximum spe
129. adjust the hydraulic flow to the solution pump e Calibrated Reflow Three way boom valves are used to return product back to the tank in the off state The returned flow is calibrated with adjustment at each valve Calibration is required any time the nozzles are changed e Ramsey Valve A pneumatically operated bypass valve When air is supplied to the valve the rate increases when air is released from the valve the rate decreases 160 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION SERVO CONTROL VALVE SETTINGS BY MANUFACTURER Control Valve Valve Response Valve Response Response Configuration 1 2 Threshold Flow Control Valve Raven Accu Flow 20 GPM Single Valve System Fast Close Valve E In line servo Raven Accu Flow 10 GPM Dual Valve System Standard Valve O O Raven Accu Flow 30 GPM Single Valve System Fast Close Valve E In line servo Raven Accu Flow 30 GPM Dual Valve System Standard Valve O O Raven Flow Control Valve In line or Bypass 3 4 Standard Valve Servo Raven Flow Control Valve In line or Bypass 3 4 Fast Servo Raven Flow Control Valve In line or Bypass 1 Standard Servo Raven Flow Control Valve In line or Bypass 1 Fast Servo Raven Flow Control Valve In line or Bypass 1 1 2 Standard Servo Raven Flow Control Valve In line or Bypass 2 Standard Servo Raven Flow Control Valve In line or Bypass 2 Fast
130. after AB line created or loaded cee ceceeceeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeenees 75 Guidance Tab Nudge Men 75 Guidance Tab after SmartPath created or loaded 76 Guidance Tab after A B line created within Gmartbat eee eeeeeee ee 76 New PP NN TT MIP 79 ENE PN PN 79 Select a Previous SmartPath Pass ee eee eee eee 80 Create AB Line Within a SmartPath Haes eee 80 Choose Existing AB Lines Within SmartPath eee 81 SmartPath Guidance Options e eee eee eee 81 SEP NNN 82 FO PAN serberne 82 Vie E gt en SEE EE NE N 84 MP a event oii natia itzi die ae ari i alint at 84 ESD OIL SE ananas d e a ta dt 84 Edit PN 84 Remove Pattern Remove All Patterns rarnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnvnenenevnnn 85 FUGL 85 SW un E enn er eee EEE reece erent Stee eee eee 85 ie TA AG EEE EEE 85 ML 86 Nudge DAO 86 PENNE 86 About Guidance Patterns rrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnevnnnennnennrnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnenennenennenenn 87 PPT aoa RR RR sm ane awa NE NORI RI NI RI RE NI AED PNR NORI E 87 PG es twee ERIE N N RI OPRI ORI ec CE E RONI RR aw INNA IRI IN RNC 87 FANE MN 88 Identical CGunve eee eee eee aaa aaa aaa ea eee 89 Tillage Coverage Mapping Run Time Environment Map Screen eee na 91 About Tillage Configurations c eee eee eee na 91 NN SN 92 Planting Configuration TEN sea ae casierie oaie cra ses cae ticalos a 93 SEP Go 1 21 Le camee oana ete te ea ai ai e ata 93 AutoSwath KO ES Oo EE 9
131. age 51 6 Swath Section Offsets For more information see Swath Section Offsets on page 52 e For information on the Auxiliary Input Settings Switch Mapping feature see Auxiliary Input on page 48 94 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING AUTOSWATH ROW SHUTOFF By configuring your display with Row Shutoff you can start and stop seed flow and control planter sections row by row allowing AutoSwath Control to automatically turn planter row units on and off based on your planting map ROW SHUTOFF CONFIGURATION SETUP To set up a Planting Operating Configuration first press the Setup wrench button and go to the Setup screen 1 Create Planting Configuration Underneath the Configuration Tab press the Add button to add a Planting Configuration A tp wizard will guide you through the process of creating a vehicle 2 Add Implement After you have completed the vehicle configuration the Implement Attachment Wizard appears Press the Add button to add a new implement 3 Select Implement Options Use the drop down menu to select the planter monitor type Check the Planter Section Row Shutoff checkbox to enable Row Shutoff functionality Press the blue right arrow button to continue 4 Enter Number of Rows and Spacing Use the up and down arrows to enter the number of rows and spacing and press the blue right arrow button to continue 5 Enter Number of Implement Section s Use the up and down arrows to ent
132. aged e Time Zone Use the drop down menu to select your time zone e Language Couniry Selection Use the drop down menu to select the language e Operating Units Select either Imperial or Metric e Enable Video Enables input from up to four video cameras OWNER TAB The Owner tab contains functionality for setting up a Display Owner and making any needed edits to the owner personal information The Display Owner information is used in the product application report feature of application rate control An image for the Display Owner can be imported for inclusion on product application reports General Owner Features Advanced N Se Select Owner Address Phone da e PB e Name Address Phone Displayed on Owner Tab e Select Owner Press to display a list of all farm and business contacts set up in the system The on screen dialog that is displayed will give option to select an existing person business or create a new one to be used as the Display Owner e Edit Info Press to edit or add the personal information for the Display Owner e Import Image Press to import the image file that is displayed with the Display Owner information on any application reports that are created The system currently supports bmp and ong file formats Size is limited to a maximum of 200 pixels wide x 100 pixels tall e Clear Image Press to delete the Business Owner image 20 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5
133. air pressure level for the Air Seed Delivery ASD system e The EDGE VAC LEVEL is a measurement of seed meter vacuum This measurement shown in inches of water is displayed for each vacuum fan e The PNEUMATIC DOWN PRESSURE is a measurement of down force the air bag places on the row unit rar FA Rev 9 11 Integra Run Screen Reference Guide Integra Service Manual Entering Seeds Per Revolution 1 Press the dialog box labeled PLANTER DRIVES on the Run Screen 2 Press the CALCULATOR 3 Enter the Seeds Per Revolution for the meter and the disc type you are using a Finger Pickup Meter 12 b Brush Meter Black Soybean Disc 60 c EdgeVac Meter Blue Corn Disc 39 d EdgeVac Meter Soybean 60 or 120 Prime Seed Meters 1 From the Run Screen press the PLANTER DRIVES tab in the lower right corner 2 Make sure the planter is lowered to the ground and hydraulics are on 3 Press SEED METER PRIME The drive will turn one revolution 4 Seed meters are now primed View Auxiliary Sensors 1 From the Run Screen press the VIEW AUXILIARY SENSORS dialog box in the lower left corner It will cycle through the auxiliary sensors EdgeVac Down Pressure Shaft Speed ASD Pressure ASD Scale etc Auto Swath On Off 1 Press the SWATH tab in the lower right corner 2 Turn Auto Swath ON or OFF Setting A B Line for Manual Guidance Light Bar Press the GUIDANCE LINES tab 4th tab down on left side Press NEW PATTERN Select
134. al guidance and automated steering 3 Nudge options for steering The selection box can be minimized by tapping on a tab twice Aa Rev 9 11 H FA Integra Run Screen Reference Guide Service Manual Rate Control Settings Pull Current increment Prescription Minimum Flow Changing Rate 1 Press the RATE box 2 Press the WRENCH icon 3 Press the CALCULATOR for RATE 1 RATE 2 and INCREMENT to enter the desired values Note e The current rate is bold Press the desired rate to make it the current rate e The minimize the rate window press on the hybrid number 19 3 Integra Rev 9 11 Integra Run Screen Reference Guide Service Manual Integra Monitor Tab Hydraulic Drive Shaft Speed Population Monitor Bar Graph Section Indicators Auxiliary m i Weight Area Left Sensor 807 Ib 74 ac Information 807 Ib 74 ac spp 11 KEE Rev 9 11 Integra Run Screen Reference Guide Service Manual Integra 12 Run Screen Auxiliary Sensor Information tap to cycle through h Em a a So Swath A n 0 Im 100 sensors Dedicated Monitor Tab e The SHAFT SPEED displays the speed of the planter drive shafts in RPM e The TANK WEIGHT displays the weight of seed in each tank e The TANK AREA LEFT displays the number of acres hectares that can be planted with the amount of seed remaining in the tanks e The TANK PRESSURE displays the
135. al support team is available seven days a week during peak seasons to answer your questions on the operation of Ag Leader products WE WANT TO HEAR FROM YOU Feel free to call and discuss e Operational questions about the display e Features you would like to see implemented to improve the system or features you would like to see added to the system to increase functionality DISPLAY The display is a full featured year round hub of any precision farming operation A full color HD touchscreen display is easy to read and offers powerful year round precision farming tools Built in manual guidance full screen mapping planter and application control yield monitoring real time data logging and automated steering make up the core functionality of the display safety instructions for proper use of this display Failure to use display properly could result in an impairment of the safety features of this product SERVICE There are no user serviceable parts inside the display Contact the manufacturer for a Return Material Authorization RMA ph 515 232 5363 A WARNING Read manual completely before operating display Understand and follow all operating and TONI SIHL LNOSV fax 515 232 3595 e mail support agleader com CAUTION This display has an internal lithium coin cell battery that is good for the life of the product and A does not need to be replaced There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect
136. ality of the horizontal GPS position Lower HDOP numbers are optimal higher numbers are undesirable e Change Longitude Latitude Format Pressing this button changes the Longitude Latitude format These can either be shown in Degrees Minutes and Seconds or Decimal Degrees 67 dd H e PDOP Position Dilution of Precision PDOP is a unitless measure indicating when the satellite geometry can provide the most accurate results When satellites are soread around the sky the PDOP value is low and the computed position is more accurate When satellites are grouped close together the PDOP is high and the positions are less accurate Lower PDOP numbers are optimal higher numbers are undesirable e GPS Speed mph The speed of the vehicle e GPS Rate The update rate from the GPS receiver shown in Hz e Port The connection between the display and the GPS as established at a message format and baud rate e Frequency The Correction Frequency indicates the GPS satellite frequency used by the receiver Note The Correction Frequency diagnostic does not show for WAAS connections e SNR If your receiver is using Beacon differential corrections the frequency and signal to noise ratio SNR will be displayed Signal to Noise Ratio SNR indicates the strength of the differential correction signal in relation to the amount of background noise that can interfere with signal reception e Correction Age The length of time since the GP
137. ame information that can be added or edited with the on screen keyboard buttons include Farm County Township Range Section Number Area FSA Number FSA Area and Legal Description refers to the U S Farm Service Agency s four digit number assigned to every field FSA Area refers to tillable acres as established by the FSA e Clear Bounds button Press to center the map on the current GPS position Note The Clear Bounds feature is particularly useful if you have flyer points or have logged a point outside the mappable range of your current location Importing and Exporting Field Boundaries Boundaries can be created with the display or imported from desktop GIS software Any boundary files present in the display can also be exported for use in desktop mapping software Note For more information on creating boundaries see Create Boundary on page 35 e USB Import button To import a boundary from the USB drive first go to the Setup Field tab highlight the correct field in the Farm Field list and press the USB Import button 17 NOILVYNSDIANOD The File Selection screen appears as shown Grower Season Field Highlight the desired file to import Boundary Farm Field Jones Farm North Field Press the green check mark button to complete the import process Field Northeast Field Farm Greenpasture Grower ABC FARMS 160 0000007e iby 616 bytes 2 E
138. anne Gees numeric keypad to adjust the Row Spacing e Seed Size Filter a x The Seed Size Filter drop down box should be left at the default setting e Reset Returns settings to factory defaults which allows operator to run Muxbus Sensor Detention again Ground Speed Settings e Magnetic Pickup Check the Magnetic Pickup check box only if the planter is equipped with the Magnetic Pickup Sensor This setting should then be left unchanged For information on calibrating the Magnetic Coil Soeed Sensor see KINZE Magnetic Coil Soeed Sensor Calibration on page 135 Bad Configuration No Magnetic Pickup sensor currently found Note Customers who do not have the magnetic pickup sensor who check this box will see a window stating e Speed Source The Speed Source drop down box selects the type of speed source for the planter monitor Choose between GPS AUX Auxiliary Input Module and PMM Note This speed selection only affects the PMM The ground speed source must still be selected Other Sensors Other check boxes on the Planter Configuration window include e Down Pressure Check this box if the planter has pneumatic down pressure e Oil Sensor Leave this box unchecked 131 IZNIY e SDS Sensors Check this box if the planter has a mechanical Seed Distribution System SDS installed e Air Compressor Check this box if the planter has an air compressor installed e Tank Weight Check th
139. any external keypad or mouse devices Here are a few key things to remember if you are new to using a touch screen device e Do not use any sharp objects for running the touch screen device this could result in damage to the display Using the tip of a finger is the recommended method of operating the display touch screen e Do not use any harsh chemicals to clean the touch screen Using a damp soft cloth or an anti static wipe made specifically for cleaning computer displays is the correct way to clean the screen and the enclosure e The touch screen requires only a gentle touch of about half second in duration to operate correctly A common mistake new users make is to try to navigate too quickly through the system using firm taps instead of gentle presses on the display screen CAN BUS TECHNOLOGY This system uses Controller Area Network CAN technology CAN systems are comprised of individual modules each with their own high speed processor connected through a high speed communications cable CAN has many benefits including greater ability to configure and expand the system compatibility simpler installations with less wiring and increased system dependability TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Do not exceed the specifications below e Storage Temperature 20 C to 80 e Operating Temperature 10 C to 70 C e Operating Input Voltage 9 16 V DC e Max Current Rating 4 0 amp e Environmental Protection Rating IP65 e No Protective
140. appears advising to disable the blower fan circuit and prepare to catch any product dispensed in an appropriate container Press the blue right arrow button to continue 2 Select Metering Circuit to Calibrate The CFR Calibration Wizard appears Use the drop down menu to choose the desired channel to calibrate and press the blue right arrow button to continue 3 Enter Dispense Amount Use the numeric keypad to enter the amount of product to be dispensed into the container and press the blue right arrow button to continue 4 Enter Simulated Target Rate Use the numeric keypad to enter a simulated target rate shown in pounds per acres Press the blue right arrow button to continue 218 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION CFR Calibration Wizard Step 4 of 6 5 Start Target Rate Countdown SS H Press the green Start button to begin the target rate countdown As the countdown is started the button will am turn red and state Stop When the countdown is complete press the blue right arrow button to continue 6 Enter Actual Dispense Amount Enter the actual dispense amount in pounds Note The CFR will be calculated from the actual product amount dispensed 7 Calibration Complete A message appears stating that your calibration is complete and showing the CFR amount in cubic feet per revolution Either Press Cancel red X to exit the calibration without saving the value Press Repeat Calibration to begin the pro
141. armer intended to apply if they were not using sensors This value will be user defined in lbs of N ac kg of N ha 184 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION e Application Trend Variable that tells the system whether to Increase for High Biomass Application Trend is 1 or Decrease for High Biomass Application Trend is 1 Sensor Setup Sensor Setup Sensor Setup screen appears as shown Each ensor Status ce 53 Ti em Enable sensor is shown with the status of ON or OFP ON Disable ON ON ON WA WA MIA dv ca rel Eh LA LA hd Fa WA gt E e Enable Turns on the individual OptRx sensor e Disable Turns off the individual OptRx sensor LOAD CONFIGURATION Starting at the Home page press CZ Start Field Operation Start Field Operation Select a Season Grower Farm and Field at the Start Field Operation portion of the Home screen For more information see Start Field Operation on page 23 Once a configuration has been completed the Map View button appears at the bottom of the B Home screen RUN CONFIGURATION EJ Press the Map View button to see the Map screen CREATE AN OPTRX V I REFERENCE VALUE Determining where to scan a Reference Strip In order for the OptRx Crop Sensor Module to recommend an N rate you must scan a portion of the field to create a V I Reference Value e Corn Scan the most vigorous portion of your field
142. ashing on the module This does not mean there is power at module ene Drive does not turn on when planting Make sure master switch is on e Make sure the corresponding switch on the switch box is turned on e Can be checked under the Wrench tab highlight the configuration press the Wrench icon and then the Auxiliary Input tab e Make sure it primes See troubleshooting above e Ensure Hydraulics are engaged Place remote in both directions e Make sure Meter Calibration number is correct e Found on the Run Screen in the lower right hand corner Press the Drive tab and enter in your seeds per revolution 12 for mechanical corn 39 Standard EV corn 24 low rate EV corn 60 for mechanical and EV Soybeans e Do not need to perform meter calibration in order to get the seeds per revolution Simply put in the number of cells or fingers for your meter See above V 16 MIZE Rev 9 11 Integra Troubleshooting Guide Integra service Manual Hydraulic Drive cont d e Make sure there is a rate selected on the Run Screen e Found in the upper right hand corner by tapping on the hybrid number You can then enter in rates for number 1 and 2 by pressing on the wrench icon and entering in the information e Check Implement switch adjustment e When in planting position the implement switch arm should not touch anything and be in the neutral position When planter is in the raised field position the arm should engage the lower parallel arm and move
143. ast Farm 0000db91 iby 616 bytes 8 East Field 0000db96 iby Home iby K Northeast Field 0000db8f iby e USB Export button To export a boundary to the USB drive highlight the correct field in the Farm Field list and press the USB Export button At the File Selection screen highlight the desired field to export screen will appear telling you that the boundary was exported successfully Press the green check mark button to return to the field setup screen OPERATOR e Add button Press to add an Operator e Delete button BS Press to delete an Operator e Setup Tool button Press to edit Operator information by highlighting that name and pressing button At the Personal Information screen you can use the on screen keyboard buttons to add or edit information for that Operator including Name Business Phone Fax Address Applicator License Home Phone Mobile Phone and Email 18 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP DISPLAY SETTINGS 3 gt Es Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Display button The Display screen contains the following tabs e General tab displays settings related to Time Date display screen settings operating units video and display owner information e Owner tab contains functionality for setting up a Display Owner and making any needed edits to the owner personal information e Features tab lists unlocks for a particular display e Advanced tab includes i
144. at the conclusion of field operations you may view Report Details by going to the Home screen and pressing the Report Details button as shown at left When the Report Details screen appears you may edit any of the report items by selecting that item and pressing the Edit button GENERAL The General tab is where you can enter Report Details information such as the following General e Crop information Attribute Current Region s Application timing Soil Temperature 65 F e Weather information Soil Condition Medium e Soil condition Crop Residue Level Tillage Type Conventional Air Temperature 75 F 37 SLHOdauH Note A common use for this functionality is to enter multiple instances of weather data when a product application is completed over the course of multiple days Note If desired you can prompt the Report Details screen to display each time a new product application is O started in a field and each time a new region is created For more information see Options on page 38 CONFIGURATION SS An Equipment Configuration Tab will be port Details present for each control channel being General JP 8330 Toolbar DirectLiquid used in Planting Application or Tillage Attribute functions All common information is Sula populated at the same time when Nozze parenumber 1 Revert multiple control channels are in use Boom Pressure Multiple instances of data can be enter
145. ate N based on data received from the sensors This variable rate appears in the Product Control Toolbox A as shown at left 82 3 Ib min 682 0 Ib Swath 50 fr 0 In 100 Reference Strip 187 XH LdO Reference Strip Select Dialog 7 OPTIONAL View Reference Strip Current File Name 2010 04 20 1516 rfs If desired you may review this reference strip by pressing was To aaen the View All button located on the bottom right hand side 2010 04 19 1009 45 Mon Apr 19 10 09 28 2010 of the Map screen s Equipment Tab The file name of the oaia ni i oana a idea new reference strip appears in the Reference Strip Selection screen Field Mame Sensor Ax Crop Growth Stage Strip Name Crop Variety VI Reference Value Note To delete a reference strip highlight the file name and press Delete CROP SENSOR SETTINGS Note All units represent pounds kilograms of nitrogen Crop Sensor Settings The Crop Sensor Settings screen A is where you can adjust application rate settings specified by the OptRx Crop Sensor module The VI Zero and VI Minimum settings are used as a buffer to prevent applying the wrong amount of N or applying it in areas where doing so would be ineffective VI Zero VI Minimum Reference Strip East Field VI Reference 0 500 Algorithm Settings To access the Settings screen press the OptRx Crop Sensor button located in the box containing the Map screen s VI Ba
146. ate opening CAUTION New products will have a default CFR number the first time they are used You must either A manually enter or perform a CFR calibration routine for each product once that product is created otherwise misapplication will occur Conveyor Rate Look Up A pop up screen will display a warning when a product is assigned to a container or bin for the first time and has not Ni been calibrated The warning prompts the user to review A Product Equipment combination has not been calibrated Review Product Density product density and conveyor rate settings Warning and Conveyor Rate settings Product MAP Equipment Channel 1 200 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION am Conveyor rates for previously applied products can be found by first pressing the Spreader Control button which opens the Spreader Control screen 73 Th 755 APM The Spreader Control screen has a tab for each control channel product being applied Select the desired channel and press the Conveyor Rate button Spreader Control Spread Width ont Channel 1 Channel Channel 3 son i MAP Spinner Speed Product Feed Gate 1 Conveyor 1 600 rpm E Density Opening Rate Chain Oller pm NEW LEADER Calibration Fan Frame Calibration EE The Conveyor Rate button opens a setup screen where the Conveyor 1 Rate conveyor rate can be inputted and a table of previously applied products and conveyor ra
147. ation ADDING A NEW CALIBRATION If you notice a decreased yield accuracy you may need to perform a new calibration To do this use the following procedure i 1 Go to Grain Calibration screen Go to the Home screen and press the Setup wrench button When the Setup screen opens highlight your operating configuration and press the Setup wrench button which opens the Configuration Setup screen At the Configuration Setup screen press the Grain Calibration button The Grain Calibration screen appears as shown Sa ge 2 Select Crop to Calibrate Use the drop down menu to select the crop to calibrate Grain Weight Calibration 3 Press Show Cal Numbers eld Name on Name mated al ror ster r ae eae APOI es Seege weg Press the Show Cal Numbers button and the Weight North 30 4402 4378 05 Show Calibration Numbers screen appears as shown North 30 3693 3720 0 7 s s s a North 30 3229 3211 0 6 al gt iz aia 4 gt Moisture Temperature vibration Area Weight Calibration Numbers Perform Calibration On the left hand side of the Weight Calibration Numbers BESSE ar 7 screen is a list of grain calibration values that range from 38 H C1 through C11 These 11 C numbers determine the 500 weight that the display calculates from the data that it i records into your regions as you harvest These numbers have been pre set and you should not change them unless instructed to by Tec
148. ation for John Deere Pro Shaft Drives Seed Rate Motor Drive 18 Tooth Sprocket PN Planter Drive Shaft Planter Drive Shaft ASA Sprocket Drive Sprocket Driven i 19 Tooth Sprocket 28 Tooth Sprocket H d Planter Drive i A Shaft Sprocket P Sr O HIT me Driven GREU gp A E HR 29 Tooth a 3 tote ER 29 28 812 18 19 342 Driven Drive 1 X Driven Drive 2 Gear Ratio ee dg Seed Meter Shaft procke X Gear Ratio Seed Rate Motor Planter Drive Shaft Driven Drive 1 X Driven Drive 2 Carry the Decimal place to the nearest 0 001 for accurate results Seed Ratio Calculation Example Procedure for Pro Shaft Drives The example outlined below assumes that you have a single planter drive motor Step 5 notes that this process has multiple steps if you have more than one Stepper Seed Motor Drives 1 Beginning with the Seed Rate Motor count the number of teeth on the drive sprocket Then count the number of teeth on the driven sprocket 2 Divide the number of teeth on the driven sprocket by the number of teeth on the drive sprocket This is the ratio of the Seed Rate motor 3 Repeat the process for each sprocket combination in the drive system back to the meter On the Pro Shaft Drive the number of teeth on the driven sprocket is always 28 and the number of teeth on the drive sprocket is always 19 4 Take the ratio of the Seed Rate Motor and multiply it by the ratio of the other sprocket combinations
149. ave completed the vehicle configuration the Implement Attachment Wizard appears Using the drop down box select the implement you would like to use in this configuration If there are no implements in the list press the Add button Use the wizard to add a new implement and select the implement attachment method 3 Select Operation Type Select the Rate Logging Control operation type Press the blue right arrow button to continue 4 Select Controller Press the Add button and use the Controller Setup Wizard to create a controller 5 Select Device and Seed Command Type After pressing the Add button the Controller Setup Wizard appears Use the drop down menus to select SeedCommand as your device Use the bottom drop down menu to select Hydraulic Seed Control as the SeedCommand Type Press the blue right arrow button to continue 99 TOH HLNOQO 3LV 4 6 Enter number of drives Use the up and down arrows to enter in the number of hydraulic drives on your planter Press the blue right arrow button to continue 7 Enter suggested controller name A suggested controller name appears If necessary use the on screen keyboard to edit the name of the controller 8 Complete the Operating Configuration The wizard walks you through the final steps of the configuration in which you can add additional equipment select a ground speed source and edit the suggested name for the configuration CONTROLLER SETTINGS FOR HYDRAULIC SEED RATE MOTOR
150. being used the differential status will display the differential source i e WAAS Beacon or OmniSTAR This message field will display either Diff On or Diff Off Diff On Indicates the receiver is receiving a differential GPS signal Diff Off Indicates the receiver is not receiving a differential GPS signal Satellite View Plot Messages Otherwise if RTK or NTRIP is being used the differential status will display one of the following status messages RTK Fixed The ParaDyme roof module is receiving a Valid RTK differential source RTK Float The ParaDyme roof module is receiving information from the Base Station but the signal is not strong enough for an RTK fix e Differential Status Displays for RTK or NTRIP users Messages shown are either Ready for Steering or Not Ready for Steering e View Messages To view the NMEA or TSIP messages coming from the receiver press the View Messages button e UTC Time UTC is an acronym for Coordinated Universal Time a high precision atomic time standard that defines local time throughout the world Different versions of universal time use atomic clocks to correct for irregularities in the Earth s rotation and orbit UTC is used in navigation astronomy aviation Internet broadcasts and amateur radio If you are receiving information from the satellite then the UTC Time should automatically update e HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision HDOP indicates the qu
151. ber OmniSTAR User ID This box shows the serial number of your receiver It may also display your OmniSTAR User ID Note You will need to know this number when contacting OmniSTAR in order to set up the receiver e Differential Source The choices include VBS HP XP and HP XP with VBS backup These three options are described below VBS OmniSTAR VBS Virtual Base Station is a sub meter level of service HP XP The OmniSTAR XP service is more accurate than VBS but slightly less accurate than HP It provides short term accuracy of a few inches and long term repeatability of better than 20 centimeters The OmniSTAR HP High Performance service is the most accurate of the three options e Fast Restart Checking this box before the vehicle is shut down allows the receiver to utilize shutdown time to acquire the appropriate satellites in order to ensure a quick and efficient startup This reduces the time taken for satellite convergence after startup and thus increases accuracy in the field e GGA GLONASS Checking this box allows the additional GLONASS satellites to be displayed in the GGA message Note To get the most benefit from Fast Restart you should shut down the vehicle in a place where the receiver has a clear view of the sky Do not move the vehicle before powering up again e AutoTune Frequency check box Receiver will automatically select the strongest frequency 64 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 e Frequency
152. c keypad to edit the distance if needed This value must match the actual distance of the course driven for calibration Press the blue right arrow button to continue 3 Start Driving Course Follow the on screen directions and press Start to begin the calibration process 4 Course Completed Drive vehicle over the measured course and press Stop Press the blue right arrow button to continue to final step 5 Calibration Complete Press the green check mark button to complete calibration and store the calculated value Note Calibration settings can be manually adjusted if desired by pressing Enter CAL Number and making O small changes to the setting AUXILIARY INPUT CF B gt Configuration gt gt gt Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt Auxiliary Input button pillar input This Switch Mapping function is active only for users with DirectCommand or SeedCommand features The Auxiliary Input Settings screen displays settings for F1 Master F2 Switch 1 1 F3 Switch 2 2 Master Source DirectLiquid Assign SESCH the Master Switch and other switches on FS Switch 4 a DirectCommand or SeedCommand F6 Switch 5 i Switch Box F7 Switch 6 F8 Switch 7 D Fo Switch8 Auxiliary Input Settings can be adjusted F10 Switch 9 by going to th
153. can switch between the AB line and SmartPath patterns a by pressing the AB SmartPath toggle 173 E d re After the Guidance System has switched Guidance over to a different path the name of the currently followed pattern is shown within a black box on the Map screen as shown A a Choose Existing AB Lines Within SmartPath You can create up to three different AB lines within SmartPath Select the desired AB Line by pressing the AB button The AB Manager screen appears which shows all AB lines created within a particular field AB Manager An example is shown AB SmartPath 3 Di AB SmartPath A AB SmartPath 5 e Highlight the desired AB line then press the Back button to close the screen e Press the Add button to add an AB line e Press the Load button to load an AB line e Press the Edit button to edit the name of an AB line e Press the Delete button to delete an AB line SmartPath Guidance Options SmartPath only creates a SmartPath pass when you are logging data in the field Q However you have the option of using it to create SmartPath passes continually during all field operations 81 JONVAINY SES To adjust this setting press the Guidance Options button on the Guidance Tab The Guidance Options Path Generation Heading screen appears Press the Smart Tab Threshold All Area Covered a e The default setting is Logged Area This setting only 20 degrees D creates passes while
154. cess again Press the green check mark button to save the value and exit the calibration routine In Field Calibration Procedure Strip Till The In Field CFR Calibration procedure performs an automated routine to adjust the calibration number for the selected metering circuit This calibration is performed if there is a difference between the amount of product logged as compared to what was actually applied To do an In Field Calibration procedure press the In Field Calibration button on the Strip Till Control screen and the In Field CFR Calibration Wizard appears 1 Select Metering Circuit to Calibrate Use the drop down menu to select the channel to calibrate and press the blue right arrow button to continue 2 Enter Actual Weight The Accumulated Weight is shown in the top portion of the screen Use the numeric keypad to enter the Actual Weight and press the blue right arrow button to continue 3 Calibration Complete A message appears stating that your calibration is complete and showing the CFR amount in cubic feet per revolution Press the green check mark button to finish the calibration 219 THL di ilS Strip Till Control Auxiliary Tab Strip Till Control e Fan Speed Cal Channel1 Channel2 Channel3 Auxiliary Number of pulses that are generated by the sensor e during one revolution of the blower fan shaft Fan Speed Cal Min Speed O rpm a e Min Speed ES Setting represents the desired minimum speed of the Max Sp
155. cted to the CAN Bus Select a device to display its particular firmware and hardware information CAN device list shown for typical DirectCommand Liquid configuration Note Check the CAN device list to ensure that all hardware modules appear there E DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS Press Display on the CAN Device list then press the Diagnostics button on the Devices screen to open the Display Display Diagnostics RAM 43 3 423 8 MB DF 10 Diagnostics screen This screen as Himle Seah shown at left includes information about Cached 53 3 MB the system memory usage and available Internal Storage memory 72 10 Note For information on Auxiliary Input Settings Diagnostics see Auxiliary Input on page 48 45 So0IAaG 46 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP SETTINGS SPEED INPUT SETTINGS BP gt gt gt gt BE Li Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt Speed Input button The Speed Input Settings screen is where you can calibrate the ground speed input for accurate speed and area calculations Speed Input Settings In most cases GPS is the primary speed source with Radar serving as backup If you will be using GPS as the primary you will need to select a Backup source Choices for Primary include e GPS e Wheels e Radar Choic
156. d button to enter a suggested name for your configuration Press the green check mark button when complete Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field Operation Wizard For more information on Field Operation Configurations see Start Field Operation on page 23 210 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION SETUP CONFIGURATION Starting at the Home page press gt ai gt Configuration gt your configuration gt gt nr Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt Controller Settings button Controller Settings screen appears with each channel s settings shown on its own tab The settings shown at this screen vary depending upon whether your Configuration uses a PWM Control Valve a Servo Control Valve or a Linear Actuator configuration Use the Control Valve Configuration drop down menu to choose the appropriate configuration for your machine Control valve configuration settings are described in the following section The Auxiliary Tab is where you adjust fan speed settings these are described at Strip Till Control Auxiliary Tab on page 220 Strip Till Control Servo Control Valve Strip Till Control Valve Response 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Auxiliary Determines the speed of the servo valve when product Control Valve Configuration
157. d drive the vehicle for the HOTE The display must read zero before you start driving ECH p red ete rm ned d stance Note The display must be set on 0 0 before you begin driving the calibration distance Magnetic Coil Speed Sensor Calibration Step 3 of 3 3 Stop at end of calibration distance The Speed Sensor Calibration number has EE actual distance To werify the calibration When the vehicle CIOSSES the end marker of the eegenen predetermined distance press the red colored Stop button Press the blue right arrow button to continue to To enter known calibration number press ENTER CAL NUMBER fi n al step 4 Calibration complete The speed sensor calibration number has been calculated from the actual distance driven Press FINISH to complete calibration and store the calculated value Sensor Calibration Number 720 pulses 100 ft Notes e Calibration settings can be manually adjusted if desired by pressing Enter CAL Number and making small changes to the setting e To verify the calibration repeat the previous steps KINZE EdgeVac Calibration SCC Customers who have purchased the EdgeVac seed Enter vacuum measured at row unit Measurements should be taken with fans on and seed meter charged Meters Should perform an EdgeVac Calibration once a year to make sure that it is correct To do this press the Planter on the KINZE Planter Monitor Setup screen When the Planter Configuration screen a
158. d press the Setup wrench button When the Controller Configuration 104 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING screen opens press the Controller Settings button The Controller Settings screen appears as shown Each channel is displayed with its own tab and the Auxiliary Tab is where you adjust the Minimum Allowable Ground Speed Channel Tabs Controller Settings Channel 1 Channel 2 Auxiliary Max Meter Speed Auxiliary Tab Controller Settings Channel 1 Channel Auxiliary Minimum Allowable Ground Speed e Max Meter Speed This number represents the maximum recommended RPM of the seed meter and Is specified by the manufacturer warning informs you if this threshold is exceeded e Gear Ratio The ratio of the revolutions of the hydraulic drive to turn the seed meter one revolution e Minimum Allowable Ground Speed The display will simulate this specified ground speed when you press the Jump Start switch This fixed ground speed setting compensates for delays in acquiring an initial ground speed when starting from a standstill 105 IOYHLNOD ALVYU GEAR RATIO CALCULATIONS FOR SEED RATE MOTORS The Gear Ratio is a setting that appears on the Controller Tab to users of the Stepper Seed Meter Motor Drive It is the ratio of the revolutions of the hydraulic drive as compared to one revolution of the seed meter This setting is used to determine how fast the Stepper Seed Rate Motor should operate t
159. d the sensor configuration If you have not changed your configuration it will not repeat the muxbus detection process 2 Disconnect planter sensors from planter harness Make certain all planter sensors are disconnected from the planter harness 3 Accept the Muxbus Detection A screen appears informing you that your configuration has changed and that it will require a muxbus detection Once all sensors are br A This will require a muxbus detection Continue disconnected press the green check mark button on the Configuration Changed screen The Muxbus Detection Process then begins Configuration changed Plug in each physical sensor plug into the muxbus EE wiring harness on the planter from left to right and ee lt a press Accept for each one Follow the on screen 2 Front Row Seed Sensors from left to right 3 Section Transmission sensors fram left to right 4 Ground Speed Pickup Sensor instructions as shown 5 Auxiliary Sensors in the following order 505 Sensors b EdgeVac Sensors Pruematic Down Pressure 133 IZNI Order of Muxbus Sensor Installation Install the muxbus sensors in the following order A Rear Row Seed sensors from left to right f e Front Row Seed sensors from left to right KA ae Rand As shown above from A to B t a m E qi Ps e Se e e Section Transmission sensors from left to right e Ground Speed Pickup Sensor HI E KSE Fa Le FE Sa Auxiliary Sensor
160. dge the Automatic Steering Liability Notice each time the system is powered ON e f there are any questions regarding the safe operation of the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system or the operating instructions contact your authorized dealer or technical support e The operator must keep alert for obstacles in the path of the vehicle The OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system cannot identify or avoid obstacles e The operator must remain in the operator s chair in the vehicle while the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system Is engaged e Only use the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system in an open field The systems must be powered OFF when the vehicle is on any type of roadway Liability Notice Novariant B V cannot be held responsible or liable in any way for any damages and or accidents that occur through the malfunction of the machine on which it is installed malfunction of the machine components machine attributes e g trailers third party interference s or acts of the operator outside the intended use such as prescribed by Novariant B V COPYRIGHT NOTICE Ag Leader Technology has copyrighted 2010 the contents of this Reference Guide and the operating program for the INTEGRA system No reproductions may be made without first obtaining the consent of Ag Leader Technology 16 AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A N
161. e press the Copy Data button This stores the log files using the ilf file format A CAUTION When you press Copy Data all logged information is removed from the display s internal memory UPGRADE FIRMWARE Pressing the Upgrade Firmware button allows you to upgrade the display firmware from the fw2 file stored on the USB drive At the File Selection screen scroll through the list of files on the USB drive until you find the fw2 firmware file Highlight the fw2 file and the box at the upper right hand side of the File Selection screen shows the version of this file Press the green check mark button to continue and the Upgrade screen informs you that the upgrade is beginning At the Upgrade Ready screen press the green check mark button A CAUTION Do not disconnect display power when the upgrade is taking place IMPORT FILES To import files to the display s internal memory press the Import Files button The File Selection screen opens Use the scroll bar to find the file you wish to import File formats that you can import include Boundary Files iby Management Setup msf files and pattern pat files EXPORT FILES To export files to the USB drive press the Export Files button 1 Select Files to export The Select File Type screen opens Select the type of file that you wish to export either Boundary Files or Pattern files 2 Select Field Use the drop down menus to select a Grower Farm and Field Or press the
162. e you must adjust Seed Monitor Settings including entering in the number of rows choosing a speed source and performing an AutoConfig procedure First go to the Home screen and press the 118 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING Setup wrench button At the Configuration Setup screen press the Seed Monitor Setup button The Seed Monitor Setup screen appears as shown Seed Monitor Setup lit Ro i d eee Split Rows Sedan Rows Speed Source eens e The Split Rows and Standard Rows settings show the number of rows found on the planter that the Seed Tube Monitor Module supports Use the up and down arrows to enter the total number of rows found on the planter e The Speed Source shows the selected Ground Speed Source input for the Seed Tube Monitor Module Press the Sensor to summon the Sensor Configuration window which shows which rows are assigned to the individual pins on the Seed Tube Monitor Module Module configuration to become active Fore more information see AutoConfig Procedure on page 119 e Press the Alarms button to summon the Seed Monitor Alarms screen which shows each row and the alarm threshold for that row For more information see Seed Monitor Alarms on page 122 AutoConfig Procedure The AutoConfig procedure assigns individual rows to the appropriate pins on the Seed Tube Monitor Module To perform an AutoConfig procedure first go to the Home screen and press the Setup wrenc
163. e Auxiliary Input Summary F11 Switch 10 A i Ser screen Go to the Configuration Setup External2 screen and press the Auxiliary Input External 3 i TE External 4 button The Auxiliary Input Summary da screen appears as shown This screen lists each switch on a switch box and which functions if any are assigned to particular switches 48 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP The Assign button located at the upper right hand corner of this screen opens the Auxiliary Input Assignment screen where you can assign functions to switches and external inputs For more information see Auxiliary Inout Settings on page 49 The Master Switch Source drop down menu controls the master switch for your entire configuration You may see the following options underneath this menu e Switch Controls the master switch External 2 This setting can control an optional floor mounted master switch e External 1 3 amp 4 Not used at this time The F1 F11 switches can be assigned to any implement sections You can use these to choose the switches that control a particular section or controller planting clutch You can also make the following changes to the switch settings e Add a switch setting For more information see Auxiliary Input Settings on page 49 e Reset All This button resets the settings to defaults AUXILIARY INPUT SETTINGS Pressing the Assign button on the Auxiliary Inout Summary screen Master
164. e following must be considered when choosing a mounting location NOILV TIVLSNI e The display must be readily accessible to the machine operator e The display must not obstruct the machine operator s normal driving view e The display must not interfere with or limit access to any of the existing machine controls e The CAN system cabling be routed and secured without interfering with existing machine controls damage is not done to existing vehicle wiring mechanical or cab structure Refer to vehicle manufacturer documentation for specific details on your equipment Follow all OEM instructions cautions and warnings when working around equipment A WARNING If drilling holes is required during the mounting process care must be taken to insure that e A RAM Base PN 4000280 e B RAM Arm 5 PN 4000279 e C 2 X6 Base PN 400187 8 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 GENERAL FUSE INSTALLATION AND REPLACEMENT Fuse Type Blade Style ATO ATC Rating Fuse Holder orange wire 5A 250 VAC Fuse Holder pink wire 15A 250 VAC display only A CAUTION The fuse is to be placed in the fuse holder in line with the battery power cable and used with SCREEN ICON CONVENTIONS The following control buttons are made available for entering names and calibration values into the system NOILV TIVLSNI An on screen Keyboard is made available when appropriate for use during all setup processes Press the ke
165. e shaft cubic foot per revolution or ft 3 rev This number is shown with the assumption that the conveyor shaft has a 1 inch gate opening CAUTION You must set the Conveyor 1 Rate for each product after it has been created This value can A either be manually entered or determined by the static or in field calibration e Static Calibration Press the Static Calibration button to perform an automated routine to calibrate each metering circuit This calibration is performed before applying in field conditions For more information see Static CFR Calibration Procedure on page 218 e In Field Calibration Press the In Field Calibration button to perform an automated routine to adjust the calibration number for the selected metering circuit This calibration is performed if there is a difference between the amount of product logged as compared to what was actually applied For more information see In Field Calibration Procedure Strip Till on page 219 Static CFR Calibration Procedure The Static CFR Calibration Procedure performs an automated routine to calibrate each W J metering circuit This calibration is performed before applying in field conditions To perform the Static CFR Calibration press the Strip Till Control button as shown at left to open the Strip Till Control screen At the Strip Till Control screen press the Static Calibration button 47 4936 RPM 1 Read Static Calibration warning A warning
166. e view monitored by the KINZE Planter Monitor Module seed Sensors o including the following o e Row unit seeds per second e Row unit seeds per acre li 26136 26136 li 26136 11 26136 Sal an LA d LEI Hut hat W 11 26136 Note This can also be accessed on the CAN device list under Diagnostics 137 IZNI KINZE DISPLAY ITEMS ON EQUIPMENT TAB r e The left hand side of the Map screen s Equipment Tab includes a number of display items that will vary depending upon your particular KINZE Planter Monitor Module configuration Press the Shaft Speed button A to cycle through these display items e Shaft Speed The speed of the planter drive shafts in RPM e Tank Weight The weight of seed in each tank te 26 39 Tank Area Left The number of acres hectares that can be planted with the amount of seed remaining in the tanks Swath 4008 0 in 100 e Tank Pressure The air pressure level for the Air Seed Delivery ASD system e EdgeVac Level Measure of seed meter vacuum This measurement shown in inches of water is displayed for each vacuum fan e Pneumatic Down Pressure Measure of down force the air bag places on the row unit A OI Ge Shown is an example of a KINZE Planter Te Monitor Module PMM with Row Shutoff 4 and three Hydraulic Seed Control drives z A Mapping toolbox e B Product Control toolbox R TS gt e C Meter RPM b
167. ead and understand all safety instructions so they can react in case of an emergency e The authorized dealer must always carry out maintenance or repairs on the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system e During repair or replacement of components on the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system only original components must be used e Operator or maintenance personnel must always wear the correct personal protection equipment when working on the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system e Maintenance personnel must always use the recommended cleaning materials and accessories when the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system is Cleaned e Unsafe conditions or situations with the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system must be reported to your authorized dealer or technical support e Objects cannot be placed on or in the area of the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system e During installation calibration and tuning of the OnTrac2 GPS Assisted Steering System and or the ParaDyme system the vehicle wheels may turn to the left and right Be Sure all people and obstacles are clear of the wheels before proceeding e Put the vehicle seat and steering wheel in the normal operating position and verify that the OnTrac2 Mechanical Drive Unit MDU does not interfere with any controls e The operator must read and acknowle
168. eader Control PWM Control Valve eee 196 Spreader Control Servo Control Valve rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnennn 196 Spreader Control Spinner Tab 197 Fertilizer Blend Setup c eee eee eee 197 Oa COMM CUIG AMON NE 198 Run COMMU Log tea ra ii a aj oi rata at ia 198 Spinner Spreader with two bin configuration eee 199 RUN LENEA Dea 0 senat ma cateii mo tot aa dial d diana at al date ate i 199 Spreader Control screen 200 CONVEY OF Rate Look E 200 Fan Frame amp Feed Gate Actuator Settings eee 201 Spreader Control Routine Operations eee eee 201 Spreader Control Chain Ouer 202 Spreader Control Static Calibration eee eee 202 spreader Control In Field Calibration eee 204 Spinner Spreader Servo Settings Uescrpton eee eee 204 Spinner Spreader PWM Control Valve Settings Description 205 Spinner Speed PWM Valve Settings Uescrpton eee eee 205 Troubleshooting DirectCommand Granular Applications c cccceeeeeeeeees 206 Troubleshooting Serial Control Applications c eee 207 Fertilizer Default Product Settings eee eee eee na 208 Strip Till Create COLI Eege 209 XI SLNGLNOD 40 a1av SETUP SM 211 Strip Till Control Servo Control Valve eee eee 211 Strip Till Control PWM Control Valve rrrrrannnnnnnnnonnnnnnrnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 212 Linear Actuator Clutch SettingS c ccccccceecescsecececeeeescceeeesseeeensceeeeess 212 PT NL 213 Fe PT S
169. ear Actuator Product Control CREATE CONFIGURATION Starting at the Home page press gt gt Sem gt gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt Add button gt Application button Application A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle implement and controllers 1 Select Equipment Configuration Type Select either Single Product Application or Multiple Product Application Press the blue right arrow button to continue 2 Select Vehicle Use the drop down menu to choose a vehicle or press the Add button to enter a new vehicle Press the blue right arrow button to continue 3 Add Equipment for Multiple Product Configuration The Add Additional Application Equipment screen appears From here you may add additional equipment or controllers to your configuration Add equipment by pressing the Add button Note If you choose to add additional equipment add them in the same order as the implements are attached 4 Select Implement Select an Implement from the drop down list menu or press the Add button to create a new implement Press the blue right arrow button to continue 5 Select Implement Attachment Method Use the drop down list to select an implement attachment method Press the blue right arrow button to continue 6 Enter Full Swath Width Use the numeric keypad to enter the full swath width of the implement Pre
170. ears as shown and on the following page C e A GPS Status 4 0mm DE B Total Field Area Tee e C Ground Speed 144 2 buac A e D Diagnostics button Moisture SN e E Map Legend varieties H ae H e F Legend Select 275156 Dry Bushels G Crop 4914 e H Status Items e I Home button n e J Map View button amo P K Swath Width IS e L AutoSwath 20 474 pm d Full Swath 4 H e M Logging Status button e N Header Height e O Swath Width e P Bushels Per Hour e Q Elevator Speed Note Pressing the Map View button will cycle between the available Map screen views and the appearance O of the Map View button changes 223 DNIHOLINON AUTAIA HARVEST STATUS ITEMS e Yield Displays the instantaneous yield while there is grain flow and the average yield when 145 6 bwac grain flow is not present Moisture Yield e Moisture EE 16 5 Displays the instantaneous moisture when there is grain flow and the average when Area there is no grain flow 12 28 ac __ Area Wet Weight Shows the area harvested for the current region 274089 POI Wet Weight Wet Bushels Shows the actual weight that has been harvested for the region O 4894 e Wet Bushels Shows the actual bushels that have been harvested for the current region e Dry Bushels Displays the actual number of bushels at the specified dry moisture percentage If the
171. ect screen you can use the a drop down menu at the top to select your product e Press Coverage to show the area that you have already planted e Press Varieties to show a Variety Map of the field which shows where specific varieties are planted The colors shown on the Variety Map can be edited For more information see Legend Setup below lf you are using a SeedCommand rate control configuration press Rate to show the Rate Legend in the Mapping Toolbox The rate map displays the actual rate being applied This legend is editable For more information see Legend Settings on page 32 e Press Clear Map to permanently remove all logged data from the active field operation e Press Load Reference to load a list of maps of previous operations performed in that field 123 Additionally you can choose from the following items DNIHOLINON Legend Setup fauend lt atup To change the colors of the varieties that appear on the Run screen map press the Varieties button on the Legend Select screen and the Legend Setup screen appears as shown A list of the varieties shown on the Run screen map appears on the left hand side of the Legend Setup screen To change the color of one of these varieties highlight that variety and then press a color on the color palette at right Press the green check mark button when finished ADVANCED SEED MONITORING DI Advanced Seed Monitoring button Press button
172. ections on to allow the Spray Star to properly run the rinse routine To ensure that boom sections are on 1 Enter a target rate into the display 2 Turn the foot pedal master switch on 3 Turn all boom switches on 4 Boom indicators on the Run screen must be blue showing that boom valves are on CONTROL VALVE SETTINGS Liquid Product Control Valve Configuration Options e Inline Servo Rate control is achieved through actuating a butterfly or ball valve found in the solution hose that goes to the booms When the valve opens the flow increases and when the valve closes the flow decreases e Bypass Servo Rate control is achieved through actuating a butterfly or ball valve found in the return line to the solution tank When the valve opens the flow decreases and when the valve closes the flow increases e PWM 12 volt Rate control is achieved through speed changes to the solution pump The PWM 12 Volt setting is programmed to pulse the power to an electric solenoid valve used to adjust the hydraulic flow to the solution pump e Pump Servo Rate control is achieved through speed changes to the solution pump The pump servo setting is programmed to control an electric motor used to actuate a hydraulic valve to adjust the hydraulic flow to the solution pump e PWM Ground Rate control is achieved through speed changes to the solution pump The PWM Ground setting is programmed to pulse the ground to an electric solenoid valve used to
173. ed Spray Boom Height by creating new regions within the field Crop Rotation Restrictions REI Application Placement Method When you press the Edit button you may enter the following details based upon your specific configuration e Machine and equipment information as appropriate e Product REI and rotation restriction e Application placement method OPTIONS Pressing the Options button on the Report Details screen opens the Options screen The Options screen is where you can change settings that affect the creation of application reports e Auto Generate Report Check this option to have the display automatically generate an application report each time you start a new field operation e Copy from Previous Region Check this option if you wish to have the display copy all values already specified in Report Details for the previous region over to a new region e Prompt for Report Details Check this option to have the display automatically launch the region summary data collection dialog box each time a new region is created at the Run screen during application rate control e Report Map Appearance Multi Color Rate Select this option to have application reports display the application maps using rate legend as displayed on the run screen Single Color Coverage Select this option to have the application reports display single color product coverage maps 38 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP SMART REPOR
174. ed PI OLIUS EE 178 Direct Injection Application Error 178 Direct Injection Discharge Flow Sensor Error eee 178 Discharge Flow Sensor Pin Outs eee eee nana 179 Direct Injection Inlet Hestrichon eee eee eee eee eee 179 Vacuum SAC PIN el EC 179 Controller Settings Direct Injection Pump Calibration rrrrnnrrrrnnnennnrre 179 PUMP Calibra ion SENINE EE 179 Rate Response Wammimg eee eee nana 180 FOW NO VIN 180 FIOO lait 180 Setting Name and Description eee eee 180 PUN C CO FI poate aia iata plai a ante Oa aa arti fa te et 180 OptRx TAS CULE 0 ME 181 er 181 GE 00 E 181 GOR Sen or oE lD ataca pat carii uni plaga ti el aa aia 183 Go 16 SS E UL IE E 183 North American Wheat Settings eee eee 184 European SE LUNCI S au nina ascita ate tei al el iat 184 TANN 185 L ad AG Ol CUR AMON REE 185 EO ES OFM AU OG EE ate ate dia i a aa e ca 185 Create an OptRx V I Reference Value eee eee 185 Determining where to scan a Reference Gm 185 PENNEN 186 Crop Sensor ss Simon ate eta nt at ei ati ul e a 188 Glossary of OptRx Terminology eee na 189 Troubleshooting OptRx Error Messages 190 NORAC UC5 Add to a Configuration c eee en 191 ENDEN 191 LOA COMING UN AU ON EE EE donates 192 EMO AGS ed e EE EE 193 Boom Height Control Options Button 193 Boom Height Control Options Screen eee 194 BOOM FA PAN 194 Spreader Create ele le LC den BE 195 SE EP COMO UF e EE 195 Spr
175. ed of the blower fan An alarm will sound if the blower fan speed exceeds this value e Low Fan Speed Shutoff When selected granular product application of a strip till toolbar will be shut off if fan speed drops below the Min Speed setting e Rate Threshold Percentage difference between the Actual Rate and the Target Rate when the Rate Not Responding Message is displayed on the Run screen 169 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT FERTILIZER DEFAULT PRODUCT SETTINGS Abbreviated Percentage in terms of lbs 100 Ibs name for display and predefined name for N SMS Anhydrous Liquid under NH3 g2 Ammonia pressure Material Type 28 UAN Liquid p8 UAN 30 UAN oe UAN 32 UAN 32 32 UAN Ammonium EE polyphosphat Liquid polyphosphat e starter e 170 Density 5 14 Ibs gal at 60 F 10 67 10 86 Ibs gal 11 06 Ibs gal 11 73 Ibs gal INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION INJECTION DirectCommand interfaces with the Raven SCS Sidekick for complete control over chemical injection applications The display can support up to four Raven SCS Sidekick injection pumps plus a liquid Carrier CREATE CONFIGURATION CG De s gt gt gt Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt Add button gt Application button Application A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle implement a
176. ed with that configuration will also be deleted However all log files will remain in memory until exported to the USB drive a Manage Equipment button Press to add edit or delete information for information regarding a particular vehicle implement or controller or to adjust Implement offsets Manage Equipment button SE By pressing the Manage Equipment button found at the top right hand side of the Setup screen s Configuration Tab you can either e Use the drop down menu to edit settings for an existing Vehicle Implement or Controller that you created with the Configuration Wizard in the Operating Configuration e Create a new Vehicle Implement and Controller Note PRODUCT TAB Product Setup The Setup Product Tab is where you can perform the following tasks e Add or import Planting products e Add or import Application products e Add Application Product mixes such as a tank mix or a dry blend of multiple products e Add or import Harvest products e Add button Press to add or import a Product At the following screen choose a Product Option Add Product Import Product or Add Product Mix if in Application From here an on screen wizard continues you through each step of the configuration process e When finished the new product appears in the list below the Operating Configuration drop down menu e When you highlight the configuration the product information appears to the right of the Add button e Spec
177. eed 6000 rpm E Rate Not Responding Threshold blower fan An alarm PRI sound f the Me en Sec 5 7 falls below this value Rate Threshold 30 El Low Fan Speed Shutott e Max Speed Setting represents the desired maximum speed of the blower fan An alarm will sound if the blower fan speed exceeds this value e Rate Threshold Percentage difference between the Actual Rate and the Target Rate when the Rate Not Responding Message is displayed on the Run screen e Low Fan Speed Shutoff When selected granular product application of a strip till toolbar will be shut off if fan speed drops below the Min Speed setting TROUBLESHOOTING DIRECTCOMMAND GRANULAR APPLICATIONS Problem Run screen Granular channel s green light spreader indicator will not turn on Solution 1 Make sure ground speed is registered a value greater than zero on the display 2 Verify a target rate greater than zero is entered into the display 3 Check the switch status found on the Run screen under System and Input Diagnostics As the master switch is turned on and off the Input Diagnostics window should change from black to green if they do not then refer to the installation instructions to verify switch connections 4 Check high current connection into the Granular Control Module Problem Master switch will not turn on when the foot pedal is on Solution Make sure the Master Switch Input is set to External 2 under the Auxiliary Input Settings
178. eed to create a new planter Select Kinze Planter Monitor Module from the dropdown box Note If using interplant Checkmark Interplant Rows Enabled Accepting the number of front units must be equal to or one less than the rear units Or there needs to be zero front units One or more sensors are connected to the PMM Disconnect all sensors before accepting the PMM setup 1 Occurs when adding interplant rows to a PMM with already detected rear rows 2 Reconnect the rear seed tube sensors and any other required or accessory sensors that were already learned Leave the seed sensors for the Interplant disconnected Repeat the MUXbus detection for the Interplant rows 1 Clean the detected dirty sensor s 2 Verify PMM firmware is on v1 5 or higher 1 Verify PMM firmware is on v1 5 or higher 2 Check boot counter on PMM If value is significantly higher than the rest of the modules Then a intermittent 12 volt power issue Is present 3 Check cabling Problem symptoms Solution S Error Muxbus short to ground Error Muxbus short to power Error CAN node lost PMM node has stopped communicating Configuration is not found in the Field operation wizard Planter is planting seed Monitor is not making a map or displaying population Planter is planting seed Monitor is making a map of 1 2 of the planter of planter swath Planter is planting seed Monitor is displaying population Monitor is not
179. een or imported to the system from the Import Files button at the External Storage Operations screen The External Storage Operations screen can be accessed by pressing the External Storage Operations button on the Home screen e pat Pattern guideline file Pattern files are created at the Guidance Tab found on the Mapping Toolbox of the Map screen or imported to the system from the External Storage Operations button on the Home screen The External Storage Operations screen can be accessed by pressing the External Storage Operations button on the Home screen IMAGE FILE TYPES png and bmp Supported file formats for the Display Owner Image File size is limited to a maximum of 200 pixels wide by 100 pixels tall Import the file from the Import Image button on the Display screen s General Tab 249 XION dddYy SYSTEM FILE TYPES e ibk System backup file Backup files are written to the USB drive by pressing the Create Backup button on the Display Setup screen s Advanced Tab e A System log file Created with the Copy Data button on the External Storage Operations screen or pressing the Export Data Files button of the Display screen s Advanced Tab e fw2 Firmware upgrade file for the display and control modules Install firmware updates from the USB drive by pressing the Upgrade Firmware button on the External Storage Operations screen The External Storage Operations screen can be accessed by pressing the External Storage O
180. een changes its appearance to Perspective View and SmartPath settings are shown in the mapping toolbox Drive along the path that you wish to create it For more information see Create AB Line Within a SmartPath Pass on page 80 Note The display will not create an A point with SmartPath unless you are mapping a Straight AB line within 79 AONVGINS 6 Turn Around After you turn around on your first pass the system guidance will follow a maroon colored line parallel to your previously driven pass An example is shown in the picture re As you continue using the SmartPath Guidance the map screen will display three lines e A The Base Path Appears as a black line is the initial SmartPath that you created on the first pass e B The Followed Path Appears as a maroon colored line is the path that your vehicle is currently using e C The Projected Path Appears as a blue colored line on the opposite side of the Base Path is an alternate path parallel to the Base Path The system guidance created this path when you created the Base Path This is the path that your vehicle would have taken if you had turned it in the opposite direction e SmartPath Notes The Projected Path and Base Path both remain in display memory unless you press the Reset button without saving the SmartPath pattern Pressing the Save button saves all the SmartPath passes within the display s memory for future use
181. efined 3 The Boundary Offset feature enables mapping a boundary at a user defined distance to the left or right of the GPS antenna center line If desired specify a Boundary Offset distance by choosing a direction and distance from the GPS antenna center line 4 Press the green check mark button to start the boundary 5 Press the Stop button to complete the boundary At the Boundary screen choose whether to Save Resume or Discard the boundary Pause Boundary When creating a boundary you can use the Pause Boundary button to create a straight line between two points To do this drive the vehicle to a point press the Pause Boundary button then drive to the second point When you press the Resume Boundary button a straight line is created between your Current point and your pause location Editing Boundaries Press the Edit button on the Boundary Tab and the Field Boundary Options screen opens as shown Here you can Import Boundaries Export Boundaries and Clear All Boundaries Field Boundary Options Region OUTER 40 77 ac WATER 4 27 ac L OUTER 29 53 ac WATERWAY 1 41 ac e Importing and Exporting Boundaries For a description of Importing and Exporting Boundaries see Importing and Exporting Field Boundaries on page 17 BUILDING 3 15 ac e Clear All Boundaries Press Clear All to permanently delete all Boundary information 35 N33H2S NOY A CAUTION Once you clear t
182. elect PLANTER Using the drop down arrow under Select Attachment Method select REAR DRAWBAR Note ONLY select Rear Drawbar for Kinze planters including 2 point hitch attachment machines for optimum air clutch performance 8 Press RIGHT BLUE ARROW 9 Using the drop down arrow under Planter Monitor select KINZE PLANTER MONITOR MODULE 10 Select SPLIT ROWS ENABLED for interplant implement only 11 Select PLANTER SECTION CLUTCH CONTROL for air clutch equipped planters 12 Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW 13 Using the up down arrows enter the Number of Rows on the planter 14 Press the KEYPAD button 15 Enter the Row Spacing Value 16 Press the GREEN CHECK example 16 row 30 inch spacing interplant setup 31 rows at 15 inch spacing 17 Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW 18 Using the up down arrows enter the Number of Implement Sections on the planter refers to air clutch sections 3600 3660 4 sections standard 3800 8 sections standard if no air clutches select 2 sections eae NS Rev 9 11 rar Fr 3 Integra Basic Configuration Setup Service Manual Integra 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW again Press the KEYPAD button Enter the value for the Hitch to Application Distance Feet measure the distance from the hitch to the application point Non Interplant from hitch point to seed tube Interplant hitch point to half way point between rows Press the GREEN CHECK
183. ely measure harvested bushels you must calibrate the display by entering in actual load weights into the display for each grain type You must obtain these actual load weights by weighing the grain from a load on accurate scales To obtain accurate results you must obtain between 236 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST four and six calibration loads You can complete a weight calibration at any time during the season however it is recommended that you calibrate grain weight at the beginning of the season Note Start the calibration procedure with the combine stopped the combine grain tank empty and a hauling O vehicle empty Options 1 Field Operation Configuration 7 E While performing a Harvest Operation press the Region button and the Options screen appears as shown Flag Region a5 A BE 2 Flag Region as a Calibration Load Variety Tracking Press the Flag Region as a Calibration Load check box then press the checkmark box to return to the Home EE screen 3 Choose Speed or Swath Width kz Decide the speed at which you will drive or the swath width you will use for this load Try to keep your speed or swath width as constant as possible for the entire load Automat IE Var jety NONE 4 Harvest Calibration Load Harvest a load weighing between 3 000 and 6 000 pounds 1 361 to 2 721 kilograms 5 Empty Grain and Weigh Load Empty the grain tank completely onto a truck or wagon and weigh it
184. em response Is e Zero RPM Offset Default Value 30 This setting represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero RPM Offset value can cause the product control system to not properly shut off See PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings 205 GEIWKET EK e Allowable Error Default Value 2 2 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error e Auto Control Check Box Default is unchecked Checking the Auto Control check box allows you to control the spinner speed TROUBLESHOOTING DIRECTCOMMAND GRANULAR APPLICATIONS Problem Run screen Granular channel s green light spreader indicator will not turn on Solution 1 Make sure ground speed is registered a value greater than zero on the display 2 Verify a target rate greater than zero is entered into the display 3 Check the switch status found on the Run screen under System and Input Diagnostics As the master switch is turned on and off the Input Diagnostics window should change from black to green if they do not then refer to the installation instructions to verify switch connections 4 Check high current connection into the Granular Control Module Problem Master switch
185. emperature This sets the temperature offset to provide a correct moisture reading For more information see Temperature Calibration on page 234 230 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST 5 Calibrate Moisture This sets the moisture offset to help provide accurate moisture and yield readings For more information see Moisture Calibration on page 235 6 Calibrate Grain Weight A correct Grain Weight Calibration provides accurate readings across all grain flow ranges Calibration is required each year and for each grain type For more information see Grain Weight Calibration on page 236 CONFIGURATION SETUP SETTINGS Configuration Setup After creating an operating configuration that includes a Vehicle Combine and Header you must go to the Configuration Laselk 9120 nen EE Setup screen and enter information for your specific PE EE operating configuration omis l 1 Speed _Input Graln Calibration Calibrate Swath Control Header Settir Se Highlight your particular Operating Configuration in the configuration list shown on the Setup screen and press the Setup wrench button The Configuration Setup screen appears An example is shown below e GPS Offsets After completing the process of setting up a Vehicle you must configure GPS Offsets The GPS Offsets define where the machine s rear axle and hitch is in relation to the GPS antenna These settings are used by mapping For mo
186. en After Configuration on page 24 225 DNIHOLINON AGUTAIA e If you would like to use a region in the weight calibration select the Flag Region as Calibration Load check box For more information about Calibration Loads see Grain Weight Calibration on page 236 e For more information about Automatic Variety Tracking or Automatic Region Changing see Tracking Varieties and Changing Regions on page 226 TRACKING VARIETIES AND CHANGING REGIONS You can use the Options screen to enable the display to track varieties that you planted earlier and are now harvesting You can also use two types of variety tracking Automatic Variety Tracking and Automatic Region Changing e Automatic Variety Tracking tracks only varieties hence the operator must manually change to a new region Note You can select the Variety Tracking option when you are creating a crop during Harvest Product Setup e Automatic Region Changing tracks both varieties and regions so the display changes the region automatically F The illustration at left shows how the display could track two different varieties In this example when the harvester reaches the end of Variety 1 and the operator maneuvers the vehicle to Variety 2 a message appears that either a new variety has been detected and the user is notified to change regions Automatic Variety Tracking or that a variety has been detected and the display is automatically changing regions Au
187. enammrnamuermestenacenvenesans 230 Calibration Ee UE le 230 Configuration Setup Settings ce eee eee eee anaa 231 gele El SOUNO azi cine atat ema oa tal e a cf tan ll ial mal EE 232 Calibrate Header SENSON EE 232 Header Offset 233 NWTF AO Fa QO Lo WE 233 XII Temperature Calibration eee eee eee eee nea 234 Mo lte NNN 235 Manual Moisture Geitng eee eee nea 236 Gene Elen 161616 IONI ese ocroti iti E Das mea ear det ia 236 Adding a New Calbratnon eee eee eee eee nea 239 GER ole oa ENE 240 Grain Harvest RE ele El 241 Harvest Diagnostic Notes eee eee aaa 242 Claas Quantimeter Configuration for CLAAS Quantimeter errrnnnrnrrorrnnnnrnnorrrrnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 243 CLAAS Configuration Setup Geitmge eee eee 243 Calibration Information for CLAAS Quantimeter me eee 244 CLAAS Manual Moisture Setting eee eenae 245 Map Screen for CLAAS Quantimeter eee eee 246 Diagnostics for CLAAS Ouantmeter eee 246 Diagnostics Screen for CLAAS Quantimeter eee 246 ii le o 20010 E 247 Troubleshooting CLAAS Quantimeter Confouraions eee 247 Appendix SLNGLNOD 40 a1av Appendix System Diagrams Reference eee eee neoane 249 FM FORMAN inca nun cine maicuta ating EE atitea oa i eat aa e ateu a ata 249 Prescription dree 249 Boundary and Guideline File Types ce eee eee 249 ME FEN 249 NENNE 250 Modul VED RI Te ale te EE 250 Company Warranty Statement eee nana 250 RANT 2
188. end range spacing value which is the total number of units represented by a particular color e Ranges The Ranges up and down arrow buttons change the number of range increments displayed in the legend e Color Scheme The Color Scheme can be modified by using the drop down list Choices include the following Green Yellow Red Single Hue blues or greens Rainbow Reset to Default Legend Resets the legend to the default settings 32 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP e Automatic Legend lf the Automatic Legend checkbox is selected the average automatically sets itself to the field average and updates as the field average changes e Reset to Default Legend Press the reset legend to the system default e Save as Product Legend Select the Save as Product Legend checkbox if you wish to set the current legend as the default legend for all regions of the same product Map Markers tab Markers are a collection of point objects that are available on the Map Markers tab of the Mapping Toolbox as shown at left Map markers allow you to map points on the go in order to identify specific features within a field Press an Gg individual marker to indicate a Map Marker on the Map screen Markers If all of the Markers that you created are not immediately visible in this screen use the Cycle Map Markers button to view more that you created Cycle Map Markers E Weeds D i Washout 09 Hole Edit Markers
189. enterline of the vehicle to the position of the GPS antenna Select LEFT or RIGHT to indicate the position from the vehicle centerline e Measure and enter the vertical height of the antenna above the ground Note Accuracy when measuring for a specific setting is essential to ensure proper machine performance HITCH TAB SETTINGS TAB The Hitch Tab allows you to enter in the distance from four different mounting positions on the tractor to the rear axle Use the numeric keypads to enter these values in if using the hitch point Note Accuracy when measuring for a specific setting is essential to ensure proper machine performance MOUNT TAB SETTINGS FOR SOME APPLICATION VEHICLES The Mount Tab will only be available when using a self propelled application sprayer or spreader This allows you to enter in the application location from the rear axle Use the numeric keypad to enter in the distance and the drop down box to select if it is in front or behind of the axle HEAD TAB FOR HARVEST VEHICLES The Head Tab allows you to enter in the distance from the head attachment point to the rear axle Use the numeric keypad to enter in the distance to the axle SWATH SECTION OFFSETS After completing the initial process of configuring an implement you must enter accurate values in the Implement Offsets screen To configure Implement Offsets highlight your configuration at the Setup screen then press the Setup wrench tool At the C
190. er defined value found under the controller settings for Strip Till 4 The CFR number may need to be adjusted TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONTROL APPLICATIONS Problem Rate changes on the display but not on the controlled console Solution 1 Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate module 2 Check the settings specific to your controlled console For more information refer to the Quick Reference Guide 3 Check cabling and all connections 4 Disconnect the serial connection and determine if the controller is functioning properly without the display Problem The display rate and serial controlled rate do not match Solution 1 Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate Module 2 Check to make sure the nominal rate in the display matches the nominal rate in the serial controlled console 207 GEIWKET EK FERTILIZER DEFAULT PRODUCT SETTINGS Abbreviated Percentage in terms of lbs 100 Ibs name for display and predefined name for SMS Ammonium nitrate Ammonium Material Density 208 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION STRIP TILL DirectCommand for Strip Till applicators monitors bin level and fan speed sensors maintains an accurate application rate and supports multiple product prescription rate control You can use up to three channels of granular product control The Strip Till Module supports either PWM Hydraulic Valve or Lin
191. er the number of clutch sections and press the blue right arrow button to continue Notes e Do not enter the number of individual rows Enter the number of swath sections that can be independently turned on and off e The Clutch Module Configuration must match the actual number of row sections on the planter Otherwise if you try to load a Field Operation at the Field Operation Wizard you will see a message stating that The number of detected module outputs does not equal the number of planter sections 6 Enter Section Widths from Left to Right The Enter Section Widths from Left to Right screen appears This screen shows the number of sections and number of rows in your configuration From here you can Press the blue right arrow button to continue or Highlight the section number and use the numeric keypad to change the section row numbers then press the blue right arrow button to continue keypad button for each section that needs to be changed Note The implement is divided up into equal section sizes by default To modify the sections press the 95 HLYVMSOLNY 7 Enter Distance from Hitch to Application Point Use the numeric keypad to enter the distance from the implement hitch to the application point from front to back When finished press the blue right arrow button to continue 8 Enter Implement Name Use the numeric keypad to enter a name for the implement and press the check mark button 9 Select
192. ers to the business or person that the system Is in operation for Contact information can also be entered for each Grower The Grower information will be passed into mapping software for automatic Grower setup within desktop software e Add button Press to add a Grower e Delete button Press to delete a Grower pi _ Edit button EY Edit an existing name of a Grower by highlighting that name and pressing button Press to enter information for the Grower s Name Business Phone Address Applicator License Home Phone Mobile Phone and Email information 15 NOLLVHNDIHNOD Note Personal Information entered at this screen can be added or edited at any time SEASON A season is defined as the calendar year that Grower Season Field Operator the crop will be harvested Creating a season and setting it to active is required prior to the Season December 31 Reminder D L 2009 Crop ACTIVE system logging any data Tillage 6 The seasons are displayed in lists with the Planting Application o ia Active season displayed in bold face type All A A new data is logged to the active season therefore a season must be set as Active before you can log any new data to it e Add button e Press to add a Season e Delete button os Press to delete a Season e Edit button Edit an existing name of a Season by highlighting that name and pressing button Oo BERE e Set Active button Pre
193. es for Backup include e Wheels e Radar e Filtered This setting is used only as a backup speed source for low pulse ground speed sensors In times when primary speed source is lost this setting allows you to calibrate and operate with a speed sensor that has a pulse output below the standard threshold of 305 pulses 100ft imperial or 10 pulses meter metric Using the filtered selection will allow calibration values down to 15 pulses 100ft imperial or 0 5 pulses meter metric When the calibration values fall in this lower range the speed sensor input will be filtered to achieve a more accurate rate control Other Notes If you are using a backup radar speed source it is recommended that you calibrate it before the season begins e It is recommended to Calibrate Distance in the event of GPS loss For more information see Calibrate Distance on page 48 47 SONILLAS CALIBRATE DISTANCE If you are not using GPS for ground speed then after you have created a configuration you must calibrate the ground speed input for accurate speed and area calculations If you are using GPS it is recommended to calibrate distance in the event of GPS loss Use the following procedure to calibrate distance 1 Select Ground Speed Sensor Type Select the sensor type to calibrate and press NEXT to continue 2 Mark Start and End Points of the Known Distance The system defaults to 100 feet 50 meters distance for calibration Press the numeri
194. es not match the population shown on the planter monitor Notes e The stepper seed rate meter calibration does not recalibrate any previously logged planting data e This recalibration number applies to a specific crop type i e corn Normally you should not need to recalibrate when switching varieties within the same crop type e Before beginning a calibration make sure that you have primed the seed meter For more information See Priming Seed Rate Meters above 1 To begin go to the Map screen and press the Meter RPM button as shown Planter Drives rpm 19 123 109 1O0HLNOXD 2 EEE 2 The Seed Rate Planter Control screen appears as Meter Calibration shown at left Press the Calibrate button 92812 o garen E 3 Acknowledge the Warning Acknowledge this warning by pressing the check mark button Warning a sale distance from the planter during the n rotine The plaster should be lowered mear ihe ground with the seed meter fully charged with seed and all necessary fans and jor auxillary metering dewbors on 4 Select Drive to Calibrate The Meter Calibration Wizard appears as shown at left Select the drive that you wish to calibrate Press the blue right arrow button to continue Warning trasa pp rechter pb rec 5 Enter Simulated Ground Speed ground with the seed meter fully charged with seed and all ee Enter the simulated ground speed for the calibration procedure Press the blue right ar
195. ess reflected light to determine plant vigor It assigns numeric values to the varying levels of vigor to create a Vegetative Index VI Using the VI OptRx calculates nitrogen application rates taking into consideration the following preferences of the grower and existing traits in the environment Minimum amount of N to be applied e Maximum amount of N to be applied e Conditions where no N should be applied The nitrogen rates created by OptRx can immediately be used to perform a variable rate application based on the needs of the crop INSTALLATION The display supports up to 10 OptRx sensors For swaths that are 80 feet or larger five sensors or more should be used For swaths less than 80 feet a minimum of three sensors is recommended When installing sensor cables you must install them in the correct order from left to right An example is shown below A CAUTION If you do not install the sensors in their proper places then the map created by the display will not accurately reflect actual field conditions according to row sensor placement Checklist e Sensors should be equally spaced apart Sensors should not be mounted on the ends of the booms e Each sensor should be mounted so that it is centered over the top of a crop row e Sensor can operate 20 50 in 51 127 cm above the crop canopy Sensors perform best at 30 36 in 76 91 cm CREATE CONFIGURATION CG gt gt gt gt Press Home button gt
196. essing the blue right and left arrows at top right Also you can zoom in and out of the Smart Report by pressing on the magnifying glass icons at top left 4 Product application reports are automatically stored on the external data card at the time of report creation Reports are created and stored inside folders that are created with the following sequential information provided by the display e Ten digit serial number of the display Example 2007250001 e Grower e Farm e Field Name e Configuration Name e Unique ID Date of most recent product application The files date information is listed according to Year Month Day Example East 91 Post Sprayer DirectLiquid 0000177a 060506 pdf 39 S1HOdAH CONTROL CHANNEL REPORT CONTENT SS INTEGRA APPLICATION REPORT Vehicle Jd 8440 Implement Strip till bar Product MAP Applied Area 924 46 ac Rate Ib BEE Wiss 205 Dies 185 145 165 135639 72 Ib 146 72 Ib ac 14920 37 Ib 16 14 Ib ac 70532 65 Ib 76 30 Ib ac 2 2bin striptill 00000324 091219 p f Page 1 of 3 1007 2000 3200 TAM 1020 APA IE 18 18 18 Ee Fe Ee S d J Far ipili 00000938 09131 9 p l 40 The content of all product application reports is divided into two distinct groups The first page s of the report represent field and product control channel specific information In cases of multiple product application multiple pages will be generated one for each channel of
197. ettings Implement Switch Polarity Implement Offsets Lo Offsets Hitch Offset Lr Planting GPS Offsets Antenna Hitch Speed Input Primary Backup Manual Speed Calibrate Distance Auxiliary Input gt Master Switch Source Outside Boundary Option Coverage Option Turn On Look Ahead Turn Off Look Ahead Automatic Swath Control E Rate Display Controller Time Delay Implement Offsets Section Offsets Hitch Offset Planter Configuration gt Configuration Alarms Seed Monitor Enable Row Shutoff Configure Module Row Shutoff Controller Settings Channel 1 Channel 2 Auxiliary AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A l l ITC RAS Quick Reference Guide Configuration Setup Settings 2 L gt Application GPS Offsets TI Speed Input Primary Backup Manual Speed Calibrate Distance Auxiliary Input gt aster Switch Source Automatic Swath Control Outside Boundary Option Coverage Option Turn On Look Ahead Turn Off Look Ahead Rate Outside of Field Rate Display Controller Time Delay Equipment Settings Section Offsets Hitch Offset Implement Offsets Height Control Crop Sensor Sensor Configuration Corn Settings NORAC UC5 Automatic Setup Sensors and Valve Drivers Boom Control Module Advanced Settings Retune Main Agitation Aux Calibrate Pressure Controller Settings gt Varies UPON operating configuration 10 AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A l l UNan REENE T Refe
198. eyboard to enter a new name if desired Select Controller Channel Use the drop down menu to select a controller channel then press the blue right arrow button to continue Select Container Use the drop down menu to select a container or press the Add button to enter a new container then press the blue right arrow button to continue Enter Container Capacity and Units The Container Setup Wizard appears Use the numeric keypad to enter the container capacity and the drop down menu located underneath to enter units Press the blue right arrow button to continue Select Container Name and Location Use the on screen keyboard button to enter a Container Name and the drop down menu underneath to enter a Container Location Enter Suggested Name for Configuration Use the on screen keyboard button to enter a different name for the configuration if desired and press the blue right arrow button Add Equipment for a Multiple Product Application The Operating Configuration Wizard reappears To add more equipment to the configuration repeat steps 11 20 When you have repeated these steps and have come back to the Add Equipment screen press the blue right arrow button Select Ground Speed Source Select your ground speed source If you will be using GPS as the primary you will need to select a secondary source Press the blue right arrow button to continue Enter Suggested Configuration Name If desired use the on screen keyboar
199. f the Map View button changes e At the Zoom to Extent map view the Map Legend shows varieties e For an explanation of display items not listed above see Task and Status bars on page 27 When the Map screen is shown in Zoom Detail the Vehicle Icon appears as a gold triangle rather than an arrow The map screen below is shown for a typical Variety Tracking Planting Configuration which does not include any Rate Control or Row Shutoff features This planter includes three sections and these sections are shown as individual boxes on the Implement Icon behind the Vehicle Icon 122 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING PLANTING MAP SCREEN ZOOM DETAIL A GPS Status e B Total Field Acres e C On screen Lightbar e D Ground Speed e E Diagnostics button F Productivity tab Variety e G Logging Status button e H AutoSwath e I Map View button e J Home button e K Map Legend Coverage me B SEET En el E a a 5 5mm CE SIE SAGRI on page 27 Note For information on Map screen items that are standard for all operations see Task and Status bars LEGEND SELECT During Planting operations the Map screen displays two types of items in the Legend Coverage and Varieties The Variety Legend is only accessible in the Zoom to Extent view The Legend Setup button on the Map Legend Tab of the Mapping Toolbox opens the Legend Select screen as shown Legend Select From the Legend Sel
200. f control valve being used for the rate control functions of the controlling system e Response Threshold Determines where the control channel switches between using Valve Response 1 and Valve Response 2 speed setting e Valve Response 1 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting Valve Response 1 represents the fast speed of the servo valve e Valve Response 2 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error is less than the Response Threshold setting Valve Response 2 represents the slow speed of the servo valve e Allowable Error Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate changes e Flow Control Delay Setting for period of time from master switch on and the start of product application to the first flow control correction This setting can be used to eliminate unwanted correction of flow control at the start of each pass Typical setting values are zero for granular and 1 2 seconds for liquid application control e Close Flow Control Valve When Rate Off When selected the controlling system will shut down when there is either a zero rate in the field or entering an already applied area When unchecked the controlling system will stay in the last known state when the sections are shut off e PWM Frequency The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at Settings can be found from the manuf
201. figuration in order for it to become active you must perform an AutoConfig procedure e The row spacing keypad is where you must enter in the row spacing that your planter will use during planting operations STMM Split Row Configurations If you specified a split row planting configuration in the drop down list shown on the Seed Monitor Setup screen see Seed Monitor Setup on page 118 then the Selection window will appear after the first time that you press the Sensor on the Seed Monitor Setup window Choose between Standard Row or Split Row and press the green check mark button Split row users must configure the Seed Tube Monitor Module for both Standard Row configurations and Split Row Configurations Both configurations are then saved in the display and settings for each planting configuration are automatically applied when you specify the machine configuration at the Field Operation Configuration Wizard SEED MONITOR OPTIONS Press the Seed Tube Monitor Bar Graph on the Equipment Tab of the Map screen and the Seed Monitor Options screens open as shown Here you can make changes to the bar graph s rate spacing display as well as make alarm settings adjustments The Seed Monitor Options screens consist of two tabs Display Options and Table View 120 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING Display Options Seed Monitor Options Display Options Table View Scan Rate Spacing Displey Mode specifies the Rate
202. figuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt Controller Settings button gt Calibrate Pressure button Pressure Sensor Calibration Step 1 of 4 Pressure Sensor Calibration screen appears as slede shown Choices for Calibration include Main Agitation or Aux Choose which pressure sensor you wish to calibrate and press the blue right arrow button From this point a wizard walks you through the calibration process FENCE ROW NOZZLE INDICATORS You can control fence row nozzles through the DirectCommand system by mapping the switches in Auxiliary Input Settings The fence row nozzles can be mapped to any switch GE messe gt i gt EET Fence Row uae hal Fence Row Note For more information on Auxiliary Input Settings see Auxiliary Input on page 48 147 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT Tame After specifying Fence Row Nozzle settings at the SS Auxiliary Input Assignment screen the Fence Row e Nozzle Indicators A which are shaped like triangles appear on either side of the sections behind the vehicle icon Ze 130 00 Notes If a switch is selected as a Left or Right Fence Row Nozzle the system sends power out of Boom Pin 11 for the left fence row and Boom Pin 12 for the right fence row The boom sections next to the fence row nozzles must be turned on before the fence row nozzle can be turned on LOAD CONFIGURATION Starting a
203. for 300 seconds 5 minutes 185 XHLdO e North America Wheat Scan the most vigorous portion of your field for 300 seconds 5 minutes e Europe Scan the portion of your field where the plants show an average amount of vigor and growth Scan this area for 150 seconds 2 5 minutes This V I Reference Value is a baseline that the system uses to evaluate the rest of the field scan a Reference Strip This section describes how to scan a reference strip into the display This reference strip determines the V I Reference Value li assumes that you have already performed the following tasks e Chosen the appropriate part of your field to create a reference strip For more information see Determining where to scan a Reference Strip on page 185 e Created an OptRx module configuration e Created a Field Operation Configuration For more information see Management button on page 15 1 Press Create Button Press the Create button located on the bottom right hand side of the Map screen s Equipment Tab Note If a reference strip has already been created a warning appears notifying you that this will unload the current reference strip Press Yes to continue Reference Strip Information 2 Enter Reference Strip Information The Reference Strip Information screen appears Use the on screen keyboard to enter the Name Growth Stage ane eem and Variety Press the green check mark box when finished Growth
204. formatting schemes to call attention to information related to simplifying system operation and proper operating practices to prevent accidental data loss If in doubt about the results of performing an action or deleting an item from the system back up all system files to the USB external drive prior to proceeding with the action Note Provides informative tips to assist with system setup calibration and operation CAUTION Indicates specific settings calibrations and procedures that must be followed for proper system A performance and operation A WARNING Indicates specific instructions to avoid accidental loss of data and system configurations settings CROSS REFERENCES AND WEB LINKS Throughout this manual numerous cross references are provided to other pages or sections These cross references are always shown in blue italic text and list the title and page number as in the following example To find the information you re looking for see How to Find Information You re Looking For on page 5 If you are viewing this manual in PDF format you can click on this blue text and go directly to the link 4 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 GENERAL Links to web sites are shown in blue italicized and underlined text as in the following example To view the web site go to www agleader com VIEWING THIS MANUAL ONLINE This user manual can be viewed online at Ag Leader s Web site To view an online version go to the A
205. g Leader Web site and click the Customer Support link You will see a page titled Product Manuals To view and or print the User Manual online you will need the Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader pdf file format The Adobe Reader software comes pre installed on most personal computers If Adobe Reader is not installed on your computer the program is available for download at no charge A link to the Adobe download site is located at the Ag Leader Web site HOW TO FIND INFORMATION YOU RE LOOKING FOR What do you do if you cannot find the information that you re looking for There are three different ways at your disposal to find specific information quickly These steps can include 1 Look up the information in the Table of Contents 2 Look up the information in the section indexes that are located at the end of each manual section Planting Tillage Application and Harvest 3 Use the Adobe Reader s search function While viewing this manual online in PDF format press the CTRL F buttons on your keyboard A search menu should appear and from here you may enter in a search term 1YONVWA SIHL LOS INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 GENERAL INSTALLATION DISPLAY HARDWARE e A USB media slot Used for data transfer in and out of the display e B Stereo speaker The built in stereo speaker is used for audible warnings The volume can be adjusted through the display setup routine e C RAM mount e D VGA video ou
206. h button Seed Monitor Setup At the Configuration Setup screen press the Seed Split ou Standard Rows Speed Source ee Monitor Setup button The Seed Monitor Setup al gt ES os screen appears 1 Press the Sensor to open the Sensor Configuration screen sao configuration 2 The Sensor Configuration screen opens as shown Su at left Press the AutoConfig button to start the Enabled AutoConfig procedure Enabled Enabled Enabled Row Spacing 119 Note Press the Sensor to perform the AutoConfig procedure which is necessary for a Seed Tube Monitor DNIHOLINON SEED TUBE SENSOR CONFIGURATION EE The Sensor Configuration screen shows which rows Eege BS E are assigned to the individual pins on the Seed Tube Enabled Monitor Module e The numeric keypad moves the sensor to a different Atocon location in case you need to make configuration 5 Enabled changes for custom planting operations Enabled b d HP ma vi Enabled Row Spacing 79 9 in E Note To return to the default press the AutoConfig button e The Status button enables and disables a Seed Tube sensor Note A row with a failed sensor can be ignored until a replacement sensor is installed e The AutoConfig button sends the planter settings to the Seed Tube Monitor Module e The Remove button removes an individual Seed Tube sensor Note After creating a Seed Tube Monitor Module con
207. haft sensor stops communicating with the PMM Solution Press OK to dismiss the error The display then replaces the message window with an alarm text on the header bar at the top of the Run screen This alarm text continues until the wire is fixed or the sensor is disabled Inspect the sensor at the first opportunity Error Message Low hydraulic oil level Possible Cause Hydraulic oil level drops Solution Check oil level on the planter add as necessary Error Message High hydraulic oil temperature Possible Cause Hydraulic oil temperature level rises Solution Stop planter in order to cool down oil temperature Inspect for cause of overheating Error Message Voltage Error Alarm Possible Cause Occurs if the battery voltage drops below 10 volts or rises above 15 volts Solution Check tractor s electrical system 140 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING Error Message Row Seed Rate Alarm Possible Cause The seed rate of one or more rows is less than the alarm threshold setting and the corresponding transmission shaft sensor detects rotation Solution Press OK to dismiss the error If the alarm state is still present the graph will state the rows where the errors are occurring and the Title Bar will flash the type of alarm Inspect row units to confirm that each has seed and that all mechanical drive shaft parts are working properly However the bar graph will continue to operate and the
208. half an inch e Check for voltage at the Seed Rate Module black and red wires Should have Battery Voltage e Check for voltage at the PWM valve when priming meters Should have Battery Voltage e Green light should be flashing on Seed Rate Module This does not mean there is power there Hydraulic Drive does not stop when planter is raised e Implement switches are out of adjustment e When in planting position the implement switch arm should not touch anything and be in the neutral position When planter is in the raised field position the arm should engage the lower parallel arm and move half an inch e Make sure manual over ride screw is all the way out on the PWM valve Hydraulic Drive takes a long distance 15 ft before it starts e Adjust motion sensor on center wheel to within 1 8th of an inch of pulse wheel on center tire e Start moving less than 2 mph An alert at the top of the Run Screen should pop up and read jump start speed in use and the drive should start to turn This will indicate the jump start sensor is working properly If the alert does not pop up check for damaged wires going to jump start sensor Air Clutches Not Working e Make sure planter is down e Make sure the Master switch and all corresponding switches are on e Implement switches could be out of adjustment e When in planting position the implement switch arm should not touch anything and be in the neutral position When planter is in the raised field position
209. he Prescription Rate Legend A This legend is not editable Swath 30 itg in 100 Pressure Pd Main 33 Agitation 33 ui re 40 SHAPE FILE CONVERSION What is commonly called a shape file is actually a collection of three different files All three of the files are required and must be present on the USB drive for the system to use shape file groups for variable rate product application A single shape file can contain recommendation rates for multiple products To begin press the Rate Setup button on the Product Control Toolbox 154 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Rate Control Settings The Rate Control Settings screen appears as shown 1 Open File Selection screen Press the Load Prescription button SSE 2 The File Selection screen appears as shown Size Date Mol num shapes Highlight your desired shp file and press the green owe m GE NU Columns gt check mark button wl pat 23 Dec 3 setup_tillage_planting 13 Jan 24 Ki O167001p shp Willson 2007 Spring Boundaries 3 Read instructions and disclaimer Read instructions and disclaimer regarding the shape file conversion process User knowledge of the column name containing the product recommendation is required to complete this process Press the blue right arrow button to continue 4 Select Number and Products Select the number of products to be used in a variable rate application a prescription and should
210. he Export Diagnostic Files Advanced Parameters Copy Debug Files Clear Debug Files e Key Switch Standby This setting allows the display to remain powered up after the vehicle power has been shut down Instead the display will switch into a standby mode and the screen will go dark and appear to be shut off however the power light will change to an amber color Pressing the display while it is in standby mode will immediately turn the screen back on again Use the up and down arrows to specify a length of time that you wish the display to remain powered up in Standby mode after the vehicle power has been shut down light will flash on and off immediately preceding shutdown If you wish the display to remain powered up for a longer period of time touch the display to restart the Key Switch Standby countdown Note When the time you specified in Key Switch Standby is nearly expired then the amber colored power e About button Displays product licensing information and copyright information 21 NOLLVHNDIHNOD e Log Files These settings allow you to copy your data in the display Export Data Files Press to copy all logged data in the display to the USB drive Export Data Files on Shutdown Checking this checkbox will copy all log files to the USB drive when the display is turned off e Memory Adjusts information stored in the display s internal memory Create Backup Press to create a backup file of all configuration setting
211. his information it cannot be retrieved VIDEO e Video button LA Press and the Video screen appears as shown e Brightness Use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the brightness of the video input e Contrast Use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the contrast of the video input e Camera Number Selection The display can receive input from up to four video cameras Press the numbered buttons to switch views between video cameras Note You can adjust the brightness and contrast of each input individually 36 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP REPORTS SUMMARY REPORT Press the Summary button at the right hand side of the Home screen to view the Summary Report screen This screen shows you field totals and SES Dee averages Use the drop down menus at Te A the top to specify the information you would like to view Specific information is dens GE AA shown in the list below for each Season Grower Farm Field Operation and Region Avg Rate Ib ac Total lb Area ac Date Created Create Product The list displays information for Instance 1 108 8 48664 6 447 16 Report Pi each Region and Instance View lt 1 gt 108 8 48664 6 447 16 12 11 2009 Report ly Instance 2 104 9 223954 6 2134 94 View Map lt 1 gt 104 9 223954 6 2134 94 12 14 2009 Field Total All 272619 2 2582 10 Summary Report REPORT DETAILS During field operations or
212. hnical Support 1500 2000 2500 2000 Retire current calibration an e On the right hand side of the Weight Calibration 3500 Numbers screen three more numeric values appear M1 soo S1 and V1 The M1 and S1 numbers are set specific to the combine model and are used for calibration Do not 1 2 A 5 6 7 A 9 239 DNIHOLINON GAUTAIA change these unless instructed to by Technical Support The V1 number is the Vibration Calibration number As with the first two numbers do not change the V1 Vibration Calibration number unless instructed to by Technical Support 4 Press New Calibration button To start a new calibration press the New Calibration button located on the bottom of the Weight Calibration Numbers screen After the New Calibration button is pressed the display will apply the new moisture and grain weight calibration from this point forward 5 Retire Old Calibration The Retire Calibration warning screen appears as shown Press the check mark to retire your old calibration Retire Calibration If you retire this calibration you will not be able to add data to regions already using it Note By retiring your old calibration you will not be able to return to your old calibration or add data to it EES 6 New Calibration Appears The new calibration now appears on the Grain Calibration i a RENTE screen as shown Your calibrations past and present are numbered in this list in
213. i Es information as well as view and change configuration settings Begin by going to the Home screen and pressing the Setup wrench button The Configuration Setup screen appears as shown In the upper left hand corner of the screen is the Operating Configuration drop down menu Use this to select the type of operating configuration you wish to e view Tillage Planting Application or Harvest e Add button Press to add an Operating Configuration At the following screen choose an operating configuration type such as Tillage Planting Application etc From here an on screen wizard continues you through each step of the configuration process e When finished the new configuration appears in the list below the Operating Configuration drop down menu e When you highlight the configuration the Name of that configuration and the Equipment within it appear on the Setup Tree located to the right of the Add button e Information regarding configurations for specific field operations can be viewed in each Operations chapter 12 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP Edit button Press t to edit the Configuration Name p e Setup button Press to adjust Configuration Settings and other settings For more information see Configuration Setup Screen on page 25 e Delete button Press to delete an Operating Configuration A CAUTION When you delete a configuration all data logg
214. ibration Calibration button The Grain Calibration screen i appears as shown Grain Weight Calibration Field Name Region Name Estimated Actual Error Enter Weight Show Cal Numbers Perform Calibration Vibration Area Molbsture Temperature TETTE 5 Open Temperature Calibration screen apen On the Grain Calibration screen press the Temperature 74 F button The Temperature Calibration screen appears as shown 6 Enter Outside Air Temperature Use the up and down arrow keys to enter the known outside air geg temperature Make the proper adjustments until the v Calibrated Temperature shown at the top of this screen reflects the correct air temperature Calibration Offset CAUTION Only calibrate temperature before harvesting begins MOISTURE CALIBRATION A moisture calibration only needs to be done once per crop per season Changing this calibration will affect previously harvested data 1 Measure Moisture on Grain Samples Harvest one load of grain Randomly sample grain from several locations in the grain tank to collect an average moisture for this load then measure the actual moisture using an accurate moisture tester 2 Go to Grain Calibration screen Go to the Home screen and press the Setup wrench button When the Setup screen opens highlight your operating configuration and press the Setup wrench button which opens the Configuration Setup screen 235 D
215. id Application Diagnostics on page 156 Control Valve Settings Servo Calibrated Reflow and Ramsey Valve Control Valve Settings e Valve Response 1 ETIA Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting The default for this setting is Response 1 Response Response Threshold 100 Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower Valve Response 1 represents 100 2d the fast speed of the servo valve e Valve Response 2 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error is less than the Response Threshold setting The default for this setting is 24 Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower Valve Response 2 represents the slow speed of the servo valve 146 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION e Response Threshold Determines where the control channel switches between using Valve Response 1 and Valve Response 2 speed settings The default setting is 3 Leaving all other valve control settings at the default value and making a small adjustment to this setting is usually all that is required to fine tune system performance Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of soeeding up servo valve response Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing servo valve response Calibrate Pressure CG gt gt gt gt gt zz x JP O Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Con
216. ific planting and application product information can be viewed in those respective chapters 13 NOILVYNSDIANOD Rm Edit button Press to edit the Product Name e Delete button SS Press to delete a product A CAUTION When you delete a product all regions using that product will also be deleted e Crop Settings button For more information see Crop Settings on page 15 e Edit Info button Press to open the Product Settings screen where you can where you can edit product information for an existing product in the Product List For more information see Product Settings on page 14 e Yield and Moisture Operators using a Harvest operation can use the drop down menu underneath Legend Settings to edit legend settings for Yield and Moisture e Edit Legend button Press to open the Legend Settings screen where you can change Rate Legend settings For more information see Legend Settings on page 32 Product Settings Product Settings The Product Settings screen is where you can edit product information for an existing product in the Product List To go to the Product Settings screen first go to the Setup screen s Product Tab Press the Edit Info button and the Product Settings screen appears as shown Manufacturer At the Product Settings screen you can enter information regarding the following items e Manufacturer Enter the Manufacturer and Common Name if desired
217. ify the position of the control valve Operators use this option to clean out equipment at the end of the day e E Prescription button 28000 For more information see Loading Prescriptions on page 113 e F Rate 1 button 30000 G Rate 2 button These only appear on Hydraulic Drive or Stepper Seed Meter configurations The Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings represent preset planting rates that allow operators to quickly change between desired planting rates for each individual product The active rate button appears with a gray background behind it In the example above Rate 1 Is active e H Rate Increase arrow e I Rate Decrease arrow Pressing once on the Rate Increase or Rate Decrease arrow increments the rate according to the amount you specify on the Rate Control Settings screen e J Rate Setup button The Rate Setup button opens the Rate Control Settings screen described at Rate Control Settings on page 112 RATE CONTROL SETTINGS The Rate Control Settings screen is where you can adjust the Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings shown at the Product Control Toolbox on the Map screen as well as import planting prescriptions To access the Rate Control Settings screen press the Rate Setup button on the Product Control Toolbox Rate Control Settings The Rate Control Settings screen appears as shown kenns The top drop down menu is where you can select a E specific variety for your rate control field operation
218. ifying the brightness of the LED lights on the optional L160 external lightbar The number 1 is the dimmest setting and 10 is the brightest the default setting is 5 GUIDANCE TAB ON MAPPING TOOLBOX The Guidance Tab on the Mapping Toolbox allows you to you can create a new pattern load an existing pattern or adjust Guidance Options and Guidance Seitings This tab changes its appearance after you create or load a pattern 74 Guidance GUIDANCE TAB BEFORE ANY PATTERNS CREATED OR LOADED Before you create any patterns the map screen s Guidance Tab appears as shown at left New Pattern Load Pattern e New Pattern For more information see New AB Pattern on page 77 Also see About Guidance Patterns on page 87 e Load Pattern For more information see Load Pattern on page 82 Manage Patterns Manage Pattern For more information see Manage Patterns on page 84 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 Guidance GUIDANCE TAB NEW A B PATTERN After you have pressed New Pattern the Guidance Tab s appearance changes to that shown at left Set A Press the Set A button to begin the creation of a pattern d i Pause Resume Press the Pause Resume button appears as two parallel lines if you wish to interrupt the creation of a pattern For more information see Pause on page 85 e Cancel Press to discontinue the creation of a pattern GUIDANCE TAB AFTER AB LINE CREATED OR LOADED
219. ime by pressing the green check mark button 5 Acknowledge the Warning A warning appears stating that you must return chemical injection plumbing to a field ready state Acknowledge the warning by pressing the green check mark button LOAD CONFIGURATION Starting at the Home page press Start Field Operation Start Field Operation Select a Season Grower Farm and Field at the Start Field Operation portion of the Home screen For more information see Start Field Operation on page 23 Once a configuration has been completed the Map View button appears at the bottom of the B Home screen 174 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION RUN CONFIGURATION Press the Map View button to see the Map screen The map below is displayed in Zoom to B Detail view 10 0 men 43 emm e A Mapping Toolbox aja B Product Control Toolbox EE Ss Glyphosate namn e C Injection Controls button lo 32 000 AER e e D NORAC UC5 Boom Height Control Options button e E Section Indicators e F NORAC UC5 Engage button e G AutoSwath eo EH Frye H Master Switch Status on Pressure PSI GOD Injection Mode Crop Target Height 12 In Sensitivity 5 e Injection Controls button C Direct Injection Control users who have included one or more Direct Injection controllers in the configuration the number of these controllers appears in the box within the Injectio
220. ing Manually disable or shut off the spinner hydraulic circuit 3 Enter a Routine Duration Enter the routine time that it takes to turn the conveyor one revolution 4 Press Start Press the Start button and when the routine is finished press the green check mark button 5 Acknowledge the second warning Return the spinner hydraulic control to a field ready condition Spreader Control Static Calibration You must perform a conveyor discharge calibration for each granular product control channel bin for the equipment configuration This process is outlined below and on the following page The static calibration procedure is performed before applying in field conditions 1 Press Spreader Control button To begin press the Spreader Control button on the Map screen as shown at left The Ka or Spreader Control screen opens 755 APM 2 Start Calibrate Conveyor routine Press the Static Calibration button to start the Static Conveyor Rate calibration routine 3 Disable Spinner Hydraulic Circuit The system will present a warning to disable the spinner hydraulic circuit Press the green check mark button after the hydraulic circuit is disabled A WARNING Manually disable or shut off the spinner hydraulic circuit If the spinner runs unexpectedly injury could occur 4 Select Conveyor to Calibrate Press the blue right arrow button to continue 202 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Conveyor Rate Calibration
221. ing Row Shutoff Enter Number of Rows and Spacing Use the up and down arrow keys to enter the number of rows and spacing When finished press the blue right arrow button to continue independently turned on and off Note Do not enter the number of individual rows Enter the number of swath sections that can be 6 10 KI Enter Number of Implement Sections Use the up and down arrow keys to enter the number of implement sections and press the blue right arrow button to continue Enter Distance from Hitch to Application Point Use the numeric keypad to enter the distance from the implement hitch to the application point from front to back When finished press the blue right arrow button to continue Enter Implement Name Use the keyboard button to enter an Implement Name then press the green check mark button Select Operation Type The Operating Configuration Wizard reappears under which you must select an operation type Select Rate Logging Control if you are using the Hydraulic Seed Control Module or the Stepper Seed Control option Complete the configuration procedure Continue through the wizard by making selections regarding controllers additional equipment and Ground Speed Source that is particular to your planting operation NZE PLANTER MONITOR SETUP Kinze Planter Monitor Setup After creating an Operating Configuration you must adjust settings for the Planter Configuration Sensor 22 KINZEI
222. ing the calibration wizard instructing you to return the spinner control hydraulic circuit to a field ready condition 203 kilograms Press the blue right arrow button to continue GEIWKET EK Spreader Control In Field Calibration The In Field Conveyor Calibration procedure performs an automated routine to adjust the calibration number for the selected spinner bin This calibration is performed if there is a difference between the amount of product logged as compared to what was actually applied E g 1 Press Spreader Control button To begin press the Spreader Control button on the Map screen as shown at left The Spreader ate Control screen opens Press the In Field Calibration button on the Spreader Control screen The In Field Conveyor Rate Calibration Wizard appears 2 Select Conveyor to Calibrate Select the channel to calibrate and press the blue right arrow button to continue 3 Enter Actual Weight The Accumulated Weight is shown in the top portion of the window Use the numeric keypad to enter the Actual Weight and press the blue right arrow button to continue 4 Calibration Complete A message appears stating that your calibration is complete and showing the CFR amount in cubic feet per revolution Press the green check mark button to finish SPINNER SPREADER SERVO SETTINGS DESCRIPTION e Valve Response 1 Default Value 40 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error exceeds the Res
223. is The Default Setting is 100 e Zero Flow Offset Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero RPM Offset value can cause the conveyor to not properly shut off See the PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings The Default Setting is 30 e Allowable Error Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate changes 2 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error e Shaft Speed Calibration Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system e Max Speed The Maximum Conveyor Speed Setting determines the maximum RPM of the conveyor that controls product distribution to the application point ae spreader Control Servo Control Valve Channel 1 Channel 3 Channel 3 Spinner e Valve Response 1 Control Valve Configuration Determines the speed of the servo valve when product Valve ve wwen Stat Speed calibrator control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting Val Response 1 Response 2 SEE Represents the fast speed of the servo valve Decreasing S x nt e the value will cause the servo
224. is box if the planter has a tank weight sensor install e EdgeVac Sensors Use the arrows to enter the number of EdgeVac sensors on your planter You will also need to calibrate the EdgeVac sensors once per year To start this process press the Calibrate button e Tank Pressure Check the box only if the planter is equipped with tank pressure sensor You will also need to calibrate the sensor once per year To start this process press the Calibrate button EdgeVac Use the arrows to enter the number of EdgeVac sensors on your planter You will also need to calibrate the EdgeVac sensors once per year To start this process press the Calibrate button For more information see K NZE EdgeVac Calibration on page 136 KINZE Sensor Configuration The Sensor Configuration screen is for system Sensor Configuration Install muxbus sensors in the following order item Status A maintenance of the KINZE Population Monitor L ES EE from ll Fear Section zi P Th in t T b tt t Il n r ron ensors from left to right 3 Section Transmission sensor Adler right e S a u on INS d S d row se SO 4_ Ground Speed Pickup Senso ETE 5 Auxiliary Sensors in the follow ing order Row 1 DK Row 2 OK c Prue matic sary Pressure Row 3 DR Row 4 OK Row 5 OK Row UK Row OK Note Upon your initial configuration of the KINZE Planter Monitor you must complete the Sensor Muxbus Detection process For more information see Muxbus Se
225. itch the Master Switch on e Press the up button one time Now press the down button one time The drive should be turning If not repeat this procedure starting with Step 2 HYDRAULIC SEED CONTROL ZERO FLOW OFFSET VARIATION Error Message Hydraulic drive not shutting off properly or minimum controllable speed is greater than specified Possible Cause Zero Flow Offset is set too high Conformation Technique a Turn the Master Switch off Enter a manual ground speed and create a new region b From the Run screen open the product application rate window and highlight the appropriate product Select Manual control mode c Switch the Master Switch on d Press the up button one time Now press the down button three times If the drive is still turning the zero flow offset is likely to be too high Solution a Turn the Master Switch off Enter a manual ground speed and enter a new region b Reduce Zero Flow Offset by 2 c From the Run screen open the product application rate window and highlight the appropriate product Select Manual control mode d Switch the Master Switch on e Press the up button one time Now press the down button three times The drive should not be turning If it is repeat this procedure starting with step 2 Note Zero Flow Offset should never be less than 25 If 25 still seems as if this number is too high there must be some other problem Contact Technical Support for further assistance STEPPER SEE
226. l Files to save the spring data to the USB Flash Drive e Make sure your display firmware and all connected modules are up to date e If you have purchased a new combine or new heads create new configurations for any setup that is different from last fall Remove all old configurations VEHICLE INSPECTION e Check to make sure all cables are properly attached and in good condition e Remove flow sensor and inspect for damage e Check the elevator deflector and impact plate for wear Verify you have the proper clearance at the top of the clean grain elevator Clearance should be between 3 8 and 5 8 0 95 cm to 1 59 cm CALIBRATION SEQUENCE Perform Harvest Calibrations in the following order 1 Distance Speed Sensor Calibration This calibrates the Ground Speed Sensor connected to the display calibrate a backup sensor even when using GPS speed as the primary speed sensor For more information see Calibrate Distance on page 48 2 Calibrate Header Sensor This sets the height when the display stops recording area as the header is raised at the end of the pass Stop height calibration is required for each grain type For more information see Calibrate Header Sensor on page 232 3 Perform a Vibration Calibration The vibration calibration is used to compensate for the amount of force that is measured by the flow sensor with no grain flow For more information see Vibration Calibration on page 233 4 Calibrate T
227. l display raw feedback from the rate sensor When checked the system will display target rate when the application rate is within 10 of the target rate setting e Controller Time Delay setting Compensates for any latency in the control system when changing between different product flow rates during variable rate application The typical setting range for this is 0 1 seconds RUN SCREENS E A Status Bar e B On screen Light bar 5 131 C Mapping toolbox a e D Mapping Function tabs e E Product Control toolbox e F Product tabs Kb e G Function buttons SSS H Task bar e I Main Screen buttons e J Equipment tab The appearance of the Map screen varies depending upon which operation you are performing and your specific operating configuration Two examples are provided below The top picture shows a SeedCommand configuration which includes a KINZE Planter Monitor Module PMM and a Hydraulic Seed Control module The bottom picture shows a Direct Injection module running a NORAC UC5 Boom Height control Areas common to many Map screens are named in these pictures TASK AND STATUS BARS 4 The task bar displays buttons relating to various functions _ of the display These buttons and status indicators include Home Mapping Autoswath Logging and Auxiliary Input Status These buttons are shown in front of a green background when you are at that screen otherwise they
228. l dna eg 124 Seed Monitor Options ecreen eee eee eanaa 126 Seed Monitor Alarms screen eee eee eee eanaa 126 Row Performance screen 127 Virtual Seed Trench eee eee nana ae 128 Kinze KINZE Pl nti r Monitor Oe ler VE 129 KINZE Planter Monitor Module Configuration ccccccccecseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeees 129 KINZE EE 130 KINZE Planter Contguraton eee eee 131 Planter Configuration Settings cccccccececcseeceeeseeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeaas 131 Ond o Peed aE NNO aa E 131 SEE EEE EE 131 ENN O seen ia aa esse sess la estes av led ea ae o aut alt 132 KINZE Sensor COMMGUT AT ON EE 132 Muxbus Sensor Detection for KINZE Planter Monitor rerarernnrrnnnnnnre 133 Order of Muxbus Sensor Installation ccccseecceeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeessaeees 134 Sensor Information for KINZE Planter Monitor 134 KINZE SNE 135 KINZE Magnetic Coil Speed Sensor CGallbraton eee 135 KINZE EdgeVac Calibration rrrrnrnnnnrnrnnnnrnrrnnrenrnnnnenrnnnrnnrnnnrnnnannennnnsnenn 136 viii KINZE Planter Monitor Options eee eee 137 BE Je NAG eo 137 TD ENE 137 KINZE Display Items on Equipment Tab 138 TrouBlesNoeti NC iu emca ate oaie on in n ae a nike iii a i d a 139 Alarms on KINZE Planter Monitor eee eee 139 Application Liquid Rate Control BE NNN 143 AJda 00 EE 143 a e o EA EE 143 Ea MXS eU EE 143 Setup Configuration rrnnnnnnnnvvrnnnnrvvnrnnnnrvnnnnnnrennnnnnnrennnnnnssennnnnnnennnnnsnennnnns
229. l the display to read the foot pedal for the master switch input status MASTER SWITCH USAGE When manually shutting off all boom sections in the field use the foot pedal switch Leave the OEM master switch on the hydro handle ON during field use Using the hydro handle switch may lead to improper field coverage poor AutoSwath performance and inaccurate spray records Only use the John Deere master switch when completely shutting down the sprayer to transport or service the machine TARGET RATE The display must have a non zero target rate entered in the display before the boom valves will open for product application Ensure that the target rate entered into the display and Spray Star match to avoid any unwarranted alarms or warnings on the display DATA COLLEC TION The display will create a coverage map of all product application while logging actual application rate from the product control system flow meter AUTOSWATH BOOM SECTION CONTROL The display will automatically control the boom section on off status based upon previously applied area field boundary and any mapped internal field boundaries 159 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT SPRAY STAR APPLICATION RATE The display will not control the rate based upon the target rate value entered into the system Application rate is controlled exclusively by the Spray Star display SPRAY STAR RINSE CYCLE When using the rinse cycle feature on the Spray Star the display must have the boom s
230. l through the files and select the desired reference ref file Press the green check mark box when finished Wi ref LK 2010 Smith Wheatref B42 2010 Wheat harvest ret 842 d gt Error Messages at Variety Map Import If the display failed to import a variety map it is likely that you saw one of three error messages on the display Error Message Crop type of Variety Reference Map does not match crop type of field Possible Cause A different crop type was selected in the Field Operation Configuration than is shown in the variety reference map Solution Either create a Field Operation Configuration with a different crop or choose a variety reference map with an appropriate crop Error Message Variety Reference Map does not match location of field Possible Cause A different farm or field was selected in the Field Operation Configuration than is shown in the variety reference map Solution Either create a Field Operation Configuration with a different field or choose a variety reference map with an appropriate field Error Message Too many zones to show complete Variety Reference Map Variety Tracking will work on all zones even those not mapped on screen Possible Cause The reference file selected exceeded the allowable memory limit used to load reference maps Solution Continue harvest operations All variety tracking and region information will be logged However you will not be
231. le 84 pause 75 85 perform calibration button 238 pivot 87 cancel 88 engage 88 number of rows 88 row spacing 88 shift by distance 88 shift by rows 88 pivot pattern 78 planter configuration EdgeVac 132 pre harvest checklist 230 pre harvest preparation 230 product name 14 product option 13 add product 13 add product mix 13 import product 13 product settings EPA number 14 manufacturer 14 restricted use pesticide 14 product settings screen 14 product setup 13 product tab 13 255 X3AN add 13 crop settings 15 delete 14 edit 14 edit info 14 edit legend 14 grain settings 15 moisture 14 yield 14 projected path 80 proximity sensor 242 R reference 225 reference file 228 region button 225 options screen 225 relay status 242 remark A 75 85 remove all 85 remove all button 82 remove all patterns 85 remove button 85 remove pattern 85 reset 75 76 85 reset all 232 reset button 80 reset pattern 85 restricted use pesticide 14 resume 75 85 retire calibration 240 rting 227 Rx 225 S S1 239 save 75 save button 80 save pattern 76 82 save pattern button 82 season 16 sensor force 241 set A 75 78 set B 78 set height 232 set max 232 set min 232 setup buttons 11 console 12 256 GPS 12 setup product 13 setup screen 13 configuration tab 12 product settings 14 shift 75 shift by distanc 88 shift by distance 83 shift by rows 83 88 shift pattern 83 show cal
232. lly remove the old sensor Install the new sensor on the planter Plug the new sensor into harness 10 Press INSTALL next to the sensor that was replaced 11 Sensor should say OK 12 Press the BACK button to return to the Home Screen e E Sa e 9 e n d 8 rar st Rev 9 11 Integra Run Screen Reference Guide Integra Service Manual Total Field Product Tabs Target Acres and Actual Rate Rate Buttons GPS Status Eee mph fS E A 35500 40200 EES Mapping Ze 35500 EN Toolbox Manual Valve Control Rate Setup Flow NES Prescription P lati 40 ft 0 in 100 Section pee Indicators Monitor Bar Graph Population 35600 sds ac Spacing 5 9 in Planter Drive RPM Seeds per Revolution entry GEESS EE Met Meter Prime Left 25 rpm Auxiliary Sensor Right GAR Information Tm i Master Switch I PI Status A Dedicated Tab Map View Monitor Tab Auto Swath Tab Mapping Toolbox Tabs 1 Identify and change variety colors 2 Remove markers 3 Rate range identification 4 Press the TAB and then the WRENCH icon to allow changes Tab2 flag icon 1 Make markers for tile inlets rocks washouts etc 2 Press the FLAG icon and then the WRENCH icon to add field markers 3 Press the GREEN PLUS to add a marker to the list Tab3 1 Make Boundaries 2 MUST create an outer boundary before an inner boundary Tab4 1 Guidance Options 2 Set A B lines for manu
233. lly return to the Map screen 2 At the start of the first swath map Point A 3 Drive the initial curve At the other end of the first swath 4 Turn left or right for the next swath The next swath is automatically selected 5 Steer the vehicle so that you center the green lights in the lightbar as you drive forward along the swath 88 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 Notes e Guidance extends beyond the end of curved swaths This makes it possible to get LED guidance back onto the swath if the vehicle drives past the end of a swath The extended swath lines do not appear on screen e You can adjust the degree heading at which the system generates the next pass by doing the following Go to the Guidance screen and press the Options button The Guidance Options screen appears press the Adaptive Curve button At the New Pass drop down menu select Heading Change then use the numeric keypad to enter in the degree number of your Heading Threshold Identical Curve B Note Guidance extends beyond the end of curved swaths This makes it possible to get LED guidance back onto the swath if the vehicle drives past the end of a swath The extended swath lines do not appear on screen 1 At the Guidance screen press the New Pattern button Choose Identical Curve and enter a swath width Press the green check mark button when finished You will automatically return to the Map screen 2 At the start of the first
234. ls are Note The use of OmniSTAR differential requires purchase of a subscription from OmniSTAR Settings explained on the following pages More specific information can be obtained by contacting OmniSTAR e Serial Number OmniSTAR User ID This box shows the serial number of your receiver It may also display your OmniSTAR User ID G Note You will need to know this number when contacting OmniSTAR in order to set up the receiver 62 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 e Differential Source The choices include VBS HP XP and HP XP with VBS backup These three options are described below VBS OmniSTAR VBS Virtual Base Station is a sub meter level of service HP XP The OmniSTAR XP service is more accurate than VBS but slightly less accurate than HP It provides short term accuracy of a few inches and long term repeatability of better than 20 centimeters The OmniSTAR HP High Performance service is the most accurate of the three options HP XP with VBS backup If this option is chosen and you lose your HP XP signal your receiver will automatically switch to VBS e Frequency In the Frequency drop down list box select the geographic region where you are located If you wish to enter a Custom Frequency select Custom Then enter the frequency number in the text box below OmniSTAR Note The display does not come with custom frequency numbers Enter a number only if directed to by e Baud Rate The baud rate rep
235. lue from remote sensing that displays a comparison of greenness and biomass of the scanned plant This value which is taken from a reference scan of a Reference Strip uses a ratio that indicates the health of the plant NDVI and NDRE are examples of different vegetation indexes e VI Minimum shown at Settings screen The threshold below which the Crop Sensor applies the minimum rate This setting is used to apply a minimum amount of N on ground with damaged or diseased crops 189 xH 140 e VI Reference shown at Settings screen The value of a healthy crop biomass used in reference for calculating the proper N application rate The VI Reference value is determined by the creation of a Reference Strip e VI Zero Shown at Settings screen The threshold below which the Crop Sensor applies a zero rate This setting is used to prevent applying N over bare ground or permanently damaged crops TROUBLESHOOTING OPTRX ERROR MESSAGES The OptRx Crop Sensors have error messages to inform the user of complications in communication and performance The following error messages are the most common errors a user might see Follow the recommended troubleshooting steps to correct these errors Error Message Sensor Lost Communication Possible Cause The cabling between the OptRx sensor and the ACS Master Module is disconnected Solution Check all connections and cables for disconnections cuts breaks or crimps in the line Error Me
236. m Rate This setting is a threshold that defines the lowest lbs of N ac kg of N ha the user wishes to apply If the algorithm prescribes an N rate lower than the Minimum N Rate the system shall apply the Minimum N Rate instead e Maximum Rate This setting is a threshold that defines the highest lbs of N ac kg of N ha the user wishes to apply If the algorithm prescribes an N rate higher than the Maximum N Rate the system shall apply the Maximum N Rate instead e Rate Increment This setting defines the rate changes steps the system uses to change the N rate This setting will be in Ibs of N ac kg of N ha e Rate Offset If desired use the numeric keypad to modify the applied rate in the event of significant field stresses during a season such as drought conditions or to make adjustments because of soil type e Growth Stage The Growth Stage of the corn plant Choices are V6 V7 V8 V10 183 XH LdO North American Wheat Settings North America Wheat Settings e Minimum Rate This setting is a threshold that defines the lowest lbs of N ac kg of N ha the user wishes to apply If the algorithm prescribes an N rate lower than the Minimum N Rate the system shall apply the Minimum N Rate instead e Maximum Rate This setting is a threshold that defines the highest lbs of N ac kg of N ha the user wishes to apply If the algorithm prescribes an N rate higher than the Maximum N Rate the system shall apply the
237. m the container Use the numeric keypad to enter the amount Set Sets the product level in the container This button summons a numeric keypad where you can set a certain amount Choose an amount that is below your maximum container level x Tank Alarms A The Container Alarm button which appears at the bottom of the Container Level portion of the Rate screen as shown at left displays the capacity of your tank as well as the percentage at which the Low Container Level warning will sound To adjust these settings press the button and the Container Alarm screen appears as shown 152 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION FR If you wish to adjust your container level warnings Capacity 1000 gal use the following buttons on the right hand side of the D Container Alarm screen to make these adjustments e The percentage button sets the warning threshold according to the percentage of solution left in the tank In the example above the threshold is set at 10 percent e The units of measurement icon sets the warning threshold according to the amount of solution left in the tank This icon is named according to the container s units of measurement you specified during the Controller configuration procedure e The Disable Low Container Level button which appears as a bell with a red slash across it as shown at left disables the Low Container Level warning LOADING PRESCRIPTIONS To l
238. making a coverage map Kinze Mux Bus signal wire is being shorted to a ground source Kinze Mux Bus signal wire is being shorted to a ground source On the run screen Message appears ina dialogue box On the run screen Created a configuration Configuration will not come up in the Field operation Wizard Occurs only when clutch control is not used Displays Bar Graph amp reads a shaft RPM Navigation arrow is following the direction of travel But not moving on the map 1 Press OK to dismiss the error Fix sensor harness based on what sensor displayed in the error 2 If repair cannot be made Go into PMM setup to disable the seed tube until repairs can be made 1 Press OK to dismiss the error Fix sensor harness based on what sensor displayed in the error 2 If repair cannot be made Go into PMM setup to disable the seed tube until repairs can be made 1 Cycle power to the InSight monitor 2 Check cabling Check for CAN communication on the modules required for the configuration This is found in the Run Screen in the System button under the CAN tab 1 Verify PMM firmware is on v1 5 or higher 2 In sensor configuration check to see if shaft RPM sensors are learned and recognized 3 Inspect shaft RPM sensor Check sensor amp the actuator wheel are properly aligned centered and have 1 8 inch air gap 1 Inspect shaft RPM sensor cable connection 2 Inspect shaft RPM sensor Make su
239. may be entered in Management Setup at Management button on page 12 e Start Field Operation button Start Field Operation Opens the Field Operation Wizard where you can enter information relating to your Growing Season Grower Farm Field Operating Configuration Selection Crop Type and Product You 24 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP can also Change Operations and End Operations For more information see Start Field Operation on page 23 and also Field Operation Options on page 24 Region l gt A region is used to subdivide a field into smaller sections The region in which data is currently being logged is listed on the Region button A new region can be created at any time as you are performing a field operation e Region button To change between or add a new region to a field press the Region button and follow the on screen instructions The Operation Summary area of the Home screen is where you can view instantaneous field totals If you are using a multi product configuration the field totals for each product is displayed separately At the bottom of this area of the screen current data is shown for Productivity Average Speed Operating Time Area Complete and Area Remaining e Setup button a Opens the Setup screen For more information see Configuration button on page 11 Opens the Summary Report screen where you can select different configuration settings for Season Grower Farm
240. me button A begins the meter prime ca routine and each meter shaft will rotate the number sol of revolutions as defined on the Air Cart Prime Screen shown A EV RUN TIME OPERATIONS During Run Time Operations Strip Till operators can press the Strip Till Control button I 2 as shown to open the Strip Till Control screen At this screen you can adjust Product Density Conveyor Rate and other settings 47 4936 APM e Each of these settings described below must be set for each individual Product Channel bin e The Product Density and the Conveyor 1 Rate are all stored with each combination of product and control channel Below is an example of a Strip Till with three granular product bins 216 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 9 0 men CE 100 00 100 D 100 00 ER geg 80 M ee 80 00 Flom 53 3 lb Applied 181 6 lb Area 1 86 ac TT fe Swath 30 ft 0 in 100 A E APPLICATION e A Mapping Toolbox e B Product Control Toolbox e C Metering Indicator e D Strip till Control button e E AutoSwath e F Master Switch Status on STRIP TILL THREE BIN CONFIGURATION e Strip Till Control button Displays the status of the product control channel The Meter Shaft Speed in RPM is shown underneath the bin icon the Fan Speed also in RPM is shown at bottom When the fertilizer bin is grey no product application is taking place When product is bei
241. ment and select the implement attachment method 3 Select Operation Type Select the Rate Logging Control operation type if you are using the Hydraulic Seed Control Module or the Stepper Seed Control option Press the blue right arrow button to continue 4 Select Controller Press the Add button and use the Controller Setup Wizard to create a controller 5 Select Device and Seed Command Type After pressing the New button the Controller Setup Wizard appears Use the drop down menus to select SeedCommand as your device Use the bottom drop down menu to select Stepper Seed Control as the SeedCommand Type Press the blue right arrow button to continue 6 Enter number of drives Use the up and down arrows to enter in the number of hydraulic drives on your planter Press the blue right arrow button to continue 7 Enter suggested controller name A suggested controller name appears If necessary use the on screen keyboard to edit the name of the controller 8 Complete the Operating Configuration The wizard walks you through the final steps of the configuration in which you can add additional equipment select a ground speed source and edit the suggested name for the configuration CONTROLLER SETTINGS FOR STEPPER SEED RATE MOTOR DRIVES The Controller Settings used by operators of the Stepper Seed Rate Control feature should be set before entering a meter calibration number or performing field operations To begin go to the Controller Tab an
242. mers who have purchased the EdgeVac seed meters allows the display to receive accurate data from the meters For more information see K NZE EdgeVac Calibration on page 136 KINZE PLANTER MONITOR MODULE CONFIGURATION To set up a Planting Operating Configuration using a KINZE Planter Monitor Module first press the Setup wrench button and go to the Setup screen 1 Create Planting Configuration Underneath the Configuration Tab press the Add button to add a Planting Configuration Select an existing Vehicle from the drop down menu or press the Add button and create a new vehicle with the Vehicle Setup Wizard Press the blue right arrow button to continue 2 Select Implement Press the Add button to create a new implement 129 AZNIy 3 4 5 Select Planter Seeder Type and Attachment Method From the top drop down menu select the Planter Seeder Type setting Then use the bottom drop down menu to select an appropriate Attachment Method Press the blue right arrow button to continue Select Implement Options Under the Planter Monitor drop down menu select KINZE Planter Monitor Module e Split Rows Enabled Check this box to enable the display to log data from the planter s Split Row units For split row enabled planters you will need to create separate implement configurations for Split Row and non Split Row operations e Planter Section Row Shutoff Check the Planter Section Row Shutoff check box if you are us
243. minal A check box check should appear in the box 55 TYNINGHAJL 1TYVNLYIN Once a Virtual Terminal has been enabled a VT SS me NN EH button B Ve will appear in the task bar The display has been specifically designed so users can easily toggle between the Virtual Terminal run screen and other display functions by pressing the VT button 4 07 18 PM 12 21 2010 1 When an ISOBUS compliant implement is connected to the display for the first time the implement WSM sends its graphic interface called the Object Pool to the display Status bar A appears while Object Pools are being loaded This process might take several minutes depending on the number of Object Pools being loaded Once loaded object pools are stored in the display memory An example of a VT screen with two Working Set Master Object Pools loaded is shown If there are multiple ISO implements connected the Ae VT button Vi appears and allows the user to toggle between Working Sets The Working Sets can also be accessed by pressing tabs A or B individually Pressing the wrench button on the VT screen takes the user to the Virtual Terminal Se Settings screen 56 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 Virtual Terminal Settings Auxiliary E Broadcast Clear Saved Assignment GPS Speed Device Interfaces Function Instance Current instance Instance after reboot a following message SETUP e Auxiliary Assignment Allow
244. mplete a swath that is longer than the previous one the display SMARTPATH The SmartPath pattern is designed to give guidance from any previously driven pass This is used in irregular shaped and terraced fields where you cannot run all passes parallel to the previous pass Instead the SmartPath guidance allows you to move to a different area of the field and then resume a previous guidance pattern later Moreover you can use SmartPath to create straight AB patterns within the SmartPath pattern and cycle between any available pattern within SmartPath to choose the appropriate one Creating a SmartPath Pattern 1 Press New Pattern Press the New Pattern button on the Guidance Tab of the Mapping Toolbox 2 Select Pattern The New Pattern screen appears as shown New Pattern 3 Select SmartPath Select SmartPath from the drop down list of available fame ee guidance patterns 4 Change Guidance Width optional In addition to these Guidance Options a default Guidance Width is shown on the upper right hand side of the New Pattern screen This Guidance Width is based on the Implement Width that you specified in Implement SRSA asand Configuration If you wish to change this Guidance Width Lv x enter the new number using the numeric keypad Press the green check mark button when finished Note Guidance Width allows you to use guidance lines independent of implement width 5 Drive the SmartPath The Map scr
245. mux bus signal wire is shorted to ground Solution Press OK to dismiss the error The display then replaces the message window with an alarm text on the header bar at the top of the Run screen This alarm text continues until the wire is fixed or the sensor is disabled Inspect the wire at the first opportunity Error Message Row mux bus data line short to mux bus power Possible Cause Population sensor s mux bus signal wire is shorted to power wire Solution Press OK to dismiss the error The display then replaces the message window with an alarm text on the header bar at the top of the Run screen This alarm text continues until the wire is fixed or the sensor is disabled Inspect the wire at the first opportunity Error Message Row mux bus data line short to mux bus ground 139 IZNI Possible Cause Population sensor s mux bus signal wire is shorted to ground Solution Press OK to dismiss the error The display then replaces the message window with an alarm text on the header bar at the top of the Run screen This alarm text continues until the wire is fixed or the sensor is disabled Inspect the wire at the first opportunity Error Message Row mux bus data line short to mux bus power Possible Cause Population sensor s mux bus signal wire is shorted to power wire Solution Press OK to dismiss the error The display then replaces the message window with an alarm text on the header bar at the top
246. n button Use the top drop down menu to select a Make of Lexion Use the button drop down menu to select any Lexion Model above 670 ii Combine Setup Wizard Auxiliary Step 5 The Auxiliary Step appears as shown Underneath Select Yield Monitor Options check the Quantimeter check box Select geht Monitor Option 6 Follow the wizard s on screen instructions to complete the operating configuration including Header Type Swath Width and Ground Speed Sensor CLAAS CONFIGURATION SETUP SETTINGS After creating an operating configuration that includes a Combine and Header you must go to the Configuration Setup screen and enter information for your specific operating configuration Highlight your particular Operating Configuration in the configuration list shown on the Setup screen and press the Setup wrench button Ta E The Configuration Setup screen appears and this screen s appearance differs if you are using a CLAAS Quantimeter configuration xion Lexion 670 30 ft Platform GPS Implement 30 ft Platform Controller Lexion 670 Pull Swath 30 0000 feet Rows N A Speed Input Grain Calibration Automatic Swath Control Equipment at Map Delays Settings 243 YSALANILNVNDO SI Note Adjustment of Combine Settings and the Header Sensor Calibration is performed through the CLAAS O CEBIS monitor e GPS Offsets For more information see GPS Offsets on page 51 e Speed Input The ground s
247. n gt gt gt Press Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your particular Operating Configuration gt Setup wrench button gt Height Control check box Add Norac UC5 to a configuration by following the above path and checking the Height Control checkbox SETUP CONFIGURATION CF B gt Configuration gt gt gt Press Home gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your particular Operating Configuration gt Setup wrench button gt NORAC UC5 Setup button Norac UCS Setup The NORAC UC5 Setup screen appears as shown NORAC e A Norac Devices drop down menu The drop down menu shows the devices communicating on the NORAC UC5 CAN Bus along with the serial aaa ae number of each device The Firmware Version and EE Hardware Revisions of your NORAC UC5 devices are shown underneath e Automatic Setup Automatic Setup walks through a series of steps that configures the NORAC UC5 electronics to the sprayer hydraulic functions You must perform an Automatic Setup routine after the NORAC UC5 system is installed The following items are configured during an Automatic Setup routine e Sprayer Make and Model e Input module wiring and configuration e Number of sensors and location e Sensor zero point e Valve deadzone and gain values Note For detailed Automatic Setup information see the NO
248. n Control button This button displays green for each injection module when the discharge sensor is detecting flow from the pump Press the Injection Controls button to Prime or Agitate the Injection pump INJECTION DIAGNOSTICS rey The Injection Diagnostics screen provides raw values from sensors verifying that the pump s output is working To go to the Injection Diagnostics screen press on the Device Information button as shown at left At the Devices screen highlight the item marked AL Direct Inject then press the Diagnostics button The Injection Diagnostics screen appears as shown In addition to the Controllers Name and Serial Number it provides the following information Injection Diagnostics e Digital Pump Speed Controller Name Di Serial Number 2008850060 Displays volume information shown in Hz Digital Pump Speed Hz 67 0 Perr EE Analog Pump Speed aca d Displays varying voltage as pump speed is increased or decreased Discharge Flow Monitor Displays information showing that flow is being discharged for every piston stroke 1 Flow Speed Sensor Ratio The ratio that the system derived for calibration 175 NOLLOAFPN J TROUBLESHOOTING DIRECT INJECTION CONFIGURATIONS When controlling a chemical injection pump using the Injection Module PN 4000896 the configuration requires the use of a Liquid Module PN 4000394 The injection control is based off of the vehicle that has been configured
249. n implement switch is not in use select None Press the green check mark button to return to the Configuration Setup screen Equipment Configuration Settings for Rate Control If you are using an operating configuration with Rate Control such as for certain DirectCommand and SeedCommand configurations you must specify Time Dea Equipment Configuration Settings At the Configuration Setup screen press the Configuration Settings button The Equipment Configuration Settings screen appears as shown The example below shows the Equipment Configuration Settings screen as it appears for DirectCommand this screen is similar to that shown for SeedCommand configurations Equipment Configuration Settings sec These settings are directly related to that specific combination of Vehicle Implement and Controller e The configuration name can be changed by pressing the on screen keyboard screen e The Rate Outside of Field selection determines product control channel behavior when the field boundary is exited Zero Product Product application will turn off Last Good Product application will continue at the last value used by the control system Rx Default Product will be applied at the default rate setting 26 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP e Rate Display Smoothing setting Determines how the feedback from the control channel rate sensor will be displayed on the map screen When de selected the system wil
250. n the vehicle exits a mapped field area 9 Name New IRX File If desired rename the newly created irx file from the system assigned default Press the check mark button to complete the shape file conversion process LIQUID APPLICATION DIAGNOSTICS zg Togo to the Liquid Diagnostics screen press on the Device Information button as shown at left At the Devices screen highlight the item marked DC Liquid then press the Diagnostics button Liquid Diagnostics The Liquid Diagnostics screen includes ERETTE the Active Controller Name and the Controller Name DirectLiquid Serial Number 2003750001 Serial Number of the module Other nie Ea 738 information provided includes the Main Agitation Pressure kPa 662 ken Fase Ss Pressure Agitation Pressure and PWM Duty Cycle 2 55 Auxiliary Pressure These raw sensor Flow Meter Signal Frequency Hz readings are shown in kilopascals kPa Flow Meter Pulse Count 0 Note If you selected PWM as the Control Valve then the current PWM Duty Cycle is shown as a percentage number in the PWM Duty Cycle item on the Liquid Diagnostic screen e Flow Meter Signal Frequency Hz allows users to view the frequency generated by the flow meter during product application This diagnostic item can be used to make sure the flow meter is providing continuous feedback to the system 156 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION e Flow Meter Pulse Count provides a rolling count
251. n to the application point e Actuator Clutch Configuration Selecting one of the three available actuator clutch settings Single Bin Actuator Multiple Bin Actuator Main Only Multiple Bin Actuator Main Channel from the Control Valve Configuration drop down menu above determines specific behavior of the actuators clutches on zero rate For a description of the Actuator Clutch logic see Actuator Clutch Logic on page 213 Actuator Clutch Logic Determines Actuator Clutch Behavior on Zero Rate Control Component State Control Channel RPM Commanded to Zero Other than by Master Switch Off Control Valve Configuration Master Switch Off TILL did LS Single Bin Actuator Multiple Bin Actuator Main Only Main Clutch Output Off Channel Clutch Output Off Linear Actuator Hold Main Clutch Output On Channel Clutch Output Off Linear Actuator Close Main Clutch Output Off Channel Clutch Output Off Linear Actuator Hold Main Clutch Output Off Channel Clutch Output Off Linear Actuator Hold 213 Control Component State Control Valve Configuration Control Channel RPM Commanded to Zero Other than Master Switch Off by Master Switch Off Main Clutch Output On Main Clutch Output Off Channel Clutch Output Off Channel Clutch Output Off Linear Actuator Hold Linear Actuator Hold Multiple Bin Actuator Main Channel Fertilizer Blend Setup Dry fertilizer blends are se
252. nage Patterns Import Pattern To import a pattern pat file from the USB Flash Drive use the following steps Field Contour amp W Hous irx Farm Johnston West 1 Press Manage Pattern Grower North Of River Description o Press the Manage Pattern button and the OOS ane Manage Patterns screen appears as shown above leit E Center 40_W 0_00002A07 pat 2 Press Import Pattern VK Contour amp W Hous_0_000029B5 pat Press the Import Pattern button and the File EEE Selection screen appears as shown left 4 SD Highlight the correct file on the USB Flash Drive Use the scroll bar to locate the appropriate file folder Press the green check mark button when finished Export Pattern To export a pattern to the USB Flash Drive first press the Manage Patterns button on the Guidance Tab of the Mapping Toolbox At the Manage Patterns screen press the Export Pattern button The Copy to Card screen notifies you that a pattern is being copied When this process is complete the Copy Log Files screen informs you that the file has been successfully copied Edit Pattern If you wish to rename a pattern first press the Manage Patterns button on the Guidance Tab i Of the Mapping Toolbox At the Manage Patterns screen press the Edit Pattern on screen keyboard button as shown at left Use the on screen keyboard to enter a name for the pattern The new pattern name now appears in the
253. nd controllers Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field Operation Wizard For more information on Field Operation Configurations see Start Field Operation on page 23 SETUP CONFIGURATION OG Halte mm gt LC Se Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt 2 tab gt Controller Settings button The Controller Settings screen appears as shown Controller Settings Pump Calibration rump carsten e Factory Calibration This number is found on the tag of the Digital Pump Speed Sensor This tag number represents pulses per 10 E RE fluid ounces Divide the tag number by 10 and enter this osx E number Once entered this number should not be i changed crave vama Perform Calibration Press the Perform Calibration button to begin the calibration procedure for the Direct Injection pump The pump will not run until this calibration has been performed For more information see Calibrating an Injection Pump on page 172 Factory 11 pin oz Perform Calibration Calibration 11 HS 62 Error A Threshold 30 H E 3 Errar Threshold Rate Response Warning e Error Threshold The user defined percentage of actual rate error allowed before an alarm sounds e Error Delay The number of seconds that the actual rate falls out
254. nfiguration and press the Setup wrench button which opens the Configuration Setup screen AS 2 Atthe Configuration Setup screen press the Grain Er Calibration button The CLAAS Calibration screen 1 388 appears as shown Field Name Region Name BI sl Manual Moistune e Claas Calibration 3 At the CLAAS Calibration screen use the top drop main down menus to select the desired Crop and eem Ee 338 Calibration Instance Then highlight the desired eee name Region in the list The manual moisture setting appears in the bottom right hand corner of the CLAAS Calibration screen as shown Manual Moisture A 14 0 Y 4 Use the up and down arrow keys to adjust the Manual Moisture to the desired value When finished press the back button to exit the screen Note The list shown in the CLAAS Calibration screen only shows loads harvested during the current season 245 YSALANILNVNDO SVVID MAP SCREEN FOR CLAAS QUANTIMETER 1 06 5 0 mer CS Once an operating configuration is Soybeans Soybeans created for a CLAAS Quantimeter D SE harvest configuration and a field operation configuration is created at the 15 9 Home screen you can view map screen u r data An example of a map screen as wet weight used in a CLAAS Quantimeter stomatal 6797 configuration is shown amp 111 For the most part this map screen is similar in appearance to the map screen used in other Harvest
255. nformation related to log files and system backups GENERAL TAB The Setup General Tab is consists of the following General Owner Features Advanced items f i L a Language Country _ Brightness 100 l e Time Date button el Sen 50 English US Calibrate Touchscreen ti I Press button and use the up and down arrow keys to Time Date Operating Units 3 ee era Ic ee adjust the hours minutes A M P M settings month date and year To make these changes effective press Time Zone the checkmark Shutdown button Close Red X button however the time date changes will not be accepted until the display is shut down and restarted Note The display will then shut down immediately If you do not want to shut the display down press the e Brightness and volume percentages To change these press the Brightness Volume button and use the up and down arrow buttons to change the percentage of the Display Brightness and Speaker Volume to the display s brightness according to the available or ambient light S Note Pressing the Automatic box will display the Display Brightness Trim setting which makes adjustments e Calibrate Touchscreen Press this to launch the Touch screen Calibration wizard Calibrate the touch screen by following the on screen instructions 19 NOILVYNSIANOD A CAUTION Do not use any sharp objects to operate the touch screen or the display may be dam
256. ng Configuration that was collecting data with the old calibration Acknowledge the New Grain Calibration warning by pressing the check mark box At the Home screen press the Start Field Operation button and create a new Field Operation Configuration After you have completed the grain weight calibration and a new calibration factor has been calculated in the CEBIS monitor this new calibration is then sent to the display The display then uses the new 244 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST calibration to update all data collected since the time it detected the start of the new calibration No further messages appear in the display Note The New Grain Calibration warning does not appear for the first calibration performed during the season It only appears for calibrations performed thereafter start of the new calibration Note The display does not update any previously collected data collected prior to the time it detected the CLAAS Manual Moisture Setting As with other calibration information the Moisture Calibration is calculated in the CEBIS monitor and then relayed to the display However you can adjust moisture settings for a specific region with the display s Use Manual Moisture setting The manual moisture setting will only be applied to the specified region 1 Go to CLAAS Calibration screen Go to the Home screen and press the Setup wrench button When the Setup screen opens highlight your operating co
257. ng applied the fertilizer bin icon changes color to green Press the Strip Till Control button to display the Strip Till Control screen and settings These settings include Product Density and Conveyor 1 Rate For more information see section beginning at Strip Till Control Screen on page 217 e Metering Indicator The Metering Indicator is shown at the top of the Equipment Tab when the Map screen is shown in Zoom to Extent When the Map screen is shown in the Zoom Details view or Perspective View the metering indicator is shown as a bar that appears behind the vehicle icon DirectCommand controls the conveyor and spinner speed and monitors the bin level The control modules support PWM motorized servo Mark IV 2 Mark IV A and Mark V hydraulic control valves DirectCommand also supports application control of multiple bin spinner spreaders strip Till Control Screen Strip Till Control Channell Channel 2 Channel 3 DAP Product Density Conveyor 1 i hs 0 1008 ftYfrev E Static br Fie led Calibration Calibration e Product Density This density value shown in pounds per cubic foot or ser lb ft 3 is stored with each product Use the numeric keypad to edit value 217 THL di ilS Note For proper machine performance and accuracy you should check the Product Density daily e Conveyor 1 Rate This setting represents the volume of product dispensed by one revolution of the conveyor driv
258. nits Each bar s row height represents that row e population in comparison with the target rate which you specified on the Product Control Toolbox e C Section Indicators Shown at the top of the Equipment Tab when the Map screen is shown in Zoom to Extent When the Map screen is shown in the Zoom Details view or Perspective View the section indicators are shown as a bar that appears behind the vehicle icon e D Product Control Toolbox e E Meter RPM button Appears at the bottom right hand side of the Map screen displays the number of stepper seed motors and their soeed shown in Revolutions Per Minute RPM Pressing the Meter RPM button summons the Seed Rate Planter Control screen where you can calibrate and prime the seed meters For more information see Priming Seed Rate Meters on page 109 and Calibrating Seed Rate Meters on page 109 e F AutoSwath The Seed Tube Monitor Module provides population monitoring for DICKEY john seed tube sensors used on several different brands of planters If you have purchased the Seed Tube Monitor Module you should configure it in the following order 1 STMM Configuration procedure See procedure below 2 Adjust Sensor Configuration and Alarms Press the Seed Monitor Setup button on the Configuration Setup screen This summons the Seed Monitor Setup window For more information see Seed Monitor Options on page 120 as well as Seed Tube Sensor Configuration on page
259. nne 144 Liquid Application Controller Settings ccccccccsseseeeeceseseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneaees 144 Control Valve Settings PWM rannnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnvrnnnnnerennnnnnrsennnnnnsennnnnsnennn 146 Control Valve Seitings Servo Calibrated Reflow and Ramsey Valve 146 Calibrate FSS SUIS asia omiea EE 147 Fence Row Nozzle Indicators A 147 LAG COLICI EAI ON imi a iu sutat ta an atat i dna tu ua dit eu 148 Run Configuration eee ana aaanaan 148 Application Map screen Zoom to Detail 149 Beie og RE 149 Rate Control Product Control Toolbox eee nana 150 Rate Control SENGS seresa EE eE mantendesennayaastadedseeddiestwcmiwans 151 Rate Control Container Level 152 TAn GE 152 TANK EMD E 152 TA ge 1 E E 152 Adjust Container Amount eee eee eee nea 152 WANA PAVING sana atu al mad e i al nt a ai pc a 152 LOEN FE TN e E 153 Showing Prescriptions on the Map Screen eee 154 PENN 154 Liquid Application Diagnostics rrrrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnrerrnnrnnnnrennnnrrnnnnrennerennnerennneennnne 156 Troubleshooting DirectCommand Liquid Applications rrrrnrernnnrrrnnnernnnnennnn 157 John Deere Specific Instruchons eee eee nana 159 MASTER SWITCH INPUT eee nana 159 MAS LEE WT RI EE 159 TARE EA TIE sate negra aa a E eg ef naut a e tal ii i ta inf 159 DATAEN 159 AUTOSWATH BOOM SECTION CONTROL eee eee 159 SPRAY STAR EE RATE kn 160 SPRAT TAR RINSE Ev 160 Control Valve Gettmgs eee nana eee 160 Liquid Product Co
260. not be included Note Enter the number of products that require a prescription Manually controlled products do not require 5 Select Equipment Configuration for Prescription Enter the channel you wish to use for the shape file conversion 6 Select Shape File Product and Units From the product list box make the selection that matches the units that the Rx map was exported for Select the controlling units for product application Press the blue right arrow button to continue Note Select the product and units that the shape file prescription was made for 155 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT 7 Select Data From Shape File From the drop down menu on the left select the column that contains the product recommendation rate The list on the right side of the dialog shows sample data from the selected column Press the blue right arrow button to continue A CAUTION Selection of the wrong data column or unit will result in misapplication of product 8 Default Rate Setting The system assigns a default rate Use the on screen keypad to edit the value if desired Note The only time the default rate is used by the system during product application is if the Rate Outside of Field selection is set to Rx Default This setting is located in the equipment configuration settings portion of configuration setup If the Rate Outside of Field selection is set to Rx Default the default target rate will be used for product application whe
261. nsor Detection for KINZE Planter Monitor on page 133 e Remove button Removes the highlighted sensor of any type e Revive button Allows the display to reattempt communication with the highlighted sensor of any type e Ignore button Tells the display to cease communications with a row sensor e View button Shows the Sensor Information screen For more information see Sensor Information for KINZE Planter Monitor on page 134 132 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING Muxbus Sensor Detection for KINZE Planter Monitor Upon your initial configuration of the KINZE Planter Monitor you must complete the Sensor Muxbus Detection process This process allows the muxbus to detect each sensor on the planter In order for the display to show the correct Planter Monitor information you must complete the detection process for each muxbus sensor Note Be sure that all of your sensors are unplugged before you begin the Muxbus Detection process If any of your sensors are still plugged in the Muxbus Detection process will abort If this occurs unplug the remaining sensors and retry the procedure 1 To start the Sensor Muxbus Detection process make any settings changes necessary at the Planter Configuration screen and then press the green check mark button For more information on these settings see KINZE Sensor Configuration on page 132 Note The Muxbus detection process will only start if you have change
262. ntrol Valve Configuration Options mmc eee 160 SLNALNOXD 40 a1av Servo Control Valve Settings By Manufacturer eee 161 Liquid Servo Settings Descrpton eee aai 165 Liquid PWM Control Valve Settings Description eee 165 Dickey John NH3 Conmversions eee EEN 166 Fon Eee EE 166 Troubleshooting Serial Control Applcatons eee 166 le ee 167 Glossary Of Application Gettnges eee eee eenae 167 See UIE ATO Ea EEE EE 167 Speed Input Gettmge ec ccccseseccseseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseueeessegeeesseseesaeees 167 Automatic Swath Control Gettmges eee eee 167 Auxiliary INPULSENNGS EE 168 Genie SP SC WINS EEE e 168 Fertilizer Default Product Settings eee eee eee 170 Injection Create Configuration mc eee ea eee naa 171 STO ONO AO n RER RR RARI RR RR NR RR ERIN A ORI E NENE N NERA 171 Rate Response Wamming eee eee eee eee eee aaa aaeeaas 171 Flow Monitor Warmmmg eee eee eee nana 172 Calibrating an Injection PUMD E 172 Priming AN INJECTION Humpe 173 Load OMMO MANO e stearsa me oase aaa sei tag la eta a ae 174 Run giele e TE Hl E 175 MAS GTON IAQ e le 175 Troubleshooting Direct Injection Configurations ccccceececseececeseeeseeeeeeees 176 Direct Injection Pump Doesnt Hun 176 BATTERY FOWER PINOUT S screen etate el lata etil ua eta t lo astia tiu 177 Direct Injection Pump Runs Full Speed rrrnnnvrnnnrnonnnnrrvvrnnrvrnnnrrrnnnnsnennn 177 Digital Pump Speed Pin Outs svarer erre 177 Analog Spe
263. numbers that appear below the Boom Icon show the distance between the boom section and the target e Temperature Shows the measurement of the outside ambient air temperature 193 GON DV HON Boom Height Control Options Screen Pressing the Boom Height Control Options button A opens the Boom Height Control Options screen B as shown At this screen you can adjust the boom s Mode Sensitivity and Target Height Mode Crop Target Height 12 in Sensitivity 5 Boom Height Control Options Mode The drop down menu is where you can choose one of two modes Crop Mode E In Soil Mode the UC5 controls boom height relative to the distance from the soll In Crop Mode the UC5 controls boom height ZA relative to distance from the crop canopy 5 12 g e Sensitivity i Adjusts the boom response Higher values make the height control more responsive _ settings range from 0 10 e Target Height User defined desired boom height in relation to the selected control mode BOOM HEIGHT DIAGNOSTICS The Boom Height Diagnostics screen shows all data for individual sensors including Height Roll and Temperature o 90 to the Boom Height Diagnostics screen press on the Device Information button as OF shown at left At the Devices screen highlight the item marked NORAC UC5 then press the Diagnostics button The NORAC UC5 Diagnostics screen appears as shown Boom Height Diagnostics
264. o achieve the proper RPM of the seed meter during planting operations SeedCommand users such as those using the Stepper Seed Rate Controller who are required to manually enter in a Gear Ratio in the Controller Settings window should calculate this Gear Ratio based on information provided below and on the following page The Gear Ratio number is calculated by multiplying all the gear ratio combinations from the Seed Rate Drive Motor to the Seed Meter S Note Gear Ratio number is the number of revolutions of the motor to turn the seed meter one revolution Gear Ratio Drawing For Single Motor Drive Seed Rate Drive Setting Calculating drive gear ratio e A Seed Rate Motor Drive 18 Tooth Sprocket e B Planter Drive Shaft Sprocket Driven 29 Tooth Sprocket of Teeth on the Driven Sprocket of Teeth on the Drive Sprocket Each drive combination Driven Drive from Seed Rate Motor Drive to Seed Meter shaft sprocket needs to be factored for the Total Gear Ratio 106 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING Gear Ratio Drawing For Multiple Drive Combinations Seed Rate Drive Setting Calculating a Gear Ration for Multiple Drive Combinations PE seed Rate Motor Drive 18 Tooth Sprocket Drive Ratio 1 oa ea Drive Ratio 2 Planter Drive Shaft Sprocket Drive 19 Tooth Sprocket Planter Drive Shaft Le Sprocket Driven rss 28 Tooth Sprocket Planter Drive Shaft eee Sprocket Driven 29 Tooth
265. o the tank mix Select a desired mix component from the list box or press Add to set up the product Enter the Amount of the mix component 4 Repeat this process for the second mix component if necessary 5 Add a product carrier and an amount for that carrier by following the steps shown in the wizard 143 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT 6 Last enter a unique name for the tank mix The new mix will appear in the Product List The mix name will appear next to a blue and cream colored Tao symbol a circle with a curved line through it as shown at left SETUP CONFIGURATION We LI gt da gt en gt gt Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration iractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button The Configuration Setup screen appears Screen will _ Configuration Setup Vehicle vary depending Upon your particular operating 5 boom sprayer DirectLiguid configuration This process may include the following Implement 5 boom sprayer Controller DirectLiquid tas ks Full Swath 30 000 Serial Number 2003750001 Sections Device Directcommand Attachment Rear Drawbar Type Liquid root Crop Sensors Pow Meter Cal pls gal 5 00 Auxillary Input Geer Implement Crop Calibrate Swath Control SE As Height Norac Controller Equipment vd Control LES Settings Settings Configuration Settings LI e
266. oad a map based prescription file press the Rate Setup button on the Product Control Sa Toolbox Rate Control Settings The Rate Control Settings screen appears as shown 1 Press the Load Prescription button 2 The File Selection screen appears as shown 3 Highlight the correct irx prescription or shp shape file and press the green check mark button demo Hiquid 3 dryira demo 3 liguid rs demo dry Lige 153 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT Rate Control Settings 4 When you return to the Rate Control Settings screen the prescription rate is now shown on the screen The Load Prescription button has disappeared and in its place is the Remove Prescription button which resembles a minus sign Press the Remove Prescription button if you wish to remove the prescription from the field e A Default Prescription Rate _ B Remove Prescription button 5 When you return to the Map screen the prescription is now shown on the map as illustrated in Showing Prescriptions on the Map Screen on page 154 SHOWING PRESCRIPTIONS ON THE MAP SCREEN On the Map screen s Mapping Toolbox press the Legend Setup wrench tool and the Legend Select screen appears as shown Notice that the Rx prescription button appears at this screen GE 1 Press the Rx button to show a legend of the prescription rate re 2 After pressing the Rx button when you return to the Map screen the prescription rate appears on t
267. of pulses generated from the flow meter during product application This diagnostic item can be used to easily check that the flow meter is providing feedback to the system and also provides a way to check flow meter cabling without changing settings within the system setup TROUBLESHOOTING DIRECTCOMMAND LIQUID APPLICATIONS Problem Boom indicators on the run screen of the display do not turn blue Solution 1 Make sure ground speed is registering a value greater than zero on the display 2 Verify a target rate greater than zero is entered into the display 3 Check the switch status found on the Run screen under System and Input Diagnostics As the boom switches are turned on and off the Inout Diagnostics window should change from black to green if they do not then refer to the installation instructions to verify boom switch connections 4 Check high current connection into the Liquid Control Module 5 Make sure the implement cable PN 4000495 1 is plugged in If plugged in then test for 12 volts on pins A and B Problem Boom indicators on the Run screen of the display turn blue but the booms do not open Solution 1 Check wiring connections for all of the boom valves 2 Verify that the cabling is providing 12 volts to the boom valve on the signal pin Note You can also check for 12 volts on pins 1 10 on the boom connection of the liquid module Problem Boom valves pause up to 5 seconds before turning on by manual control
268. of the Run screen This alarm text continues until the wire is fixed or the sensor is disabled Inspect the wire at the first opportunity Error Message Row communication lost Possible Cause Seed tube sensor stops communicating with the PMM Solution Press OK to dismiss the error The display then replaces the message window with an alarm text on the header bar at the top of the Run screen This alarm text continues until the wire is fixed or the sensor is disabled Inspect the sensor at the first opportunity Error Message Inner or Outer Right or Left Shaft Communication Lost Possible Cause Transmission sensor stops communicating with the PMM Solution Press OK to dismiss the error The display then replaces the message window with an alarm text on the header bar at the top of the Run screen This alarm text continues until the wire is fixed or the sensor is disabled Inspect the sensor at the first opportunity Error Message Left or Right Edge Vac sensor communication lost Possible Cause Edge Vac sensor stops communication with the PMM Solution Press OK to dismiss the error The display then replaces the message window with an alarm text on the header bar at the top of the Run screen This alarm text continues until the wire is fixed or the sensor is disabled Inspect the sensor at the first opportunity Error Message Left or Right SDS shaft sensor communication lost Possible Cause SDS s
269. of the error threshold before an alarm sounds 171 NOLLOAFPNJ Flow Monitor Warning e Error Threshold The percentage of perceived application error based on the discharge flow sensor e Enable Warning The Enable Warning check box allows you the option of displaying the Flow Monitor Warning Calibrating an Injection Pump Direct Injection users should calibrate the Injection Pump at the beginning of each season and any time that repairs are made To begin go to the Setup screen s Configuration Tab and press the Setup wrench button This takes you to the Configuration Setup screen At the Configuration Setup screen go to the second tab titled Injection At the Injection Tab press the Controller Settings button and the Controller Settings screen appears as shown Controliar settings 1 Enter Factory Calibration SE Before entering a Direct Injection Calibration a Factory Zeen Calibration must be entered If you have not already done KE pence KEE penca so enter the Factory Calibration Number by pressing the kos harper ere fen enter eri Factory Calibration button This number is found on the Dn mr sec E tag of the Digital Pump Speed Sensor This tag number represents pulses per 10 fluid ounces Divide the tag number by 10 and enter this number Once entered this number should not be changed Error Delay 55 E h Enable Warning 2 Press Perform Calibration Underneath P
270. off check box to enable clutches I Enable w Row Shutoff 4 If you still cannot get the Row Shutoff Operating Configuration to load on the Field Operation Wizard you may wish to configure the clutch module Press the Configure Module button Row Shutoff Module Configuration 5 The Row Shutoff Module Configuration screen Configuration Complete appears This screen shows the number of Row Seed Clutch Module Sections Shutoff Modules and the sections that each module 1 2006930005 Front 1 4 controls 96 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING ROW SHUTOFF LOOK AHEAD NUMBERS This table references the Turn On Look Ahead and Turn Off Look Ahead numbers for both Electric Clutch and Air Row Shutoff Modules Planter Unit Seed Meter Type On Off Electric Clutch Air Clutch Finger Units Vacuum Note Using the above settings will produce accurate field results However always take the time to check for proper seed placement in the field and make system setting adjustments as needed Do not rely solely upon the appearance of the On Screen map The on screen map will not show gaps and overlaps caused by incorrect GPS Offsets or AutoSwath Look Ahead settings CHECKING AUTOSWATH PERFORMANCE FOR ROW SHUTOFF The settings given in the above AutoSwath look ahead table shown previously have been tested with each clutch and seed meter combination to work for your planter However
271. on Setup screen At the Configuration Setup screen press the Grain Calibration button The Grain Calibration screen appears as shown 237 DNIHOLINON ATAIA Grain Calibration 10 Select Crop to Calibrate Use the drop down menu to select the crop to calibrate Corn Grain Weight Calibration 11 Press Enter Weight eld Name on Name Estimated al Error tar i E acs By default all Field Names are checked Uncheck any a Jana Le 4402 4378 0 5 regions that you do not wish to include in the weight Muri o North30 lt 3 gt 3693 3720 0 7 calibration and press the Enter Weight button North 30 gt 3229 3211 0 6 Enter Calibration Weight 12 Select Region and Enter Actual Weight Measured Weight The Enter Calibration Weight screen appears as shown 3229 Ib at left Select the correct Field and Region and use the Actual Weight numeric keypad to enter the Actual Weight for those 32111 fi regions Repeat this step for each calibration load When finished press the green check mark button Perform Calibration 13 Press Perform Calibration When the Grain Calibration screen reappears press the Perform Calibration button 14 Optional Step Continue with Full Calibration A message appears stating Linear Calibration Complete as in the Sas tau ae example shown at left From here you can continue with a Full KEE Calibration which is more accurate than the Linear Calibra
272. on Wizard Grower Selection Options ehitis jD 8130 rmpterent Rapper 0 00 anfigurati n Operation Summary Productivity ac hr Area Complete d i ac Average Speed mph Arca Remaining 0 0 ac 10 08 48 AM Operating Time 0 00 Distance Traveled 0 0 ft M292010 EEE Lemma tg m And A e Report Details Report Details External Storage Operations Summary Report External Storage Operations Summary Report Eterna Storage Satus 9 aon romer farm Lisi 05 MB moe i l i free Malme 0 Used 2010 Crop Ag Leader bena Tot HEME Frid Operation aie Import Export South K comm pata pete JE a Fr rara en Sail Cardin E Fagan Area och Date Created A Create n k i Crop Residue Level Dsg D i E i f Aima ge T age Type lt i gt ooo on rn1n Report P i N I Jur Temperatur FF Options baat 2 21 18 ance pie lt i gt 2135 Oise F AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A INEN Quick Reference Guide Map Screen Layout GPS Information Device Information Screen Area On Screen Lightbar Speed Map Legend Guidance Pass Map Markers Number Boundary Vehicle Icon Guidance Area Logging Home Map Video AutoSwath Power Indicator Screen Screen Screen AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A l l UNETE Quick Reference Guide Connecting the System Standard System INTEGRA with ParaDyme Fuse
273. onfiguration Setup screen press the Swath Section Offsets button The Implement Offsets screen opens Depending upon your configuration this screen may consist of up to two tabs the Section Offsets Tab and the Hitch Offsets Tab 52 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP Section Offsets implement Oct e Use the first numeric keypad to enter the Section Offsets Hitch Offset distance from the mid point of the swath Enter Left or Right Distance from Centerline section to the machine s centerline Select on to the left to the right to indicate the direction the swath section Is located from the vehicle centerline Enter Forward or Backward Distance from Hitch Point H Use the second numeric keypad to enter 5 ft the distance that the swath section is located from the hitch point Press the checkmark button when finished performance Note Accuracy when measuring and entering implement offsets is required to ensure proper machine ADVANCED SECTION OFFSETS Pressing the Advanced button opens another Implement Offsets screen which implement Offsets Swath Section Offset Locations SE SE SE Sg shows the swath section offset locations a 75008 5 00 ft behind nun HIT Press the numeric keypad button to 2 7 500 ft 5 00 ft behind 3 750 ft left change swath section offset 3 7 500 ft 5 00 ft behind 3 750 ft right measu rements i 4 7 500 ft 5 00 ft behind 11 250 ft right F B Forward
274. onfiguration tab gt Add button gt Application button Application A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle implement and controllers Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field Operation Wizard For more information on Field Operation Configurations see Start Field Operation on page 23 Note You can also use the Manage Equipment button to view a list of specific vehicles and implements Add a Product CG De hb gt rene gt 1 gt 557 Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Product tab gt Add button gt Application Product button Add a Mix We LI gt ia gt ecua gt gt men Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Product tab gt Add button gt Mix Blend button Tank Mix Setup A tank mix can contain up to seven individual components 1 Select Tank Mix from the list box and press the blue right arrow button to continue 2 Enter a Base Amount and Units Note The Base Amount is the total volume of all the components of the tank mix The Base Amount does not need to match the actual volume of product that will be sprayed but is used only to establish the ratio of all products to the total volume 3 Press the Add button to start the process of adding components t
275. or Digital Pump Speed Sensor The injection pump s digital pump speed sensor is used to provide actual rate feedback to the display If the display is not receiving an actual rate the pump will run full soeed and provide a Rate Not Responding warning message See Digital Pump Speed Pin out table below for pin locations With the section valves on the cabling can be tested by pulsing the signal and ground pins to verify the total applied increases it is always best to pulse the pins at least 10 times to make sure the total applied will increase by a noticeable amount DIGITAL PUMP SPEED PIN OUTS Module Auxiliary Connection 3 Pin Conxall 12 Pin Socket Power 5V Sons 5 om e 7 Analog Pump Speed Sensor The injection pump s analog speed sensor is used in conjunction with the digital pump speed sensor to provide accurate rate feedback The sensor is a generator that produces a varying voltage dependent on the speed of the pump The injection module will only get feedback from this sensor when the pump is rotating If the analog sensor is not providing a feedback to the module the pump will run full speed and the user will not have the ability to manually change the speed 177 NOLLOAFPN J ANALOG SPEED PIN OUTS Module Auxiliary Connection 12 Pin Socket gt 9V at max pump speed em 8 Direct Injection Application Error The injection module requires that a pump calibration be performed before act
276. or your particular type of control valve agree with the settings given in the Quick Reference Guide 3 Use manual valve control to see if the rate stays constant Problem Erratic behavior from the flow meter and boom valves Solution Verify that the display firmware and module firmware are both current Problem No boom pressure at the start of the field Solution Before product application begins use manual valve control to build boom pressure Select either Rate 1 or Rate 2 once pressure is set to desired level Enter the pass and allow automatic control to take over once the sections are turned on Problem AutoSwath checked on but booms will not turn on Solution 1 Make sure the ground speed is registering a value greater than zero on the display and not in the covered area 2 Make sure there is a target rate greater than 0 3 Make sure the applicator is inside of the field boundary Problem Booms turn on in the middle of the pass Solution 1 Check the display firmware and module firmware to see if they are the latest version released 2 Make sure the ground speed does not go to 0 3 Make sure the GPS is not losing the differential source Problem Rate not responding error flashing Solution 1 Make sure the flow meter calibration number matches the tag on the flow meter Note For Raven flow meters divide the calibration number by 10 2 Make sure the pump is not maxed out for the flow being applied 3
277. ormation see Implement Switch Settings for Area Logging on page 26 2 Speed Input Setup For more information see Speed Input Settings on page 47 3 Calibrate Distance For more information see Calibrate Distance on page 48 4 AutoSwath settings if using AutoSwath For more information see AutoSwath on page 50 5 GPS Offsets For more information see GPS Offsets on page 51 6 Swath Section Offsets For more information see Swath Section Offsets on page 52 92 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING CONFIGURATION CREATE CONFIGURATION BP gt gt me gt erm gt 1 gt Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt Add button gt Planting button A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle implement and controllers Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field Operation Wizard For more information on Field Operation Configurations see Start Field Operation on page 23 Note You can also use the Manage Equipment bution to view a list of specific vehicles and implements SETUP CONFIGURATION 7 gt gt gt gt gt Hz gt e Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration iractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button
278. ows and Spacing Use the up and down arrow keys to enter the number of rows and spacing When finished press the blue right arrow button to continue Note Do not enter the number of individual rows Enter the number of swath sections that can be O independently turned on and off 6 Enter Number of Implement Sections Use the up and down arrow keys to enter the number of implement sections and press the blue right arrow button to continue 7 Enter Distance from Hitch to Application Point Use the numeric keypad to enter the distance from the implement hitch to the application point from front to back When finished press the blue right arrow button to continue 8 Enter Implement Name Use the keyboard button to enter an Implement Name then press the green check mark button 9 Select Operation Type The Operating Configuration Wizard reappears under which you must select an operation type Select Rate Logging Control 10 Complete the configuration procedure Continue through the wizard by making selections regarding controllers additional equipment and Ground Speed Source that is particular to your planting operation Note After completing this configuration in order for it to become active you must adjust Seed Monitor settings in Seed Monitor Setup For more information see below and also AutoConfig Procedure on page 119 SEED MONITOR SETUP After completing a Seed Tube Monitor Module configuration as described abov
279. p window Press the OPERATOR tab Press the GREEN PLUS Enter the OPERATOR NAME Press the GREEN CHECK Repeat steps 3 thru 5 for all Operators Press the BACK ARROW a eS ose oS a NS Rev 9 11 rar Fr 1 This page left blank intentionally Integra Basic Configuration Setup Integra service Manual Startup 1 Turn display on by pressing the BLACK BUTTON on the back of the Integra display Note At any time pressing the BACK ARROW in the upper left of a pop up window will go back a screen Continue to press the BACK ARROW to get to the HOME SCREEN Pan Tab From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button Press the MANAGE EQUIPMENT tab Press the GREEN PLUS to add a vehicle to the list Press the PLANTING button under Choose Vehicle Type Press the KEYBOARD under Make Enter the Vehicle Make Press the GREEN CHECK Press the KEYBOARD under Model Enter the Vehicle Model 10 Press the GREEN CHECK 11 Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW 12 Press the GREEN CHECK oN ea a T Implement Tab Note If set up with interplant create 2 implements one with interplant and one without If you are setting up Vehicle Implement and Controller tabs in one session begin with step 3 for Season and Operator From the HOME SCREEN press the WRENCH button Press MANAGE EQUIPMENT button Press the IMPLEMENT tab Press the GREEN PLUS Press the PLANTING button under Choose Implement Type Using the drop down arrow under Select Planter Seeder Type s
280. pass when the vehicle turns past the heading threshold e Heading Threshold Enter in the degree of turning angle that your vehicle will need to make before creating another pass Note You should always set the Heading Threshold number past 90 degrees The default number is 110 degrees 86 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 ABOUT GUIDANCE PATTERNS The following pages define available guidance pattern other than a SmartPath or a Straight AB Line e For a description of a Straight AB line see New AB Pattern on page 77 e For a description of SmartPath see SmartPath on page 79 A Pattern A Pattern Similar to an AB line an A line is also a straight line It is defined by a single point on the line the A point and the heading of the line a5 Use thi ttern when wish to mak traight line based conors Ee se this pattern when you wish to make a straight line based on a from A Point compass heading The A line extends 1 mile 1 6 km before and after the A point 1 At the Guidance screen press the New Pattern button Choose Straight AB and enter a swath width Press the Use A Heading check mark box and enter in a degree number Press the green check mark button when finished You will automatically return to the Map screen 2 To map the start of the first swath map Point A The heading of the AB line equals either the previous AB heading of the manually entered heading if the current vehicle is within plus or minus 9
281. pattern list of the Manage Patterns screen 84 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 Remove Pattern Remove All Patterns To remove a pattern from the display memory first press the Manage Patterns button on the Guidance Tab of the Mapping Toolbox At the Manage Patterns screen press either e the Remove button if you wish to delete one pattern file or e the Remove All button if you wish to delete all of them for the current field PAUSE The Pause button allows your display to stop logging points along an AB Line Once this button is pressed a Resume button will take its place at the Guidance Options screen until you press this button and Pause reappears Note If you are using the display to follow a set AB Line and wish to temporarily deviate from this line you can use the Pause button to pause the display s guidance logging activity This feature could be used for example by a vehicle operator who must refill a sprayer When paused the display will continue to give the distance back to the original pause point position e Press Pause button Press the Pause button on the Guidance screen When you do so the place where you paused appears on the Map screen as a yellow ball Note You can pause a pattern even if you have not set the B point yet If you do so the message in the lightbar will read Need B If you pause the pattern after you have set your AB Line then the lightbar will indicate the distance your vehicle
282. peed source can be changed by pressing the Speed Input button This opens the Speed Input screen where you can choose a primary speed source of GPS Wheels or Radar For more information see Speed Input Settings on page 47 Note If you are using a CLAAS Quantimeter you do not choose a secondary speed source e Grain Calibration For more information see Calibration Information for CLAAS Quantimeter on page 244 e Automatic Swath Control For more information on AutoSwath see AutoSwath Sensitivity Settings on page 228 e Header Offset For more information see Header Offset on page 233 e Map Delays Press to change the Map Delay settings A CAUTION Do not change settings from the default value of 4 without specific instruction from Technical Support CALIBRATION INFORMATION FOR CLAAS QUANTIMETER Most calibration information used in a CLAAS Quantimeter configuration is calculated in the CEBIS monitor and then relayed to the display For CLAAS Quantimeter configurations the CEBIS monitor performs calibrations for the Header Sensor Yield Monitor Moisture and Temperature SS Note The calibration created in the CLAAS Quantimeter is a linear calibration When a new calibration is started in the CEBIS monitor a warning appears on the display stating A new grain calibration has been detected Select an operating configuration to continue At the same time the display unloads the Field Operati
283. perations button on the Home screen e msf The msf Management Setup File file format allows the display to import Grower and Field information from SMS software via the USB drive e ref Variety reference map file SMS software uses planting data to create a variety reference map which is saved as a ref file This ref file can then be exported to the display for use with the Automatic Variety Tracking and Automatic Region Changing features MODULE LED DIAGNOSTIC STATES e Off No power e Flashing 1 Hz green Normal operation e Flashing 1 Hz orange CAN bus errors detected error active passive state e Steady orange CAN bus off e Steady red Hardware or initialization failure e Flashing 1 Hz red Firmware download in progress e Flashing fast red Firmware download error COMPANY WARRANTY STATEMENT WARRANTY Ag Leader Technology will repair or replace at no charge any component of the display that fails during normal service while being used in an approved application within two years of the warranty start date 250 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPENDIX Warranty is not provided for damage resulting from abuse neglect accidents vandalism acts of nature or any causes that are outside of the normal intended use of the display Ag Leader Technology shall not be liable for indirect incidental or consequential damages to the dealer end user or third parties arising from the sale installation or use of any Ag
284. ponse Threshold setting Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower e Valve Response 2 Default Value 8 Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error is less than the Response Threshold setting Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower e Allowable Error Default Value 2 Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any conveyor RPM corrections 2 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error e Response Threshold Default Value 15 Determines where the control system switches between using Valve Response 1 or Valve Response 2 speed setting Leaving all other valve control settings at the default value and making a small adjustment to this setting Is usually all that is required to fine tune system performance Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of soeeding up servo valve response 204 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing servo valve response SPINNER SPREADER PWM CONTROL VALVE SETTINGS DESCRIPTION e PWM Frequency Default Value 100 The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at Typical settings range from 100 125 See P
285. ponse is Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the Zero Flow Offset PWM valve Using too high of a Zero 45 33 33 33 Flow Offset value can cause the product control system to not properly control low rates See the PWM valve manufacturer s information for recommended settings Determines the percent of error that Allowable Error is allowed prior to the product control 2 2 2 2 system making any flow rate changes Response Threshold Determines the system responsiveness to rate change Determines the speed of the servo valve Valve Response 1 when product control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting Determines the speed of the servo valve Valve Response 2 when product control error is less than the Response Threshold setting Rev 9 11 ge Fs 15 Integra Troubleshooting Guide Service Manual Integra Hydraulic Drive Planter Drives dialog box not available on the Run screen in the lower right hand corner e Make sure Seed Command is set up in the Controller tab under the Wrench icon and Manage Equipment tab e Under set up of the configuration select Seed Command as Controller Rate Logging Control must be selected If not selected Drives will not be displayed and the hydraulic drive will not run Delete and make a new configuration in order to select Seed Command e Example of completed configuration with hydraulic drive Case IH Kinze
286. ppears press the Calibrate button located below the EdgeVac sensor box The EdgeVac Calibration screen appears as shown Use the numeric keypad to enter the actual value taken from the hand held calibration sensor at the seed sensor Note The appearance of this screen varies depending upon whether you have one or two EdgeVac sensors The example above shows the EdgeVac Calibration screen for two sensors 136 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING KINZE PLANTER MONITOR OPTIONS The Planter Monitor Options window which appears when you press the Bar Graph on the Map screen is where you can make changes to the bar graph s rate spacing display Options include Planter Average Freeze and Scan explained below Display Options Planter Monitor Options e Planter Mode is the default setting for the Rate Spacing Display This setting specifies that the Rate Spacing Display shows the instantaneous average population and seed spacing for the entire planter e Scan Mode specifies that the Rate Spacing Display shows an automatic row by row scan on all the planter s row units displayed in sequence from left to right Display Options Table View e Freeze Mode specifies that the Rate Spacing Display continuously shows only one specified row chosen by the operator Use the up and down arrow buttons to specify which row to freeze Table View Sa FR The Table View Tab shows row data from rows rr Tobi
287. present the display only requires two NMEA Message formats GGA and VTG GGA This NMEA message format is the data fix that establishes your position in longitude and latitude VTG This NMEA message format stands for ground speed velocity in area over distance GLL GSV GSA ZDA RMG MSS Leave these other NMEA message formats unchecked unless you are connected to a third party monitor and have been directed to do so S Note The GSV and GSA settings must be checked in order to view the Satellite Plot 66 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 GPS INFORMATION Information screens is described on the following pages GPS INFORMATION GENERAL TAB General Receiver OmniSTAR Latitude N Longitude W Elevation feet Heading Number of Satellites Differential GPS Information 42 002632283 93 628395273 948 730 183 92000 8 No Diff UTC Time 14 09 18 HDOP PDOP GPS Speed mph GPS Rate Port NMEA 38400 8N1 Frequency N A SNR N A Correction Age N A To access diagnostic information about the GPS signal press the GPS satellite button that appears in the in the upper left hand side of the Status Bar GPS Information then appears on General Receiver and OmniSTAR tabs Information on these GPS e Latitude Longitude Elevation Displays current position in longitude and latitude and elevation e Heading Displays degree heading of travel e Differential If a TSIP receiver is
288. product control Control Channel Content includes the following e Service Provider Information e Grower Information e Field Information e Farm Name and Description e Equipment Configuration Information e Application Information e Date Time Information e Crop Information e Rotation Restrictions and REI e Multiple Target Pests e Applied Product Information e Operator and Supervisor Information INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP VIEW REPORTS To view Smart Reports that have been saved on your USB drive go to the Summary screen and press the View Reports button At the File Selection screen scroll down the list and select the PDF file of your Smart Report Press the green check mark button and the Smart Report will appear in the PDF viewer VIEW MAP To view a Summary Map of a particular Field Total Region or Instance shown in the Summary Report press the View Map button A Summary Map appears similar to the one shown This map shows the rate applied for Application operations and varieties for Planting operations Summary Map 41 SLHOdauH 42 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP EXTERNAL STORAGE OPERATIONS z The External Storage Operations button is where you can copy your field data upgrade display firmware as well as import export and manage files To begin press the External Storage Operations button as shown at left CoPY DATA To copy all logged data files to the USB driv
289. r DEER The Sensor Information screen displays hardware information for each seed tube sensor and also each seed sensor Technical support may request that you look at this window for help in diagnosing a problem Serial Number 5678 To view the Sensor Information screen press the Model Number 1224 Sensor on the KINZE Planter Monitor Setup screen When the Sensor Configuration window appears highlight the row you wish to view and press the View button Baud Rate S600 e ID a unique number for each sensor on the muxbus 134 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING e Serial Number varies for each individual unit of seed sensor and seed tube sensor e Model Number shared by each unit of the same model of seed tube sensor e Baud Rate the speed of transmission between the muxbus sensor and the PMM module KINZE Seed Monitor Alarms To view the Seed Monitor Alarms screen press the Alarms button on the KINZE Planter Monitor Setup Whole Planter screen Here you can change the alarm threshold for ii som each individual row unit or for an individual section or the whole planter To change the threshold of an alarm highlight the row unit then press either a given percentage number 10 50 70 or use the numeric keypad to create your own value The alarm will then sound only when the population drops below that numeric threshold value Seed Monitor Alarms Notes e The default alarm setting is at 5
290. r Graph B as shown e VI Zero The threshold below which the Crop Sensor applies a zero rate This setting is used to prevent applying N over bare ground or permanently damaged crops You may enter in a value either by using the numeric keypad or you may enter in the current VI value by pressing the Set to Current button e VI Minimum The threshold below which the Crop Sensor applies the minimum rate This setting is used to apply a minimum amount of N on ground with damaged crops You may enter in a value either by using the numeric keypad or you may enter in the current VI value by pressing the Set to Current button Note The minimum rate may be adjusted at the Crop Sensor screen which is accessed by pressing the Algorithm Settings button For more information see Crop Sensor Setup on page 183 188 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Reference Strip The name of the Reference Strip that you entered during the Configuration procedure e VI Reference Value of a healthy crop biomass used in reference for calculating the proper N application rate e Algorithm Settings Press this button to access the Sensor Setup screen where you can adjust the rate displayed on the Crop Sensor tab s VI Bar Graph For more information see Crop Sensor Setup on page 183 GLOSSARY OF OPTRX TERMINOLOGY e Active VI The Vegetation Index VI that the OptRx sensors read instantaneously during field operations e Gro
291. r Ratio and Minimum Allowable Ground Speed See Controller Settings for Stepper Seed Rate Motor Drives on page 104 10 OD 1O0HLNOXD 2 3 Prime the Stepper Seed Meter This fills the seed meter with seed and thus allows you to avoid skips in your field See Priming Seed Rate Meters on page 109 4 Meter Calibration a Enter Meter Calibration Number This number representing seeds per revolution is set according to the number of seeds dropped per one revolution of the seed meter See Calibrating Seed Rate Meters on page 109 b Perform a Seed Meter Calibration not always required A new calibration should be performed if your as applied seed rate does not match the actual population planted See Calibrating Seed Rate Meters on page 109 STEPPER SEED RATE CONTROL CONFIGURATION To set up a Planting Operating Configuration using a Stepper Seed Rate Control first press the Setup wrench button and go to the Setup screen 1 Create Planting Configuration Underneath the Configuration Tab press the Add button to add a Planting Configuration A wizard will guide you through the process of creating a vehicle 2 Add Implement After you have completed the vehicle configuration the Implement Attachment Wizard appears Using the drop down box select the implement you would like to use in this configuration If there are no implements in the list press the Add button Use the wizard to add a new imple
292. r calibration 232 header settings 232 heading change 86 heading threshold 82 86 home screen I I I identical curve 83 89 implement tab 233 import pattern 84 import product 13 import variety map reference file 228 import variety maps 227 error messages 228 instantaneous coverage 225 L legend INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 moisture 225 yield 225 legend reference grid 225 Rx 225 legend select 225 boundary 225 clear map 225 data 225 guidance 225 load reference 225 marker 225 reference 225 legend setup button 225 linear calibration 238 load pattern 74 82 guidance width 83 load reference 225 load weight 236 logged area 82 M M1 239 manage equipment 13 manage pattern 74 manage pattern button 84 manage patterns 84 edit pattern 84 export pattern 84 import pattern 84 management setup 15 field 16 grower 15 season 16 map delays 232 map screen 223 flow delay 225 map view button 223 mapping toolbox 74 marker 225 max header height 232 menu toggle 75 metric 224 min header height 232 moisture 224 225 moisture button 14 moisture calibration 235 moisture module 241 moisture raw 241 motor current 242 N new AB pattern 75 77 A point 78 set A 78 set B 78 new calibration 240 new calibration button 240 new pass 86 new pattern 74 77 guidance width 77 nudge 86 guidance options 86 nudge menu 75 O operating configuration 12 options screen 225 226 import variety map 227 P pattern fi
293. r more EH SE information see Legend Settings on page 32 e Press Clear Map to permanently remove all map data from the active field operation e Press Load Reference to load a map from a previous operation performed in that field to view as a background map 149 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT RATE CONTROL PRODUCT CONTROL TOOLBOX During DirectCommand Run Time operations the Product A Tabs are shown in the upper right hand side of the Map screen p lt H Press the Product Tabs and an extended view shows the Rate buttons Manual Valve Control button Prescription button Rate cy Increase and Rate Decrease arrows and the Rate Setup x lt 1 button all of which are described below R NG lt J e A Product 99 6 Ib min e B Target Rate a e C Actual Rate SE e D Rate 1 button e E Rate 2 button Flow Container e F Manual Valve Control e G Prescription button e H Rate Increase arrow e I Rate Decrease arrow e J Rate Setup button e Target Rate The Target Rate is the amount of product that you wish to apply Note In some conditions the Target Rate may increment more quickly than the Actual Rate e Actual Rate The Flow Sensor returns the actual rate of the product that you are applying Note In some conditions the Actual Rate may increment slower than the Target Rate or its numeric values D may vary before matching the Target Rate e Container Level The Con
294. rated If you are running a pull type sprayer and use different tractors to operate the sprayer you should run the Retune procedure each time the tractor is changed If you have a flow control for the boom hydraulics set it prior to tuning If you change the flow setting by more than 20 percent you should Retune 1 field ready state Acknowledge the warning by pressing the green check mark button LOAD CONFIGURATION Starting at the Home page press Start Field Operation Start Field Operation Select a Season Grower Farm and Field at the Start Field Operation portion of the Home screen For more information see Start Field Operation on page 23 192 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Once a configuration has been loaded the Map View button appears at the bottom of the B Home screen RUN CONFIGURATION Engage button If the NORAC UC5 Boom Height Control is included in your Operating Configuration then the NORAC Engage button as shown at left appears on the display s Task Bar The Engage button enables boom height control This button is green when the NORAC UC5 system is engaged and grey when disengaged Press on this button to engage and disengage the NORAC UC5 Boom Height Control This button can be used to toggle back and forth between Automatic Mode and Manual Mode e When you enable Automatic Mode this button turns green and the display beeps three times e When you disable Automatic
295. ray width To adjust this setting select the keyboard button and enter the desired numeric value 151 IOUYLNOD ALVY OICHT RATE CONTROL CONTAINER LEVEL Rate Control Settings When filling or emptying your container you can use 7 the Container Level portion of the Rate Control Settings screen to update the amount of product that 1000 ga exists in the machine s containers B44 gal ei Container Level screen Partially Full Increment 10 00 al E Prescription i E Minimum Flow O gal min i a ae e Tank Fill The Tank Fill button as shown at left increases the container level logged in the display to the maximum volume that you specified for your container in the Container Setup Wizard Leed jiii during the operating configuration procedure Tank Empty The Tank Empty button as shown at left decreases the container level logged in the display Eig to zero Tank Partial Fill The Tank Partial Fill button as shown at left increases the container level logged in the B display to specific amount that you specify in the numeric keypad Pressing the Partial Fill button summons the Adjust Container Amount screen as shown Adjust Container Amount Adjust Container Amount e Add Adds product to the container Use the numeric keypad to enter the amount fii Add product ta the container Remove Remove product from the container Set Set the product level in tho g i e Remove Removes product fro
296. re ID AL BRIDGE display s Devices list as shown in the So iaca de highlighted bar on the screen below For Revision 1 255 255 255 more information on Device Information see Run Time 34209 i i ii Botzen 92 Device Information on page 45 P TROUBLESHOOTING CLAAS QUANTIMETER CONFIGURATIONS During the operation of a CLAAS Quantimeter field operation configuration you may see the following error messages Below is a table describing the cause and solution of the error messages that could appear Error Message Warning Full header width doesn t match Quantimeter full header width Possible Cause The full header width that was specified in the display s Header Setup Wizard does not match the header width in the CEBIS monitor Solution Set the swath width in the CEBIS monitor to match the swath width of the operating configuration in the display Error Message Crop Type Changed The current configuration is no longer valid 247 YSALANILNVNDO SI Possible Cause The display has detected that the crop type specified in the CEBIS monitor has changed to a crop type that is different than what is specified in the display s field operation configuration Either Solution 1 Change the crop type specified in the CEBIS monitor back to what is specified in the display Then reload the display s field operation configuration Or Solution 2 Create a new field operation configuration that includes the
297. re information see GPS Offsets on page 51 e Speed Input The ground speed source can be changed by pressing the Speed Input button This opens the Speed Input screen where you can choose a primary and backup speed source If any source other than GPS is selected the primary speed source is the only setting that you will need to set If you select GPS as the primary speed source then you will also need to select a secondary backup source in case of GPS signal loss For more information see Speed Input Settings on page 47 e Grain Calibration For more information see Grain Weight Calibration on page 236 e Automatic Swath Control For more information on AutoSwath see AutoSwath Sensitivity Settings on page 228 e Equipment Settings Not applicable in Harvest e Calibrate Header Sensor For more information see Calibrate Header Sensor on page 232 e Header Offset For more information see Header Offset on page 233 231 DNIHOLINOIN ATAIA e Combine Settings Press the Combine Settings button and the Advanced Combine Settings screen appears A CAUTION Do not change any of the advanced combine settings without specific instruction from Technical Support e Map Delay Press to change the Map Delay settings A CAUTION Do not change settings from the default value of 4 without specific instruction from Technical Support HEADER SETTINGS Calibrate Header Sensor
298. re the sensor amp the actuator wheel are properly aligned centered and have 1 8 inch air gap 1 GPS Flier point has been logged by the InSight To remove the flier point push the Clear Bounds button under Grower Field Management Problem ISymptoms en Planter monitor is displaying half of the actual population Planter monitor is displaying improper spacing or population of the actual rate Sensors calibrating wait for During InSight Startup calibration Row sensor not detected Population sensor did not begin communicating with the PMM 1 Verify sprocket combination is actually set up for target population 2 In system diagnostics check PMM ground speed is accurate 3 In the PMM setup check of rows and row spacing NOTE Row spacing needs to be setup for the minimum row spacing 1 Verify sprocket combination is actually set up for target population 2 In system diagnostics check PMM ground speed is accurate 3 In the PMM setup check of rows and row spacing NOTE Row spacing needs to be setup for the minimum row spacing Wait for Planter Monitor Module PMM to finish before operation 1 Acknowledge the error by pressing OK Check the LED light on the sensor to see if Sensor is working properly 2 Cycle power on the InSight display This page left blank intentionally ISITE RAS Quick Reference Guide Home Screen Layout Grower Farm and Field Region Setup Field Operati
299. rence Guide Configuration Setup Settings 3 Lens GPS Offsets Antenna Head Speed Input Primary Backup Calibrate Distance Grain Calibration Crop drop down menu Enter Weight Show Cal Numbers Perform Calibration Moisture Temperature Vibration Area Automatic Swath Control wesse Sensitivity Calibrate Header Sensor gt Header Sensor Calibration Header Offset gt Enter Left or Right Distance from Centerline Combine Settings gt Advanced Combine Settings Map Delays Start of Pass End of Pass AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A TESTERS Quick Reference Guide Management Setup Settings Add Delete Edit Add Delete Set Active Season Reminder Farm Field Add Field Information Delete Boundary File Selection Copy to Card Clear Boundary Add Delete Operator Information AL 2005979 ENG Rev A AF 602 0285 01 A l UNEREN Quick Reference Guide Console Setup Settings General Tab Brightness Volume Time Date Time Zone Language Country Operating Units Calibrate Touchscreen Enable Video Owner Tab Select Owner Edit Info Import Image lear Image Features Tab gt LOCK Advanced Tab Key Switch Standby About Export Data Files on Shutdown Export Data Files Export Diagnostic Files Create Backup Restore Backup Clear Internal Memory Copy Debug Files Clear Debug Files Remove Patterns View Module Hardware Advanced Parameters Service Mode AL 2005979 EN
300. resents the speed at which your receiver obtains information from the satellite Note You should always keep the baud rate set at 1200 e AutoSeed Fast Restart Checking this box before the vehicle is shut down allows the receiver to utilize shutdown time to acquire the appropriate satellites in order to ensure a quick and efficient startup This reduces the time taken for satellite convergence after startup and thus increases accuracy in the field the receiver has a clear view of the sky Do not move the vehicle before powering up again Note To get the most benefit from AutoSeed technology you should shut down the vehicle in a place where OMNISTAR SETTINGS GPS 2500 CZ gt gt ge gt OmniSTAR Differential Source drop down menu gt Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt GPS button gt OmniSTAR from Differential Source drop down menu gt Setup wrench button 63 TI N OmniSTAR Setup OmniSTAR ID Provider Settings 1802697 Automatic Tuning Differential Source VBS Frequency Custom Custom Frequency GGA Baud Rate 1200 Convergence Threshold related to using satellite differential correction vary based upon your geographic location Setup details are Note The use of OmniSTAR differential requires purchase of a subscription from OmniSTAR Settings explained on the following pages More specific information can be obtained by contacting OmniSTAR e Serial Num
301. roblem Rate changes on the display but not on the controlled console Solution 1 Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate module 2 Check the settings specific to your controlled console For more information refer to the Quick Reference Guide 3 Check cabling and all connections 4 Disconnect the serial connection and determine if the controller is functioning properly without the display Problem The display rate and serial controlled rate do not match Solution 1 Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate Module 2 Check to make sure the nominal rate in the display matches the nominal rate in the serial controlled console 221 TIL did LS FERTILIZER DEFAULT PRODUCT SETTINGS Abbreviated Percentage in terms of lbs 100 Ibs name for display and predefined name for SMS Ammonium nitrate Ammonium Material Density 222 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST YIELD MONITORING RUN TIME ENVIRONMENT MAP SCREEN The screens shown below are for a Harvest configuration In order for you to view the Map screen you must first select a Season Grower Farm and Field at the Start Field Operation portion of the Home screen For more information see Start Field Operation on page 23 Once a configuration has been completed the Map View button appears at the bottom of the B Home screen Press the Map View button and the Map screen app
302. row button to continue 6 Enter Simulated Target Rate Enter the simulated target rate of the calibration procedure Press the blue right arrow button to continue 7 Press Start Press the green colored Start button to begin dispensing the seed 8 Dispensing Seed The seed meter turns for five revolutions As the seed meter dispenses seed the button will change its color to red and a message informs you that the seed dispensation is in process 9 Seed Dispensing Complete When the meter is finished dispensing seed the button will change back to its original green color and will once again display the word Start Press the blue right arrow button to continue 10 Enter Number of Dispensed Seeds Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of dispensed seeds that you counted in Step 8 Press the blue right arrow button to continue Note The meter calibration will be calculated from the actual seed amount dispensed 110 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING RATE CONTROL MAP SCREEN r e The map screen shown below displays a two section SeedCommand configuration o running a Variable Rate Control geg configuration that includes two Hydraulic _s Y Seed Meters and also Row Shutoff with AutoSwath Because the configuration is Ls for a split planting operation with two spies soma Varieties these two varieties are shown with different colors on the map Soybeans Varia bis etal
303. rvnnnrrvnnnrrrnnnrrnnnrrennnrennnnr 17 Ee 18 DIS OIA SEN a E A E 19 16 1 EEE 19 MT 20 FAU and 21 Unlocking Features eee na eee 21 OND 21 Run Screen FIT 23 FE FINOG stire eee en au aie tt tan aa aan aie Sean 24 Field Opera LO OD UDE E 24 Home Screen After Configuration eee aaa 24 CONUL SN STEN 25 Equipment Configuration Settings eee eee eee eee 26 Implement Switch Settings for Area Logging eee 26 Equipment Configuration Settings for Rate Control 26 Run ecreeng E 27 ET ae SELIS e 27 GRS SIO ea Be e ee 29 PIANO IG TOODO E EN Map Legend TAD E EN Led ic SE LII e 32 MoO NAKS LAD EE 33 Edit Markers eee eee eee eee eee aaa 33 ele CO del 33 Changing Marker Icons eee eee nana 34 OUI AY El E 34 Boundary SENOS E 35 Create Boundam eee eee nana 35 PAPIR 35 Editing lei Diet 35 YA o o EEE E ets ee oes MRI NI seca PR RIN RRC RR RE NI NIN NE SRR 36 Reports UT PN 37 Report Details ee 37 ENN 37 Sole GREENE EE 38 DINE co sss o etala nete 0 pita ta ei te ia at i ee cee al 38 Opal ele 39 OAS ee E 39 Control Channel Report Content 40 VON PROPON arere E EEE 41 EE 0 otita mai ba t tic aa a lit no a tz 41 External Drive External Storage Operations cccecccecceceeceeceeeceeeeeceeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeseeeeeas 43 Ziele 43 WIC AOS adr VU ee 43 MOTE a E 43 616 EEE 43 leet E IES c iata aduca re eten etalate tal td vo tsi e ct tit a 44 POISE FIOS EREI N E RN SI RR N SE SI IN RI RR PN INA N T
304. s of anhydrous ft Formula for flow meter calibration for Dickey John reading pounds of Nitrogen Flow sensor constant pulses in X 1728 in ft X 4 22 Ibs of N gal Density Ibs of N ft3 Note The flow sensor constant is tagged on the Dickey John flow meter The density setting comes from a O chart in the Dickey John documentation and is not provided in this manual TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONTROL APPLICATIONS Problem Rate changes on the display but not on the controlled console Solution 1 Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate module 2 Check the settings specific to your controlled console For more information refer to the Quick Reference Guide 3 Check cabling and all connections 4 Disconnect the serial connection and determine if the controller is functioning properly without the display Problem The display rate and serial controlled rate do not match Solution 1 Verify the current firmware is running on the display and the Application Rate Module 2 Check the percent rate change Refer to the Quick Reference Guide for more information controlled console 166 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION MISCELLANEOUS GLOSSARY OF APPLICATION SETTINGS Configuration Settings e Rate Outside of Field Rate that will be used outside of the field boundary Zero stops product application Last Good uses the previous rate before exiting the boundary Rx Defa
305. s products and Grower Farm Field Management data structure on the USB drive Backup files are stored using the ibk file format Restore Backup Press to restore a backup file from the external data drive to the internal memory of the display Clear Internal Memory Press this button to clear the internal memory of the display The system will present a warning dialog box and ask if you would like to create a backup file prior to clearing the memory A CAUTION Once you clear the system s internal memory this information is deleted and cannot be restored e View Module Firmware Displays the Module Firmware Management screen which Is a list of all firmware modules and firmware versions that are available for the display Note The Module Firmware Management list includes module firmware that you may not be running Import Imports any firmware stored on the USB drive into the display memory Direct Upgrade Upgrades an individual module directly from the USB Remove Removes unwanted module firmware from the Module Firmware Management list Note Pressing the Remove button does not remove firmware from the module itself It merely removes the upgrade file from the display e Remove Patterns Pressing this button permanently erases all guidance patterns from the display s memory 22 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 SETUP RUN SCREEN START FIELD OPERATION The start of field operations begins after you set
306. s available after adding product components is shown at the bottom of the on screen list box 8 Enter Manufacturer name if applicable Use the on screen keyboard to enter a unique name for the blend 9 Press the check mark button to complete the process of setting up the dry blend The new Dry Blend now appears in the Product List LOAD CONFIGURATION Starting at the Home page press Start Field Operation Start Field Operation Select a Season Grower Farm and Field at the Start Field Operation portion of the Home screen For more information see Start Field Operation on page 23 Once a configuration has been completed the Map View button appears at the bottom of the B Home screen RUN CONFIGURATION Press the Map View button to see the Map screen The map below is displayed in Zoom to B Detail view Below is an example of a Spinner Spreader Granular Product Control applying two products 198 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION 5 5 men Di A Mapping Toolbox e B Product Control Toolbox e C Conveyor Indicator e D Spreader Control button mm e E AutoSwath pave e F Master Switch Status on A E SPINNER SPREADER WITH TWO BIN CONFIGURATION e Spreader Control button Displays the status of the product control channel The Conveyor Speed in RPM is shown underneath the bin icon the Spinner Speed also in RPM is shown at bottom Press the Spreader Control button to display
307. s in the following order AN G gt ae ie a SDS Sensors d i zi b EdgeVac Sensors c Pneumatic Down Pressure d Seed Scale Sensor Air Compressor Sensor and ASD Sensor Note When the row unit sensor is plugged in the display will beep once and show the status as Calibrating C When calibration is complete the display will beep again and display either OK or Slow 5 Resolve Any Possible Errors When the Muxbus Detection Process begins each row unit will display N A Not Available underneath the status But as the Muxbus Detection process takes place each row unit should state Calibrating for a time then should indicate OK After calibration the sensor status displays either one of two different States e OK The sensor is working and is communicating at 9600 baud e Slow The sensor is working but is communicating at 2400 baud Note Some older KPM I II and III systems have slower sensors with black connectors that communicate C at a 2400 baud rate The KPM I Il and III systems with blue connectors communicate at a 9600 baud rate A slower baud rate does not result in decreased performance 6 The display beeps once when the row unit sensor is plugged in and will beep again when calibration is complete 7 Detect Complete When the Muxbus Detection process is complete a message displays stating All sensors found sensor Information for KINZE Planter Monito
308. s not apply if you have a self propelled sprayer Instead proceed to step 5 a Use the drop down menu to select the correct Implement Attachment Method and press the blue right arrow button to continue b Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate swath width and press the blue right arrow button to continue c Use the up and down arrow buttons to enter in the number of boom sections Press the blue right arrow button to continue d The section numbers and swath widths of the sections are displayed in the next screen If necessary adjust the boom widths by pressing on the section number and use the numeric keypad to enter the actual measured width of the boom section Repeat the process for every boom section until each is correct Press the blue right arrow button when complete Note Individual boom widths must equal the total e Press the numeric keypad to enter the distance from hitch to application point When complete press the blue right arrow button O Note The distance settings must be measured accurately for the AutoSwath feature to work properly f Implement Options Press the OptRx Crop Sensor check box then use the up and down arrows to enter in the number of Crop Sensors g Enter an implement name by using the keyboard button to type in the preferred name When complete press the green check mark button 4 Select Operating Mode The Operating Configuration Wizard reappears and you are
309. s on the Map sm screen s Guidance Tab by pressing the Menu Toggle button as shown at left The Menu Toggle button allows you to switch between pattern settings and Nudge settings The Nudge screen is where you can make adjustments to Nudge settings To go to the Nudge screen press the Guidance Options button on the Guidance Tab Guidance Options The Nudge screen appears as shown e Use the numeric keypad to enter an increment distance that the swaths will move with each successive press of the left or right arrows buttons on the Guidance Tab e To clear out the adjustment and go to the Original position press Clear Nudge Increment Note The Nudge setting is only available with SmartPath AB A and Pivot patterns ADAPTIVE CURVE If you chose Adaptive Curve as your pattern option at the New Pattern screen see New AB Pattern on page 77 and also Adaptive Curve on page 88 then the Adaptive Curve button appears on the Guidance Options screen This button opens the Adaptive Pattern Options screen At this screen you can choose pattern options that tell the system where to log a new pass These options include e New Pass This sets the conditions for the display to log a new pass Select either Area Count or Heading Change Area Count generates the next pass based on coverage area of the previous pass The display must be logging coverage data in order to generate the next pass Heading Change logs the next
310. s screen appears as shown 246 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST Notes Grain Harvest Diagnostics e The Grain Harvest Diagnostics screen displays different information than the Diagnostics screen that appears for other Harvest configurations This information is Cal Factor 1 35 Engine Hours 1395 6 Header Segments 10 Moisture 18 6 Threshing Status OFF Total Distance 182168 6 ft relayed from the CEBIS monitor Temperature 73 4 F Separator Hours 1250 5 Distance Field 164042 ft Header Down Chopper Hours 1248 2 Distance Road 18126 6 ft m R Ground Speed 5 5mph Total Fuel 290 6gal Total Yield 1090 7T For specific information regarding Density 60 Ib bu Total Fuel Field 178 3 gal Total Yield Dry 1019 9T settings shown on this screen contact Header Width 29 9ft Total Fuel Road 112 3gal Fuel Rate 2 6 gal h i Active Width 29 9ft Active Segments 10 Calibrated Flow 2058 4 bu h Technical Support Grain Type 3 Engine Speed 1112 rpm Header Pos 25 Bridge Module The Bridge Module routes communication between e A CAN Bus e B ParaDyme CAN Bus o e Ol C CLAAS CAN Bus Three indicator lights verify communication received from O these systems A green light indicates good communication Le an amber light indicates no communication me Es ee When the Bridge Module is communicating ee age with the display it should appear on the gegen Firmwa
311. s the user to assign implement functions to ISO compatible inputs e Broadcast GPS Speed checkbox Checking this box allows the implement to use GPS ground speed that has been gathered by the display e Clear Saved Device Interfaces Allows operator to clear the Object Pools sent to the display from the implement WSM After the object pools have been cleared the next time the implement is connected the object pools will be transferred from the implements WSM to the display again When this button is pressed a warning dialogue box appears with the Are you sure you want to clear the saved interface files from all virtual terminal devices Each device will resend its interface the next time it is connected AUXILIARY ASSIGNMENT Virtual Terminal Settings Auxiliary E Broadcast Clear Saved Assignment GPS Speed Device Interfaces Function Instance Current instance Instance after reboot Auxiliary Mappings Function pa Input JAN Inputs Fala Faia HE NMAPPE Press the Auxiliary Assignment button A on the Virtual Terminal Settings screen to access the Auxiliary Mappings screen The Auxiliary Mappings screen allows the user to assign implement functions to ISO compatible inputs The number of functions and inputs shown on the Auxiliary Mappings screens will vary depending on the implement and input devices connected to the display An example is shown at the left 57 IVNINIYS LL 1TYVNLYIN No
312. screen list box 8 Enter Manufacturer name if applicable Use the on screen keyboard to enter a unique name for the blend 9 Press the check mark button to complete the process of setting up the dry blend The new Dry Blend now appears in the Product List LOAD CONFIGURATION Starting at the Home page press 214 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Start Field Operation Start Field Operation Select a Season Grower Farm and Field at the Start Field Operation portion of the Home screen For more information see Start Field Operation on page 23 Once a configuration has been completed the Map View button appears at the bottom of the B Home screen RUN CONFIGURATION Press the Map View button to see the Map screen The map below is displayed in Zoom to B Detail view Meter Prime a LE EE Strip Till Control button i The Strip Till Control screen appears Press the Prime button to access the Air Cart Prime screen 215 TILL did LS Air Cart Prime The Air Cart Prime screen appears with input buttons for each channel used The setting determines the revolutions __ Revolutions necessary to prime the meter shaft Settings are independent B gt Ge a by channel and can be entered using the numeric keypad Channel E si eg A Start Prime Channel 3 B Channel 1 Revolutions C D D Channel 3 Revolutions Channel 2 Revolutions The Start Pri
313. sets For more information see Swath Section Offsets on page 52 e Controller Settings For more information see information in the SeedCommand and DirectCommand chapters e Calibrate Pressure Used in DirectCommand Liquid Application configurations 25 NAIYDSG NNYH EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION SETTINGS Press the Configuration Settings button on the Configuration Setup screen to view or edit the name of your Equipment Configuration Settings The appearance of this button will vary depending upon whether you are using a Area Logging operating configuration with or without an implement switch or whether you are using Rate Logging Control for a DirectCommand or SeedCommand operating configuration Area Logging settings are explained below If you have an operating configuration with Rate Control see Equipment Configuration Settings for Rate Control on page 26 Implement Switch Settings for Area Logging If you are using an Area Logging Site Verification operating configuration meaning that the configuration does not use Rate Logging or Rate Control then you must specify an Implement Switch Setting At the Configuration Setup screen press the Configuration Settings button Equipment Configuration Settings Tractor model Sprayer Implement Switch Polarity Standard The Equipment Configuration Settings screen appears as shown If you will be using an implement switch choose Standard or Reversed polarity If a
314. splay Configure the Hydraulic Seed Rate Control module in the following order 1 Configure Hydraulic Seed Rate Control module See Hydraulic Seed Rate Control Configuration on page 99 2 Enter Controller Settings Include the Max Meter Speed Gear Ratio and Minimum Allowable Ground Speed See Controller Settings for Hydraulic Seed Rate Motor Drives on page 100 3 Prime the Hydraulic Seed Meter This fills the seed meter with seed and thus allows you to avoid skips in your field See Priming Seed Rate Meters on page 109 4 Meter Calibration a Enter Meter Calibration Number This number representing seeds per revolution is set according to the number of seed dropped per one revolution of the seed meter For more information Calibrating Seed Rate Meters on page 109 b Perform a Seed Meter Calibration not always required A new calibration should be performed if your as applied seed rate does not match the actual population planted For more information Calibrating Seed Rate Meters on page 109 HYDRAULIC SEED RATE CONTROL CONFIGURATION To set up a Planting Operating Configuration using a Hydraulic Seed Rate Control first press the Setup wrench button and go to the Setup screen 1 Create Planting Configuration Underneath the Configuration Tab press the Add button to add a Planting Configuration A wizard will guide you through the process of creating a vehicle 2 Add Implement After you h
315. ss the blue right arrow button to continue 7 Enter Number of Boom Sections Use the up and down arrow keys to enter the number of sections of the implement Press the blue right arrow button to continue 8 Enter Boom Section Widths from Left to Right To edit any of the boom values select the desired section from the list and press the numeric keypad to enter in a new width Press the blue right arrow button to continue 209 THL di ilS 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Enter Distance from Hitch to Application Point Enter the distance from the hitch to the application point from front to back using the numeric keypad Press the blue right arrow button to continue Enter Implement Name Use the on screen keyboard button to enter a name for the implement Press the green check mark button to continue Select Operating Mode Use the drop down menu to select Rate Logging Control then press the blue right arrow button Select Controller Press the Add button to add a controller then press the blue right arrow button Select Controller Device and Device Type Select DirectCommand from the Device drop down list box Scroll down on the Direct Type list box and select Granular Strip Till Control Press the blue right arrow button to continue Enter Suggested Controller Name A default name of DirectStrip Till appears Press the green check mark button or use the on screen k
316. ss to set the season selected in the Summary list box to the active season e Season Reminder button Press to set the date that the system will prompt the user to create a new season FIELD Grower Season Field In the display farms are subdivided into fields You can associate Field names with a particular Grower If the display will be used Boundary for multiple Growers enter each Grower Farm Field business name and associate the field names Jones Farm i with the correct grower when the fields are set up within the system In the Field Tab select a Grower underneath the drop down menu at the top Each farm of that particular grower is shown in a list with the fields within that farm as subcomponents e Add button Press to add a Field INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 e Delete button SS Press to delete a Field e Edit button SETUP Edit an existing name of a Field by highlighting that name and pressing button e Setup Tool button Edit the Farm Name and Field Name information by highlighting that name and pressing button The Field Information screen appears as shown Field Information Field North Field caus Township Washington E FSA Area 75 01 ac Legal Description Range R23W Section 34 Area shown in the total acres hectares of the field e FSA Number The Field Information screen opens showing the name of that field in the Title Bar Field N
317. ssage Bad Data Possible Cause The sensors are either too far from the crop or too close to the crop Solution Adjust the height of the sensor to approximately 30 inches 76 cm above the crop canopy by adjusting the boom height or the height on the crop sensor bracket Error Message Sensor Failure Possible Cause The sensors are either too far from the crop or too close to the crop Solution Adjust the height of the sensor to approximately 30 inches 76 cm above the crop canopy by adjusting the boom height or the height on the crop sensor bracket Error Message Sensor Failure Possible Cause There has been a drop in voltage to the OptRx Crop Sensors Solution Check voltage on the high current power cable to ensure voltage provided to the sensors is approximately 12 V Error Message Too Few Sensors for Application Possible Cause The OptRx configuration must have at least two working sensors to make an N rate recommendation 1 There has been a drop in voltage to the OptRx Crop Sensors or 2 The OptRx Crop Sensor is not detecting communication from the OptRx Crop Sensor Module Solution Perform the following actions depending upon the possible cause of the error If 1 check cabling If 2 check the OptRx Diagnostic screen to determine if the OptRx Crop Sensors are still communicating 190 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION NORAC UCS ADD TO A CONFIGURATION E DB gt Configuratio
318. stem when the sections are turned off To see what these numbers should look like for Row Shutoff Modules see Row Shutoff Look Ahead Numbers on page 84 Note To use AutoSwath for planting operations you are required to use a 5 Hz or higher GPS output rate d AutoSwath control will not allow sections to be turned on until the master and planting section switches are on If you have less than a 5 Hz GPS output rate and you select AutoSwath a warning appears telling you that AutoSwath Control is not available at less than 5 HZ GPS OFFSETS 3 D gt gt gt m gt offsets 51 SONILLAS Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt GPS Offsets button After completing the process of setting up a Vehicle you must configure GPS Offsets The GPS Offsets define where the machine s rear axle and hitch is in relation to the GPS antenna These settings are used by mapping The GPS Offsets settings consist of two tabs the Antenna Tab and the Hitch Tab ANTENNA OFFSETS TAB At the Antenna Tab enter the distance from locations on the vehicle to the antenna e Measure and enter the horizontal distance from the rear axle to the position of the GPS antenna Select IN FRONT or BEHIND to indicate the position of the antenna in relation to the rear axle e Measure and enter the horizontal distance from the c
319. stored with each combination of product and control channel 199 GEIWKET EK Spreader Control screen Spreader Control 8 Spread Width Channel WERNER Use the numeric keypad to edit the value son E Sep Spinner Speed Product Spinner Speed Feed Gate 1 in The spinner speed required for accurate product placement in relation to the spread width setting Spread Width Sapa 0 256 trev fig The spinner speed is controlled automatically based upon this setting when the system uses an optional PWM spinner speed control valve To accurately determine Spinner Speed settings you should perform a spread pattern catch test See Spreader Control Static Calibration on page 202 e Product Density This density value shown in pounds per cubic foot or Ib ft 3 is stored with each product Use the numeric keypad to edit if needed Note For proper machine performance and accuracy you should check the Product Density daily e Feed Gate 1 Opening Represents the Feed Gate opening for Conveyor 1 Measure the depth of product on the conveyor to ensure accurate feed gate setting value e Conveyor 1 Rate This setting represents the volume of product dispensed by one revolution of the conveyor drive shaft cubic foot per revolution or ft 3 rev This number is shown with the assumption that the conveyor shaft has a 1 inch gate opening This conveyor rate remains constant regardless of the height of the feed g
320. swath map Point A 3 Drive the initial curve At the other end of the first swath map Point B 4 Turn left or right for the next swath The next swath is automatically selected 5 Steer the vehicle so that you center the green lights in the lightbar as you drive forward along the swath e B Obstacle 89 AONVGINS 90 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 TILLAGE TILLAGE RUN TIME ENVIRONMENT MAP SCREEN The screen shown below is for a Tillage configuration In order for you to view the Map screen you must first set up a Season Grower Farm and Field at the Start Field Operation portion of the Home screen For more information see Start Field Operation on page 23 Once a configuration has been completed the Map View button appears at the bottom of the Home screen Press the Map View button and the map screen appears as shown of the Map View button changes For additional information on Map screen items see Run screens on page 27 ABOUT TILLAGE CONFIGURATIONS Note Pressing the Map View button will cycle between the available map screen views and the appearance 40n CE A GPS Status D B Total Field Acres e C Ground Speed e D Diagnostics button e E Map Legend e F Logging Status button e G AutoSwath e H Map View button e Home button To set up a Tillage Operating Configuration first press the Setup wrench button and go to the Setup screen 1
321. t de ed 3 Pin WP Shroud Direct Injection Inlet Restriction The injection pump has a vacuum switch that is used to warn operators of any Make mua way restriction at the inlet of the pump The sensor is a normally closed switch that SR ve opens if a restriction is encountered in the injection system A warning will be displayed for the operator if the vacuum switch opens due to restriction See table below for pin locations The operator can test the system by unplugging the sensor which will trigger the warning If the operator jumps pins A and C the warning will end Check for plugged strainer on inlet of the pump Refer to injection pump manual to test vacuum switch VACUUM SWITCH PIN OUTS Module Auxiliary Connection 12 Pin Socket 3 Pin WP Shroud Power 12V Controller Settings Direct Injection Pump Calibration Pump Calibration Setting e Factory Calibration The Factory Calibration Number is found on the tag of the Digital Pump Speed Sensor This tag number represents pulses per 10 fluid ounces Divide the tag number by 10 and enter this number Once entered this number should not be changed e Perform Calibration Press the Perform Calibration button to begin the calibration procedure for the Direct Injection pump The pump will not run until this calibration has been performed 179 NOLLOAFPN J Rate Response Warning e Error Threshold The user defined percentage of actual rate error allowed before
322. t the Home page press Start Field Operation Start Field Operation Select a Season Grower Farm and Field at the Start Field Operation portion of the Home screen For more information see Start Field Operation on page 23 Once a configuration has been completed the Map View button appears at the bottom of the B Home screen RUN CONFIGURATION Press the Map View button to see the Map screen The map below is displayed in Zoom to B Detail view 148 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION APPLICATION MAP SCREEN ZOOM TO DETAIL ze A GPS Status e B On screen Lightbar e C Ground Speed e D Diagnostics button e E Product tab e F Logging Status button e G AutoSwath e H Map View button e Home button e J Display Legend Coverage LEGEND SELECT During Area Logging Application operations the Map screen displays coverage in the Legend The Legend Setup button on the Map Legend Tab of the Mapping Toolbox opens the Legend Select screen as shown Lagene Select From the Legend Select screen you can use the drop down menu at the top to select your product Other items at this screen include e Press Coverage to show the area where you have already applied a product e If you are using a DirectCommand or rate logging configuration press Rate to show the Rate Legend in the Mapping Toolbox The rate map displays the actual rate being applied This legend is editable Fo
323. t up by using the on screen Dry Fertilizer Blend wizard described in the following steps A dry blend can contain up to seven individual components To create a Dry Fertilizer Blend go to the Setup Product Tab and press the Add button Product Mix Setup Wizard Step 1 of 4 At the Choose Product Type screen press Add Product Mix Sore ay The Product Mix Setup Wizard appears as shown Dry Bland 1 Select Dry Blend from the list box and press the blue right arrow button to continue 2 Enter a Base Amount of product and the controlling Units for the dry product blend Press the blue right arrow button to continue Note The Base Amount is the total weight of product for the fertilizer blend The Base Amount does not need to match the actual volume of product that will be applied but is used only to establish the ratio of all products to the total volume 3 Press the Add button to start the process of adding components to the fertilizer blend Note Any liquid herbicides set up within the system can be added to create an impregnated blend product 4 Select the desired component from the list box New components can be set up at this time if required 5 Enter the amount of the first component 6 Press Add to start adding an additional component A dry mix can contain up to seven individual components 7 The remaining Base Amount that is available after adding product components is shown at the bottom of the on
324. tainer Level allows you to view the amount of product remaining in your container For more information see Rate Control Container Level on page 152 e Rate 1 and Rate 2 buttons 120 The Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings represent preset application rates that allow operators to quickly change between desired target rates for each individual product 01 z e Manual Valve Control button The Manual Valve Control button allows operators to specify the position of the control valve Operators use this option to prime the system before application or clean out the equipment at the end of the day 150 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION e Rate Increase and Decrease Arrows The Increase and Decrease buttons allow Product Application Rate to be changed according to the Target Rate Increment In using manual valve control the increase and decrease buttons allow the position of the control valve to be defined by the operator R e Prescription button For more information see Loading Prescriptions on page 153 e Rate Setup button For more information see Rate Control Settings on page 151 RATE CONTROL SETTINGS Rate Control Settings screen is where you can adjust the Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings shown at the Product Control Toolbox on the Map screen as well as import application product prescriptions To access the Rate Control Settings screen press the Rate Setup button on the Product Control Toolbox The Rate Control
325. te Implement functions can not be mapped to Ag Leader switches VT ALARMS AND TROUBLE CODES pr Virtual Terminal Alarm ru ifthe display receives an active trouble code the Virtual Terminal Alarm A will appear in the Status bar at the top of the home screen Pressing the alarm will take you to the Devices screen 10 13 24 AM 01 27 2011 The Devices screen displays the following information Devices CANA CAN B CAN Name e 963700 00800ca0 Mi A Caution icon indicates module has active 233 ISO NODE elf Configurable Yes SEENEN Eeer trouble codes DTCs Device Cass Sprayers med ap B Equipment Type e C ECU Serial Number e D VT Manufacturer name and code Diagnostics 58 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 ISO Node Diagnostics ECU ID 5000218 1547854 IMPLEMENT VT MODULE AG LEADER TECHNOLOGY Software ID ALTECH VT MODULE 01 00 00 00 VT_MODULE_FW 01 00 00 00 Active Errors Previously Active Errors SPN SPN 522102 522102 523666 523666 Clear Prev Active Errors Cross reference DTC in equipment manufacturer s operator manual for description of error SETUP Pressing the Diagnostics button on the Devices screen brings up the ISO Node Diagnostics screen which shows the following information e SPN Suspect Parameter Number Error Number e FMI Fault Mode Indicator Error State e OC Occurrence Count e DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
326. ter Calibration Flow Control Valve Threshold 120 pls gal PR Hold 30 H Flow Control Delay Auxiliary Valve 1 Timeout os ba Close Auxillary Valve 2 Control Valve Clase Settings At this screen you can make the following settings adjustments e Flow Meter Calibration Calibration value representing the number of pulses that equal one gallon of product flow through the controlling system e Flow Control Delay Setting that specifies a period of time from master switch on and the start of product application to the first flow control correction This setting can be used to eliminate unwanted correction of flow control at the start of each pass Typical setting values are 1 2 seconds for liquid application control e Control Valve Settings Opens the Control Valve Settings screen which displays control valve settings for PWM Servo Calibrated Reflow and Ramsey Valve Controls For more information see below or for more settings see Control Valve Settings Servo Calibrated Reflow and Ramsey Valve on page 146 e Close Flow Control Valve When Rate Off When this is selected the controlling system shuts down when there is either a zero rate in the field or when entering an already applied area When unchecked the controlling system remains in the last known state when the sections are shut off e Auxiliary Valve 1 amp 2 When all boom sections are off
327. tes Select one of the available Hz rates from the drop down menu e Age of Differential Displays the elapsed time since reception of last differential correction signal The Age of Differential button is only functional when GPS is connected 61 SdD e Port Settings Displays the Serial Port Settings screen where you can adjust GPS output For more information see Serial Port Settings on page 65 e Force TSIP Connection Forcibly connects to TSIP GPS receiver Pressing this button will force the port to TSIP communication Reset to Defaults Press the Reset to Defaults button to restore TSIP receiver settings to the factory default This will remove all custom TSIP settings e Ignore NMEA Checksum Check this to ignore intermittent GPS message errors OMNISTAR SETTINGS CZ gt gt ge gt OmniSTAR Differential Source drop down menu gt Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt GPS button gt OmniSTAR Differential Source drop down menu gt Setup wrench button fi Note If using the GPS 2500 receiver see OmniS TAR Settings GPS 2500 on page 63 OmniSTAR Setup Serial Number Provider Settings 0224019369 Frequency Central USA MSV C Differential Source VBS Custom Frequency 1557 835 HP XP Baud Rate 1200 gt HP XP with VBS Backup AutoSeed Fast Restart related to using satellite differential correction vary based upon your geographic location Setup detai
328. tes is shown Conveyor Rates for Products Previn Applied S Daa Press the conveyor rate button and use the numeric keypad Se 02500 to input desired conveyor rate MAP D D Press check mark button to exit the screen Press check mark button to accept the new conveyor rate and return to the Spreader Control window Fan Frame amp Feed Gate Actuator Settings These are optional settings used by operators using a New Leader Linear Actuator module e Fan Frame Checking the Fan Frame check box enables the Fan Frame Actuator Displays the distance between the spinner bed and the spinner assembly Use the numeric keypad to edit this value e Feed Gate Checking the Feed Gate check box enables the Feed Gate Actuator Spreader Control Routine Operations The Spreader Control screen has three buttons Chain Oiler Static Calibration and In Field Calibration which are described below and on the following pages 201 GEIWKET EK Spreader Control Chain Oiler If you are using a Chain Oiler you can automatically perform a chain oiling routine by pressing the Chain Oiler button on the Spreader Control screen and following the steps below G Note Perform a chain oiling routine daily d 1 Press Spreader Control button K Y To begin press the Spreader Control button as shown at left to open the Spreader Control screen At the Spreader Control screen press the Chain Oiler button 2 Acknowledge the first warn
329. the Spreader Control screen and settings These settings include Spread Width Spinner Speed if enabled Product Density Feed Gate Opening and Conveyor Rate For more information see section beginning at Spreader Control screen on page 200 e Conveyor Indicator The Conveyor Indicator is shown at the top of the Equipment Tab when the Map screen is shown in Zoom to Extent When the Map screen is shown in the Zoom to Details view or Perspective View the conveyor indicator is shown as a bar that appears behind the vehicle icon RUN TIME OPERATIONS 755 APM During Run Time Operations Spinner Spreader operators can press the Spreader Control button as shown at left to open the Spreader Control screen At this screen you can adjust Spread Width Spinner Speed Product Density and other settings e Each of these settings described below must be set for each individual Product Channel bin e Changing any of these settings in the display does not make the needed adjustments on the product applicator Setting value and physical setting on the spinner bed must be verified for correctness prior to any product application However if your machine is equipped with Fan Frame amp Feed Gate Actuators and you have also purchased a New Leader Linear Actuator unlock code the settings on the spinner bed will automatically change e The Spread Width Spinner Speed Product Density Feed Gate 1 Opening and the Conveyor 1 Rate are all
330. the arm should engage the lower parallel arm and move half an inch e Configure the Clutch Module on the Implement Tab under Set up to make sure the wiring and power wires are not damaged Ensure there is power to the air compressor Ensure air in the compressor tank and regulator is set to at least 50 psi Ensure air is going to the valve box Manually shut air clutch off with switch box and see if there is air at each clutch section Lubricate Air Clutches Make sure the Auto Swath option is green on the Run Screen in the lower right hand side of screen e Check GPS Off Set measurements for the vehicle Press the Wrench Icon Highlight Configuration Press GPS Offsets in upper left hand corner e Check measurement of application point for planter on pressing the Wrench icon Highlight Configuration Press the Wrench Press Implement Offsets and look at the lower Box y Rev 9 11 f JAIE 3 17 Integra Troubleshooting Guide Service Manual Integra PMM Bar Graph Population or Spacing does not read when start planting e Make sure the correct speed input is selected e Check in the Planter Configuration screen under the Implement tab Most common would be GPS Interplant rows not showing up on run screen e Make sure the configuration with the interplant name was loaded when loading a field Rate on the bar graph does not match selected rate e Make sure the row spacing set up in the PMM is set on the smallest row spacing the monitor will
331. the average yield when grain flow is not present S Si wd i i Displays the instantaneous moisture while there is grain flow and the average when there is no grain flow Guidance ke Boundary e Press Clear Map to permanently remove all map data from the active field operation e Press Load Reference to load a map from a previous operation performed in that field to view as a background map e Press Data Guidance Boundary Marker Reference Rx and Grid to show or remove those items on the Map screen MAP SCREEN FLOW DELAY When the Map screen is running in a Zoom Detail view instantaneous coverage A is shown automatically However there is a time lag between when grain enters the combine through the Header and is logged by the Flow Sensor in the Clean Grain Elevator Because of this time lag the instantaneous coverage is shown on the Map screen as a lighter color than coverage that has been logged B by the display For an example see the picture The Region button located on the Home screen opens the Options screen where you can change or edit regions Flag Region as a Calibration Variety Tracking Load select Automatic Variety Tracking or Automatic Region Changing E Automatic Variety Tracking P Automatic Region Changing Note The Options screen also appears when you create a Field Configuration with the Field Operation Wizard e For more information about changing regions see Home Scre
332. the bottom of the Setup screens are where you can toggle between screens that adjust settings for Configuration Management GPS and display Configuration button _ Press to adjust the configuration settings particular to your vehicle and equipment as well as enter and edit product information For more information see Manage Equipment button on page 13 Product tab on page 13 as well as Configuration Setup Screen on page 25 11 NOILVYNSIANOD e Management button Press to access and edit Grower Farm Field and Operator information For more information see Management button on page 15 GPS button Press to adjust Guidance settings GPS settings and lightbar settings if applicable For more information see Guidance on page 73 e Display button _ Press to adjust settings for Time and Date brightness and volume settings operating units language enable video view features and also create and restore backups CONFIGURATION BUTTON We DB gt da Press Home button gt Setup wrench button gt Configuration tractor button The Setup screens are comprised of the Configuration and Product tab The Configuration tab is explained below the Product tab is described at Product tab on page 13 CONFIGURATION TAB Aen Sat The Setup screen e Configuration Tab is where you Configuration Product can create new configurations view configuration re ai i
333. the line pattern you would like to use Press the GREEN CHECK Once you begin moving press the SET A on the left side of the display Once you have driven far enough a SET B tab will appear Press it The light bar will appear at the top of your screen for manual guidance information NOORON Rev 9 11 rar Fr 13 This page left blank intentionally Integra Troubleshooting Guide Integra Service Manual Hydraulic Drive Settings CONFIGURATION RATE CONTROL CONTROLLER SETTINGS FOR KINZE HYDRAULIC DRIVE 3600 3660 3600 3660 Description EdgeVac Mechanical EdgeVac Mechanical Calibration number representing the Shaft Speed Cal pulses that equal one revolution of the 360 360 360 360 hydraulic motor pls rev Control Valve Setting determines the type of control Gantiauration valve being used for the hydraulic motor PWM PWM PWM PWM g Choices include Servo or RPM Max Meter Speed Setting determines the maximum RPM 150 150 150 150 of the seed meter Ratio of the revolutions of the hydraulic Gear Ratio drive as compared to the revolutions of 2 947 1 533 2 267 1 533 the seed meter The frequency that the PWM control PWM Frequency valve is pulsed at Settings can be found 200 200 200 200 from the manufacturer of the valve Typical settings range from 180 220 Hz Determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate change adjustments The higher the value the 1539 ER tag more aggressive the system res
334. the order in which they were created The calibration s date of creation appears to the cainumbers right of the name Field Name Region Name Estimated Actual Error Enter Weight L ar O 7 Perform New Weight Calibration item After you have created a new calibration it is H 3 lt recommended that you perform another Weight nint fanen aout Ge Calibration Refer to Grain Weight Calibration on page 236 AREA CALIBRATION If at the end of your field operation your field totals are a different number than the known area of your field then you can perform an area calibration to correct this discrepancy SS Note This step is optional and may not be necessary for all users 1 Open Grain Calibration screen re Go to the Home screen and press the Setup wrench button When the Setup screen opens highlight your operating configuration and press the Setup wrench button which opens the Configuration Setup screen At the Configuration Setup screen press the Grain Calibration button The Grain Calibration screen appears as shown 240 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 Grain Calibration vie Y Grain Weight Calibration Field Name Region Name Estimated Actual North 30 13 4399 4452 L2 Morth 30 lt i gt 4402 4378 0 5 North 30 lt 3 gt 3693 3720 0 7 North 30 3 3229 3211 0 6 Area Adjustment Area Calibration 100 HARVEST 2 Open Area Calibration screen
335. tion that you Continue with Full Calibration just performed Linear Calibration Complete Note A full calibration requires four or more loads as compared to the Linear Calibration that you just performed which can be performed with three loads or less 15 Examine Error Percentage When the calibration is finished a screen appears stating Full Calibration Complete Examine the error percentages before checking Pi anti al un the check mark button From here you will return to the Grain Calibration screen Full Calibration Complete 238 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST Grain Calibration 16 Uncheck Loads With Excessive Error Percentages AE At the Grain Calibration screen take note of any Grain Weight Calibration Field Name Region Name Estimated Actual Eat EI 1 calibration loads that have excessive error percentages if eatin ee eee Ses In the example at left Region 4 has an error percentage Worth 30 zi gt 4406 4378 0 6 ETA of 35 6 percent sg North 30 lt i gt 3695 3720 0 7 You should be able to calibrate the display for grain weight to an average error of 1 to 3 If the average error is more than 3 uncheck the load with ue emer verten trist the maximum error Then re perform the calibration by pressing the Perform Calibration button Note You must still have at least four calibration loads checked in order to perform a full calibr
336. to the Rate Control Settings screen the Prescription rate A is now shown on the screen The Load Prescription button has disappeared and in its place is the pate 1 cerea Remove Prescription button B which resembles a minus ve d sign Press the Remove Prescription button if you wish to See g remove the prescription from the field 5 When you return to the Map screen the prescription is now shown on the map as illustrated in Showing Prescriptions on the Map Screen on page 113 SHOWING PRESCRIPTIONS ON THE MAP SCREEN On the Map screen s Mapping Toolbox press the Legend Setup wrench tool and the Legend Select screen appears as shown Notice that the Rx prescription button appears at this screen 113 104HLNO 9 ALVYU Legend Select 1 Press the Rx button to show a legend of the I prescription rate 2 2 After pressing the Rx button when you wa return to the Map screen the prescription rate appears on the Legend This legend is not editable e A Prescription Rate Legend EI CT ITT IR CT CT Planter Drives rpm 19 147 TROUBLESHOOTING The Troubleshooting Section consists of the following pages e Fixing Overplanting and Underplanting in AutoSwath on page 98 e Hydraulic Seed Control Zero Flow Offset Variation on page 114 e Stepper Seed Control Meter Alarms on page 115 e Alarms on KINZE Planter Monitor on page 139 HYDRAULI
337. to view Planter Performance screen and Row Performance screen PLANTER PERFORMANCE SCREEN ot 2 34 SES A All Rows B HH S e B Hydraulic Drive 32000 Population Row 1 32000 sds ac bd C Bar G raph e D Population e E Spacing Quality e F Singulation e G Skips Doubles e H Seed Monitor Options Advance Seed Monitoring provides planter performance monitoring of seed meter singulation skips doubles and spacing quality along with population and spacing information for all rows when corn planting Display provides a full screen planter performance view that includes display items and bar graphs for population singulation skips doubles and spacing quality In addition Advanced Seed Monitoring 124 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING automatically determines and displays the rows operating at the highest and lowest levels for singulation and population The Planter Performance screen displays planter averages for population spacing quality singulation and skips doubles The screen also shows the averages for specific drive sections Bar graph can show individual row information for the averages shown on buttons D G e A All Rows Displays the planter average for the four display items D E F and G at the bottom of the screen e B Hydraulic Drive Displays the drive status drive RPM and target population for the hydraulic drive There can be up to three displayed
338. tomatic Region Changing e You may use the keyboard button to enter your own name for a new region IF Fiag Roa peal e If you would like to use a region in the weight calibration select the Flag Region as Calibration Load check box Variety Tracking Automatic Variety Trackine ai Automatic Region Clear Changing Variety Map 226 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST Automatic Variety Tracking e If you want to enable the Automatic Variety Tracking feature select only the Automatic Variety Tracking check box Do not select the Automatic Region Changing check box Note A variety map must be present to enable Automatic Variety Tracking e If no variety map is present then you can either manually assign a variety from the Variety Tracking List located to the right of the Automatic Variety Tracking check box or import a variety reference map For more information see Importing Variety Maps on page 227 Automatic Region Changing If you wish to enable the Automatic Region Changing feature select both the Automatic Variety Tracking check box and the Automatic Region Changing check box In Field Messages If you have selected either the Automatic Variety Tracking or Automatic Region Changing features you will see one of the following messages as you harvest your field Variety Tracking e If you have selected Automatic Variety Tracking the message at left tells that the display has detected
339. ton gt Configuration tab gt your specific configuration gt Setup wrench button gt Controller Settings button Controller Settings screen appears with each channel s settings shown on its own tab The settings shown at this screen vary depending upon whether your spreader uses a PWM Control Valve or a Servo Control Valve Use the Control Valve Configuration drop down menu to choose the appropriate configuration for your machine Settings for a PWM Control Valve are described below settings for a Servo Valve are described at Spreader Control Servo Control Valve on page 196 The Spinner Tab appears behind the channel tabs The Spinner Tab is where Fan Speed settings are shown The Spinner Tab and Fan Speed settings are described at Spreader Control Spinner Tab on page 197 195 eqaqvVvaAddS Spreader Control PWM Control Valve Spreader Control a e PWM Frequency Channel I hanne Channe pinner Control Valve Configuration The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at Settings can be found from the manufacturer of the valve gt Allowable at SPeeacalibration Typical settings range from 100 125 Hz The Default PWM Frequency 100 E et ouer Bl Setting IS 100 2 Max Speed PWM Gain 100 omg e PWM Gain zero Flow Offset 30 Determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate adjustments The higher the value the more aggressive the system response
340. tput Can be used to connect to a video projector for demonstration purposes e E 28 pin auxiliary connection Used for camera input e F 28 pin plug The 28 Pin round connector contains CAN RS 232 serial and system power and ground connections It is compatible with the InSight and EDGE displays and includes an Ethernet connection for ParaDyme automated steering e G Power Reset switch The Power Reset switch is used for turning the INTEGRA display on and off in installations where the system is connected to a continuous power supply If the INTEGRA display ever stops responding the manual power switch may be held in for five seconds to restart the system Only do this as a last resort data loss could occur during times of improper shutdown e A USB media slot e Used for data transfer in and out of the display H Light sensitivity sensor Used to automatically dim the display during nighttime or low light Situations e I Power light The power light displays one of three states When it is green the display is on when it pulses amber the display is in Standby Mode and when it is solid amber the display is running on battery power INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS All machine installation and mounting kits are shipped with instructions specific to that kit Instructions include special details relating to mounting wiring and display configuration Mount the display to a secure support inside the vehicle cab Th
341. ual application can occur The calibration number found on the tag of the Vee ere saa injection pump s digital speed sensor needs to be divided by a factor of 10 number is pump cal 10 before entering it as the factory calibration number If the factory cal number is entered wrong the pump calibration routine will not finish due to a high application error 3 Pin Conxall Notes The pump calibration will fail if error is gt 10 from the factory calibration number Refer to injection calibration routine e H the calibration fails check pump and plumbing for physical damage or excess wear Direct Injection Discharge Flow Sensor Error The discharge flow sensor is used as a system check to see if product is actually exiting the E output of the pump The sensor is a shuttle NW 49 ane discharge m valve that allows feedback for every stroke of monitor is registering avalue the pump If the user has enabled the Flow Monitor Warning the display will provide a message if the discharge flow sensor falls out of its calibrated value See table below for pin locations status light on run screen showing green Refer to manufacturer documentation to test flow monitor sensor LED light on the injection pump flashing Check error threshold found in the controller settings 178 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION DISCHARGE FLOW SENSOR PIN OUTS Module Auxiliary Connection 12 Pin Socke
342. ult uses the default rate written in the prescription file loaded e Rate Display Smoothing Determines how the feedback from the control channel s rate sensor will be displayed on the run screen When checked the system will display the target rate when the application rate is within 10 of the target rate setting When unchecked the system will display the raw feedback from the rate sensor e Minimum Flow This setting is used to maintain a consistent spray pattern The display will not allow flow to drop below the entered setting Set to flow at the lowest operating pressure for the selected spray tips with all sections on When spraying with one or more boom sections off the system automatically reduces the minimum flow setting according to the reduced spray width To adjust this setting select the keyboard button and enter the desired numeric value e Controller Time Delay Compensates for any delay in the control system when changing between different product flow rates during variable rate application Speed Input Settings e Primary Speed Source Main speed input source used by the display e Backup Speed Source lf the primary speed source fails the display will use the backup if one is available e Manual Speed If both of the speed input sources are unavailable manual speed can be used in order for the control channel to provide application Manual speed setting is for use during static machine testing or by the control system in
343. umber representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system e Max Metering Speed Setting determines the maximum RPM of the metering shaft that controls product distribution to the application point This setting is used when controlling a granular strip till toolbar 211 TIL did LS Strip Till Control PWM Control Valve Strip Till Control Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel a Auxiliary Control Valve Configuration FAM Frequency Allowable haf p Error SEI Calibration Max Metering PWM Gain Speed Zera Flow Offset 100 rpm B e PWM Frequency The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at Settings can be found from the manufacturer of the valve Typical settings range from 100 125 Hz The Default Setting is 100 e PWM Gain Determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate changes The higher the value the more aggressive the system response Is The Default Setting is 100 e Zero Flow Offset Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve Using too high of a Zero RPM Offset value can cause the conveyor to not properly shut off see the PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings The Default Setting is 30 e Allowable Error Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate changes 2
344. ump Calibration press the Perform Calibration button 3 Prime the Direct Injection Pump The Pump Calibration Wizard appears Before beginning this calibration procedure it is recommended that you first prime the Direct Injection pump Press the Prime button and continue along with the priming procedure as described in Priming an Injection Pump beginning with Step 3 on page 173 After the priming procedure is finished you will return to this Pump Calibration Wizard window Press the blue right arrow button to continue 4 Enter the Dispense Amount Enter the amount that you want dispensed Press Next to continue 5 Acknowledge the Warning Prepare to catch any product dispensed in an appropriate container Press the green check mark button to continue Pump Calibration Wizard Step 4 of 6 6 Start Calibration pump wil stop automatically Press the green colored START button to begin the eset calibration procedure The Pump Calibration Wizard automatically counts up to the amount that you specified in Step 4 The button will turn red and displays STOP while the product is being dispensed an example is shown at left When the procedure is finished the button will again turn green Press the blue right arrow button to continue 172 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Note You may press the Reset button if you wish to start the calibration procedure over 7 Enter Actual Dispense Amount Enter in
345. ust Nudge Settings see Nudge on page 86 GUIDANCE TAB AFTER SMARTPATH CREATED OR LOADED Note For more information on SmartPath see SmartPath on page 79 If you specify SmartPath at the New Pattern screen then the Guidance Tab Guida will appear as shown at left For more information see Reset Pattern on page 85 Save Pattern n Lol For more information see Save Pattern on page 82 Active Line Cycle button Press to cycle between different pattern lines For more information see Select a Previous SmartPath Pass on page 80 8 Begins the creation of an A B line within a SmartPath pattern For more information see Create AB Line Within a SmartPath Pass on page 80 and also Choose Existing AB Lines Within SmartPath on page 81 GUIDANCE TAB AFTER A B LINE CREATED WITHIN SMARTPATH If you have created an A B line within a SmartPath pattern then the Guidance Tab will appear as shown at left Guidance a ist A B SmartPath Toggle Press to cycle between AB lines and SmartPath patterns For more information see Create AB Line Within a SmartPath Pass on page 80 76 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 NEw AB PATTERN Use the following procedure to create a new pattern The following example explains how to create an AB line Note Pattern options other than Straight AB are explained in full detail on About Guidance Patterns on page 87
346. ut Baud Rate 4600 Sg m VTG Speed zoa Qutput Parity None S z e Gu RMC GPS Pos Rate Hz 1 Deeg n mama IE C ex C mss b GGA Position Output Fata Hz fy x e Output Type Displays what type of protocol the receiver is using NMEA or TSIP e Output Baud Rate Displays the speed at which the receiver communicates with the display For optimal performance the GPS baud rate should be set at 192000 or higher e Output Parity Displays either Odd or None If using TSIP this setting should be Odd If using NMEA this setting should be None G Note Parity refers to a technique for checking data integrity after transmission e GPS Pos Rate Hz Represents the cycles per second shown in Hz that the display receives position information from viewable satellites This is the same number as shown on GPS Rate Hz drop down list menu located on the General Tab e Output Rate Hz Represents the cyclical rate in Hz at which the receiver sends information to the display This field shows a value of either 1 or ASAP The default rate is 1 Hz ASAP represents a Hz value of more than 1 e NMEA Messages These checkboxes represent various communication protocols or formats that have been set by the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA and used in information strings or sentences output by the GPS Receiver At
347. utton et I n Appears at the bottom right hand side of the Map screen displays the number of ELTI SC hydraulic seed control motors and their speed shown in Revolutions Per Minute RPM Pressing the Meter RPM button summons the Seed Rate Planter Control screen where you can calibrate and prime the seed meters For more information see Priming Seed Rate Meters on page 109 and Calibrating Seed Rate Meters on page 109 anter Average 26100 sdsfac Spacing 8 0 in Ten Shaft Speed Duter Left 60 rpm Inner Left 60 ram A Planter Drives rem 19 26 134 124 E le p oh e D Master Switch Status e E AutoSwath indicator e F Section Indicators Shown at the top of the Equipment Tab when the Map screen is shown in Zoom to Extent When the Map screen is shown in the Zoom Details view or Perspective View the section indicators are shown as a bar that appears behind the vehicle icon 138 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 PLANTING e G Population Monitor Bar Graph Shows the number of row units as well as the instantaneous percentage planter average of seeds being distributed on each row unit e H Shaft Speed Displays the speed of the planter drive shafts in RPM Other KINZE PMM Map screen items are described at KINZE Planter Monitor Options on page 137 and also KINZE Display Items on Equipment Tab on page 138 TROUBLESHOOTING ALARMS ON KI
348. w value of moisture sensor 241 DNIHOLINON AGUTAIA e Temperature Air temperature shown in Celsius e Temperature Raw Raw value of temperature sensor e Proximity Sensor Shows if Elevator Mount Unit sensor is covered with grain e Relay Status Shows on or off e Motor Current Measure of Elevator Mount Unit EMU current shown in amps HARVEST DIAGNOSTIC NOTES e For generalized Diagnostic information such as memory display CAN device and firmware version information see Device Information on page 45 e For more information on LED diagnostic states see Module LED Diagnostic States on page 250 242 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 HARVEST CLAAS QUANTIMETER The CLAAS Quantimeter Optical Sensing System includes the option of interfacing with the display This option is available for LEXION combines of the 670 model and above The display communicates with a Bridge Module This Bridge Module receives data from the combine via the CEBIS CLAAS Electronic On Board Information System monitor which is then relayed to the display The Bridge module can also interface with the ParaDyme Automated Steering system CONFIGURATION FOR CLAAS QUANTIMETER 1 Go to the Setup screen s Configuration Tab 2 Press the Add plus sign button to add an operating configuration 3 Press the Harvest button to create a new harvest operating configuration 4 The Operating Configuration Wizard appears Press the Add plus sig
349. will cause the actuator to run slower The Default Setting is 18 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPLICATION Strip Till Control e Response Threshold Determines where the control channel switches between using Actuator Response 1 and Actuator Response 2 speed settings Leaving all other actuator control settings at the default value and making a small adjustment to this setting is usually all that is required to fine tune system performance The default setting is 4 Allowable Error Shaft Speed Calibration A 180 plsirev 3 25 II E Max Metering Single Bin Actuator ba Speed Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of speeding up actuator response Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing actuator response Multiple Bin Actuator Main Only Multiple Bin Actuator Main Channel e Allowable Error Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate changes 2 3 is the normal dead band setting range Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target application rate Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error e Shaft Speed Cal Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system e Max Conveyor Speed Setting determines the maximum RPM of the conveyor that controls product distributio
350. wing procedure 1 Press Load Pattern Press the Load Pattern button on the Guidance screen 82 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 2 Select a Pattern The Load Pattern screen appears as shown Select and highlight the desired pattern If the pattern you selected was an AB Line that pattern now appears on the Map Preview Press the green check mark button to continue EET 3 Select Guidance Method optional If you have chosen to load a curved pattern Name Swath Created Pattern I the Autosteer screen appears Select either dential Curve or Adaptive Curve ut WO 60 000 12 23 2009 Straight e A Map Preview 1 60 000 12 23 2009 Curve Ee Note For more information on Adaptive Curve see Adaptive Curve on page 88 4 Enter Guidance Width optional The Shift Pattern screen appears The default Guidance Width is shown based on the Implement Width that you specified in Implement Configuration If you wish to change this Guidance Width enter the new number using the numeric keypad Press the blue right arrow button to continue Shift Pattern 5 Select Shift Pattern Shift Units The Shift Pattern screen appears as shown Shift By Distance Shift By Rows If you have chosen the Shift by Distance Feet Inches option use the numeric keypads to select nb the distance in feet and inches that you ME em wish to shift the pattern Use the bottom ER mean si drop down menu to enter the direction
351. wn arrow to select an Operating Configuration Press the blue right arrow button to continue 3 Product Selection Users creating a Field Operating Configuration in either Planting or Application must select a product from the drop down list Press the blue right arrow button to continue At the Options screen enter ina Controlling Product and Units If you wish to create a new Instance press the Instance box to the right of the Product selection drop down list 4 Region Options For DirectCommand and Rate Control SeedCommand Operating configurations the Options screen will appear Use the on screen keyboard button to edit or change the region name from the system default if desired At this screen you can also create a new region or change the controlling product 5 When you complete the steps in the Wizard you will return to the Home screen e H you are selecting an Application product you may check the box marked Show Only Tank Mixes and Blends at the Product Selection screen If this box is checked the display will only allow the selection of tank mixes that were previously set up e For information on Run screen operations see Run screens on page 27 23 NAIYDSG NNY FIELD FINDER If you have an existing field boundary and your current GPS position is within that field boundary the display will automatically pick the correct Grower Farm and Field combination when you start a Field Operation FIELD OPERATION OPTIONS
352. wn arrows select the desired GROWING SEASON GROWER FARM and FIELD 3 Press the BLUE ARROW 4 Using the drop down arrow select the desired OPERATION CONFIGURATION you are going to use 5 Press the RIGHT BLUE ARROW 6 7 8 9 1 SE Ed i Using the drop down arrow select the desired PRODUCT Press the GREEN CHECK Confirm the Product by pressing the GREEN CHECK Press the GRID button in the lower left corner 0 This will take you to the main Run Screen eg 6 4 Aa J Rev 9 11 Integra service Manual Setting Seeding Rate IMPORTANT To Load the Run Screen you will need to have your Integra display in the tractor and connected to the planter Press the RATE box in the upper right of the screen Press the WRENCH button to the right of the screen Press the KEYPAD button for Rate 1 Enter desired SEEDING RATE value Press the GREEN CHECK Press the KEYPAD button for Rate 2 Enter the desired SEEDING RATE value Press the GREEN CHECK Press the KEYPAD button for Increment 10 Enter the TARGET RATE INCREMENT value to be used for Quick Rate Change 11 Press the GREEN CHECK 12 Press the BACK ARROW 13 Press the PLANTER DRIVES RPM box in the lower right of the screen 14 Press the KEYBOARD button for sds rev 15 Enter the SEEDS PER REVOLUTION value Mechanical Meters Corn 12 EdgeVac Standard Rate Corn 39 EdgeVac Low Rate Corn 24 Soybeans Mechanical or EdgeVac 60 16 Press the GREEN CHECK 17 Press the BACK ARROW to
353. wth Stage shown at Crop Sensor Setup The Growth Stage of the corn plant identified by the number of leaf collars present on the plant Choices available on the InSight display are V6 V7 and V8 V10 e Max Rate shown at Crop Sensor Setup The highest amount of N that should be applied e Min Rate shown at Crop Sensor Setup The lowest amount of N that should be applied eN Refers to Nitrogen being applied e N Algorithm The OptRx Crop Sensor Module uses an N algorithm to calculate an N rate through a Sufficiency Index reading e Rate Increment shown at Crop Sensor Setup An optional increment that the display can use to round the N rate applied if the operator desires For example if the operator enters the number 5 and the InSight display is applying a rate of 27 the number will be rounded to 25 e Rate Offset shown at Crop Setup screen Modifies the applied rate in the event of significant field stresses during a season such as drought conditions or to make adjustments because of soil type e Reference Strip The healthiest portion of your field where you are satisfied that N is sufficient This allows a baseline of optimum crop performance that the system can compare against other cropland Reflectance The light reading of the plant measured by individual light spectral wavelength The comparison of different reflectance values can be used to determine the health of the plant e VI Vegetation Index The recorded va
354. y Shown as Indicator Light A on Bridge Module in Bridge Module on page 247 Solution Check cabling between Bridge Module and display 248 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 APPENDIX APPENDIX SYSTEM DIAGRAMS REFERENCE To view detailed system diagrams for various machine configurations go to the Support Tab of the Ag Leader Web site which can be referenced via the following URL http www agleader com customer support product manuals Note To view and or print the System diagrams you will need the Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader pdf file format The Adobe Reader software comes pre installed on most personal computers If Adobe Reader is not installed on your computer the program is available for download at no charge A link to the Adobe download site is located at the Ag Leader Web site FILE FORMATS PRESCRIPTION MAP FILE TYPES e irx The irx file supports multiple product recommendations in a single file e shp shx dbf shape file group What is commonly called a shape file is actually a collection of three different files All three of the files are required and must be present on the USB drive for the system to use shape file groups for variable rate product application A single shape file can contain recommendation rates for multiple products BOUNDARY AND GUIDELINE FILE TYPES e iby Boundary file format Boundary files are created at the Boundary Tab found on the Mapping Toolbox of the Map scr
355. yboard button to access the on screen text entry screen ISS EI CICI CICI EI EI CI EI CI EI Ce LELE GG DROE D II An on screen Numeric Keypad is made available for changing configuration settings and calibration numbers Press the keypad button to access the on screen numeric entry screen 10 INTEGRA Firmware Version 2 5 CONFIGURATION HOME SCREEN C Press Home button Configuration Start Field m le 11 00 18 AM 12022009 SETUP Most of the functionality of the display is not available until the basic setup process is ee a A Status bar B Setup button C Task bar You must complete these initial configuration steps for the Run Time Environment to be active 1 Grower Farm and Field management For more information See Management button on page 15 2 Equipment Operating Configuration You can access Configuration Setup by pressing the Setup wrench button B at the upper right hand portion of the Home screen For more information see Configuration button on page 12 3 Product setup For more information see Product tab on page 13 as well as the additional configuration information described in each Operations chapter 4 Start Field Operation For more information Start Field Operation on page 23 SETUP BUTTONS BP gt Press Home button gt Setup wrench button The Setup buttons shown at

Integra - J&S Repair, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Integra - J&amp;S Repair, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Integra - J&S Repair, Inc.